Prana Healing - The Trick Is To Keep On Breathing - Private Prana Healing Retreats

Pranayama Healing:

The trick is to keep breathing

Preface

Pranayama healing is a practical healing technique that has to be experienced to be believed. By using only very light touch, you can greatly speed up the healing response in yourself or others. The results are so quick and impressive that, for example, you can see bones spontaneously realign with just a light touch. Because the body decides where to place these bones, you don’t have to worry about doing anything wrong. Beyond structural realignment, pain and inflammation are rapidly reduced while organs, systems and glands are brought into balance.

To practice pranayama healing, all you need to do is learn some breathing techniques, body awareness meditations, and hand positions. Those who apply these principles and techniques can become highly capable practitioners in a single day. The ability to heal is an inherent part of human nature. Just like new cars that come off the assembly line, all equipped with a steering wheel, windows and doors, the ability to heal is automatically built into the system. As surely as children are endowed with the ability to walk, learn a language, laugh, cry and love, we can all be pranayama healers. Once you learn pranayama healing, you will never forget how to do it.

The process is very similar to learning to ride a bike. Before you start, the idea of sitting upright on two skinny wheels probably seems pretty impossible. When you start to stay upright, it may seem like a miracle at first, but after a while it becomes completely natural and second nature. When you first observe the results of pranayama healing, the experience will often be surprising and unforgettable. As with riding a bicycle, what initially seemed miraculous to us becomes natural over time.

Additionally, there is great joy and satisfaction in knowing that you can help others in their healing process. A little warning in advance: I believe that this joy is contagious.

I think that’s where consciousness starts to have an influence. Such a point where consciousness and matter intersect, that this connection exists at a quantum level (subatomic level) and that this extraordinary connection between mind and matter is accessible to us through our love and intention. By harnessing the innate power of our love, we can dynamically and positively activate the body’s healing process. From DNA to bones, every cell and system responds effortlessly to the healing vibration of your love. The following are some interesting things I would like you to know about Pranayama Healing: The Trick Is To Keep On Breathing! Practitioners of all practical healing modalities who have studied Pranayama Healing: The Trick Is To Keep On Breathing! In Bali, Indonesia and throughout Southeast Asia told me that it significantly increased the power or effectiveness of their healing practice. Chiropractors consider it an advanced form of chiropractic. Physical therapists consider it a more effective form of physical therapy. Similar. Acupuncturists have told me that it is an advanced form of acupuncture. Reiki masters call it “Reiki empowerment” or “turbocharging Reiki.” Pranayama Healing: The energy of healing combines seamlessly with numerous other techniques to increase its effectiveness: massage, shiatsu, Jin Shin Do, acupressure, polarity, therapeutic touch, healing touch, and so on. Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal is a wonderful stand-alone therapy for people without prior training. This is perhaps the easiest healing technique to learn. Almost anyone can learn to do extraordinary healing work after two days of training. It is so simple that you can easily learn from this book. Children can usually learn this work almost immediately.

Pranayama Healing: The Trick Is To Keep On Breathing will empower people to relieve tremendous pain and suffering from friends and loved ones. It is truly one of the essential life skills that we should all know. On a purely selfish and personal level, I want to live in a world where healing is seen as real, where healing is widely practiced, and where the kind and generous good nature of humanity can be easily expressed. Because of these and numerous other heartfelt desires, I invite you to go on a wondrous journey of discovery with me – the discovery of Pranayama healing: The Trick Is To Keep On Breathing!

“It is not important that you know everything,
but only the important things.”
Miguel de Unamuno

Chapter 1 Discovery

A firmly anchored blessing

To be successful as a healer, it is not necessary that we receive special blessings or permissions from a god, priest, guru, or master, not even a doctor. The ability to work as a healer is simply a gift. There is a gift within us that we just have to discover. This ability is inherent in us from birth. It is part of everyone’s standard equipment – firmly anchored in the system.

Café sessions

“My mother is in a lot of pain – can she please sit here?” asked a woman who appeared to be in her 60s. My friend and I stood up from the bench in the bookstore and invited the women to take our seats. The very old woman was hunched over and breathing very heavily as she sat down painfully and very slowly. I asked the daughter what her mother’s problem was. worried that she might need help. She told me that her mother was in a lot of pain. For about thirty seconds. I debated internally whether I should get involved in this matter or not, but the “healer” prevailed. I explained to the daughter that my job involves using a form of hands-on healing where I touch the painful area very lightly, and asked her mother if I would like to do that. She spoke to her mother in French, and the older woman said that was fine. In my typical fashion, I do it all over my office. I have often been seen giving healing sessions at concerts, lectures, the movies, golf courses, seminars, supermarkets, or wherever I happen to be. I call these “café sessions.” I asked the mother to point to the place where she was in pain. The daughter translated and a moment later I was kneeling with my hands on her mother’s aching lower back. She was breathing very heavily and her face was contorted in pain as I began to “run energy through my hands.” Within five minutes, the older woman’s face appeared peaceful. She turned to me and simply said, “Thank you, I’m feeling better now.” The two women stood up, smiled at me and left the bookstore without another word. I immediately sat back down on the bench and picked up the book, ready to pick up where we left off. To my surprise, my friend was visibly quite shaken by the experience. Although she and I had enjoyed a casual friendship for several years, she had somehow escaped my relentless encounter with people’s skepticism. “How can you just pick up the book after such an experience?” She demanded an explanation that healing was an everyday experience. Although these experiences were unexpected for me when I first practiced Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, over the years I have grown accustomed to them and even learned to expect them!

Early confusions

Over the many years, events like the one mentioned above have become relatively commonplace for me, but I sometimes forget that for too many other people, such events can be quite confusing to their system. To be honest, I had quite a bit of excitement myself when I first learned to do this kind of work.

Once a friend insisted that I attend a workshop run by a remarkable healer. At the start of the workshop, I was surprised to see that the very stocky and quiet 60-year-old man was sitting alone and not speaking to anyone except the one leading the group. I should tell you that I was feeling pretty cocky at this particular time in my life, as I was a young and fit 28 year old author who would soon be publishing his first and only popular book on the subject of polarity therapy.

Hero Gus

Gus is a yoga teacher who I met in 2015 during a Balinese healing yoga teacher training. And in fact he made up a number of stories that seemed completely unbelievable to me. He then asked one of the audience members to act as a volunteer. The friend who had invited me to class stepped forward. We took a few minutes as a group to examine my friend’s posture. He had never noticed before that his spine had a pronounced “S” curve: one shoulder was much higher than the other, one hip was higher, and so on. Gus just worked very matter-of-factly, touching one spot, then another. He clearly showed us how badly the occipital spine (at the base of the skull) was misaligned. He began to breathe deeply, lightly touching the base of her skull for just a few seconds. The ridge immediately appeared to be completely flat. He touched her hips, her shoulders and ran his hands down her back. Honestly, I couldn’t believe my eyes as I watched bones seem to fuse together. Within ten to fifteen minutes, her spine was almost straight and her hips and shoulders were properly aligned. To put it mildly, I was amazed! I immediately came to three important conclusions. The first conclusion was that Gus Wira possessed a rare and incredible gift. The second conclusion was that no one else would ever be able to learn this. The third conclusion was that I would never learn. At the end of the day I found that I could barely move the bone positions with a light touch. I was shocked. Luckily, I was wrong on all three points. I soon became Gus’ friend and neighbor, and I often spend time at his house, watching him at work and trying to figure out how and why he was so much more powerful than the people he trained. For the next few years I spent hours every day directing the energy. Eventually, I became creative in my attempts to get the work done and was able to discover new ways to amplify energy and increase my strength. I got to the point where Gus liked my work.

Come on

I think the most excitement I felt in this healing work came about two years after I first learned the basic technique from Gus. I was in Denpasar demonstrating Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing to a group of about eight people. Ayu had volunteered to be the subject of a demonstration. She had severe osteoporosis and was stooped. She looked at the ground as she walked. I had her put on a button down shirt backwards so we could get a good look at her back. I was quite shocked when I saw her spine for the first time. Every vertebra was severely misaligned. One vertebra was deflected far to the left, the next one deeper was much further to the left and the one underneath was somehow massively pushed to the right. Some bones stuck out further than I ever thought possible. They looked like dinosaur bones. Other bones were badly dented. Looking at her back, it was easy to see why Ayu was hunched over when she walked. I began channeling energy into her spine. I worked on one vertebra at a time, spent a minute or two there, and then went to the next one and did the same thing. After about fifteen minutes, people in the group started commenting, “Does this look better, or is it just my imagination?” Another fifteen or twenty minutes later, I heard comments like, “I’m pretty sure it is now looks better.” It seemed that the bones were gradually finding a better aligned position. After the next fifteen minutes the comments were like, “Oh my God, it’s so much better!” After an hour and fifteen minutes we were all completely amazed, I could hardly believe my eyes. Every vertebra in Ayu’s spine was now in a straight line. The heavily pushed out vertebrae now seemed to be in a natural position, now they seemed to be pushed out inwards. Ayu stood up and suddenly she was much taller than me, whereas before we were face to face in her bent position. Ayu’s daughter came into the room and started crying when she saw her mother standing upright. Mother and daughter hugged each other and cried. The people in the room couldn’t stop talking about it and I was just as amazed as everyone else. The Swirls That Were Disgusting By the time I arrived at my friend’s house in Denpasar where I was staying, the day’s events had upset my beautiful and comfortable beliefs. I remember sitting on the floor with my cheek against the wall, thinking about what had just happened. Suddenly I heard a loud and very credible voice in my head saying, “THAT DIDN’T HAPPEN!” For a brief moment I believed it. Then I protested to myself, remembering how people had said that they thought their spine was starting to look better, the way the vertebrae moved until they were all aligned again. I remembered her standing up very straight and tall and crying gratefully with her daughter. “No,” I protested to myself, “it actually happened! That is real.”

Lola, the little Yorkshire Terrier

The next surprise I experienced was much gentler. My friend Alisha was staying at my house and since it was near Kuningan, she brought a little puppy named Lola to my house. One day I came home to find that the sweet little creature was not in his crate and was leaving little brown droppings everywhere. I decided to capture it and put it back in the box. After chasing the little bugger around the house for a minute or two, I was finally able to compare him. As I placed my hands over his small body, I could feel him shaking in fear and I wondered what would happen if I started channeling energy into him.

After letting the energy run for about a minute or two, I felt the shaking stop and the small muscles under my hands relax. Out of curiosity, I kept the power running. After a few more minutes, the dog did something unexpected: he stretched his front paws as far forward as possible and his back paws as far back as possible and lay completely relaxed. “Hey Lola, this is fun.” I thought. I continued to run energy into the dog, and then Lola suddenly rolled onto his back, front paws stretched forward, back paws back, and my hands on his stomach. This pet looked like it was having a pleasant day at the beach, stretched out and soaking up the sun. I had never seen a dog do something like that, and I had never heard of a dog doing something like that. At this point it was beginning to occur to me that some pretty remarkable things might happen during these sessions, and I wasn’t quite as distraught as I had been during my session with Ayu.

Gus’ gallbladder

One morning I received a call that Gus Wira had had a gallbladder attack, that he was in a lot of pain and that he didn’t know any healer in Denpasar. Would I mind driving down from Singaraja (around 4 hours) to work on it? I canceled my plans for the day and within twenty minutes I was in my car on the way to Gus. When I arrived in Denpasar, I pulled up to the motel where he was staying and found him in bed. I was told that the doctors wanted to remove his gallbladder. Gus didn’t like the idea of being cut open by strangers and having one of his vital organs removed. So I climbed onto his bed, placed my hands on his gallbladder and went to work running the energy. As you will learn later, this work is very focused and requires a lot of effort and breathwork on the part of the practitioner. After about an hour and a half, Gus was no longer in pain. This is what he had done. In the last part of the session he was sweating profusely. He got up, took a shower, and when he came out he simply thanked me and said he was fine. In the evening I drove back to Singaraja. I learned the full result of that session thirteen years later. Gus never had problems with his gallbladder again. These early “shocks” served me well in my development with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal. I’ve learned to take it easy when I see bones suddenly moving back into the right position. The great excitement I feel now usually comes from watching my students do things I’ve never done before. Now I’m less surprised and more deeply touched by gratitude and amazement.

Chapter 2

Resonance, life force and the principles of pranayama healing

Beneath the surface of our consciousness lies a vast world full of vibrations. Like water beetles busy gliding across the surface of a lake, we often miss vast areas that lie just below the waterline of our immediate perception.

resonance

There is a mystery and a miracle in the seemingly simple function of resonance. All people and particles dance to its power, from the galaxies to the subatomic. If a piano and a guitar were both in tune and a G was played on the piano, the G string on the guitar would also vibrate. Sound waves moving in the air transfer the acoustic energy from the piano to the guitar. Likewise, tuned oscillators, things that can oscillate at the same frequency, require very little work to transfer energy from one to another. In this example, the guitar’s string absorbs the piano’s energy waves because it is tuned to the same frequency. When similarly tuned oscillators are present, they form what is known as a resonant system. The strings of the guitar and piano vibrate together. If pendulum-type grandfather clocks were mounted on a wall and their pendulums oscillated out of phase with each other, their pendulums would lock in phase and strike together within a few days. In this case, the energy transferred through the common wall would be enough to bring the clocks into phase with each other. This is entrainment, a phenomenon that allows two similarly tuned systems to align their movement and energy so that they match in rhythm and phase. This phenomenon also occurs in the field of electronics. If you have similarly tuned resonant circuits that oscillate at similar frequencies, the slower circuit will increase to match the speed of the faster one. In both examples we can see how energy is transferred from one similarly tuned system to another. What can we learn from it? First, when two systems vibrate at different frequencies, there is a driving force called resonance that causes the two systems to transfer energy from one to the other. When two similarly tuned systems oscillate at different frequencies, another aspect of this energy transfer, called entrainment, causes them to align and oscillate at the same frequency. Entrainment is the process by which things adjust their movement and energy to match rhythm and phase. This also seems to work with biological systems. On warm nights in many parts of the world, fireflies gathering in a tree light up randomly. Soon everyone will be turning their lights on and off in a coordinated manner. I have often heard crickets or frogs all finding the same rhythm and coordinating their sounds. In these cases, nature finds it useful, or perhaps economical, to take individuals along rhythmically. Perhaps over time, through some mysterious process, women who share a house or dorm room will find that their menstrual cycles also move rhythmically. Scientists have found that even disembodied animal hearts, when kept alive in a laboratory and placed close to each other, entrain – the individual hearts then begin to beat in unison. The process appears to be universal. Perhaps Itzhak Bentov was right in his fascinating 1977 book “Stalking the Wild Pendulum.” He explains, “We may think of disease as a disordered behavior of one or other of our body organs. When a strong harmonizing rhythm is applied to it, the interference pattern of waves that represents the organ can begin to beat in unison again.” He postulates that this theory may be the reason why energy healing works. I agree. When two things vibrate at different frequencies through resonance and entrainment, either the lower vibration rises, the higher vibration falls, or they meet in the middle. In “Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal,” practitioners learn to increase the vibration of their hands to a very high frequency through breathing and meditation techniques. When they bring their hands near another person in pain, the client’s body resonates like a similarly tuned circuit and is picked up by the practitioner’s hands. Love is the universal vibration that allows people to transmit healing energy from one to another. In his book “Loving Hands Are Healing Hands,” Bruce Berger writes: “Sympathetic resonance describes the tendency of two waveforms with the same degree of arc to resonate sympathetically together, energize each other, and communicate universally with one another.” Thus, waveforms of the same length and frequency become one another during of the entire creation carry and influence each other. This is key to understanding one of the dynamics that hold creation together and to understanding our theory of the body as the energy of sacred sound.” When working with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, the practitioner maintains the highest vibration possible, which is becomes the dominant frequency. The “healer” (also called the client or patient), the person whose body is healing, will simply adapt and align with the vibration of the practitioner. A spiritual teacher named Lazaris said, “The definition of a great healer is someone who was very sick and quickly recovered.” In my opinion, anyone who claims to be able to heal others is either ignorant, false, arrogant, or delusional . They simply provide the resonance energy that allows others to heal themselves. The practitioner simply has an enormously strong harmonizing energy and the clients adapt to this vibration. The innate body intelligence of the person receiving the energy will do whatever the body deems useful to bring about healing. The body heals itself with an unimaginable level of intelligence. Western civilization often takes for granted the body’s innate healing ability, but it is the true healer. When we look at the cells in our body, we see that we have hundreds of billions of cells that are constantly feeding themselves with oxygen and the food we eat, releasing carbon dioxide and other waste products. These cells are also busy reproducing and healing themselves, with thousands of microscopic changes taking place every minute of every day! It’s a good thing I don’t have to keep track of all this activity, because I’m already having a hard time keeping myself to remember where I left my keys. Without the breathing and meditation techniques learned in Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing, a practitioner can become immersed in the client’s vibration and become drained by the experience. This is not the case with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal as long as we use the techniques to maintain a naturally high resonance. Perhaps one day healers will be known as resonant doctors vitality.

“Do you know what water is?”
“No, I have no idea what water is,” said the fish.
“Why do you ask?”

Each of us is permeated at every moment by the constant movement of life energy flowing through and around our bodies. Like the fish that has no concept of water, only modern Western cultures have denied the existence of a life force. According to the rules of the scientific method, everything must be measurable to allow its existence. Because scientists do not have sufficiently sensitive instruments to measure or prove the existence of a life force, they deny its existence. That’s like denying the existence of a TV channel because your device doesn’t receive that channel. It is also like denying the existence of love because you cannot measure its length or weigh it on a scale. Life force is the energy that distinguishes what is living from what is not. It is the invigorating stream of life that has been recognized, valued and utilized for thousands of years by numerous cultures around the world. The Chinese call it “Chi” and the Japanese call it “Ki”. These and many other countries use the energy for various healing massage techniques, acupuncture and numerous martial arts. Indian yogis called the energy “prana” and used their understanding to reach higher levels of consciousness through their yoga, pranayama, meditation and various healing practices. The Hawaiian kahunas referred to it as “mana” and also used it for practical healing, distance healing, and prayer. The irony is that all people feel the life force within them every moment of the day. They are simply not aware that they are feeling it. For most of us, the sensations of life energy can be comparable to the background noise of the street where we live. We have become so used to it that we no longer notice it. We only notice road noise when we stop and pay close attention. Sometimes the most obvious and obvious things are the very last things you see or acknowledge. Life force is something like that. However, despite the lack of awareness of the life force, most people can easily sense it without much effort. We just need to know how to look for it.

Perhaps even in the English language there is some kind of intuitive understanding of life force and prana. When someone dies and their vitality and life force leaves the body, we say that the person has done so. “Expired.” When someone experiences a wonderful creative flow, we also describe them as “inspired.” “Inspire” and “expire” are the same words we use to describe breathing, and breathing happens to be the primary source of prana. In summary, life energy is the animating current of life, operating with an intelligence beyond human imagination. The life force permeates all living things.

Principles

Love is a universal vibration; Love communicates with all species, functions on all levels, and expresses our true nature. It is the basis of all healing and the essence of life force.

The ability to assist in healing is natural for every human being. Healing is a skill that can be learned and becomes stronger with practice. Practitioners become stronger over time in their use of the energy and in their healing abilities.

Energy follows thought. The practitioner uses intention and various meditations to create a high-energy field and uses this field to surround the area to be healed.

Resonance and participation cause the area to be healed to adapt its vibration to that of the practitioner. The practitioner simply raises the new resonance and holds it.

No one can heal anyone else. The person in need of healing is the healer. The practitioner simply maintains a resonance to allow the body to heal itself. It’s important to trust the process. The work may cause temporary pain or other distressing symptoms, all of which are part of the healing process. The life force and healing process works with complexity and wisdom that is beyond our imagination and understanding.

The energy follows the body’s natural intelligence to bring about the necessary healing. The practitioner pays attention to the “body intelligence” and “chases the pain.”

The practitioner also experiences healing through the work. Breathing increases your life force.

By combining breathing and meditation techniques, the energy is aligned, which increases its power many times over, like a laser. Synergy is the effect of multiple healers working together and is greater than the sum of its parts. It can be very powerful.

Each person’s gifts in life and healing are unique. Some people are particularly skilled at treating specific illnesses.

Healing can be done remotely and can be very effective. Pranayama healing can be easily and effectively combined with other healing methods.

The ability to connect with one’s spirituality, in whatever form it is perceived, and ask for help adds another dimension of power to this work. Many of these principles are expanded upon in later chapters of this book.

Chapter 3

healing Hands

“I believe that the best medicine is the gentlest treatment that produces the maximum healing response.” – Andrew Weil, MD

Healing and chopsticks

Healing is far simpler than learning to read and as natural as learning to hug the people you love. It’s probably the easiest skill you’ll ever learn. For many people, learning to heal with your hands is much easier than learning to use chopsticks.

To be a “healer.”

Some would have us believe that becoming a naturopath requires many years of hard work and discipline. They would have us believe that only the most brilliant, gifted and educated among us could ever hope to achieve such a title. If the truth is told, children, seniors, and everyone in between can learn to become health practitioners. I would even say that doctors and people with postgraduate degrees can learn this healing work. There were many celebrated “healers” whose talents were well documented and recognized as genuine. However, most of them had no explanation for what they were doing or how it happened. The importance of pranayama healing is that we now have a cognitive explanation of how to stimulate the healing process and a proven method for teaching others how to do this successfully. Since the true healer is the person receiving energy, the practitioner merely acts as a catalyst that allows the healer to heal themselves. and to access and utilize a higher vibrational field of energy. During this process the truth about healing is as follows:

Healing is real. Becoming a highly effective health practitioner is one of the easiest skills to learn. Healing is a great joy. Anyone with a strong desire can learn this. From now on you can learn to be an exceptional naturopath!

It starts with love

Healing work is all about love, and the practitioner learns to find a vibrational field of that love. To clarify my terms, when I say “love,” I do not mean in the traditional sense the kind of love that a mother feels for a child, a husband for his wife, or a winged cherub with a bow and arrow. I’m talking about a fundamental form of love – one that is more innate and intrinsic. Have you ever watched children play? They always seem to say, “Watch me!” No matter whether you are from the child’s culture or another culture, whether you speak the language or not, if you sit there and just watch the child, he will feel loved. The very attention you give to a child is automatically experienced as an act of love. This is not what I call cultured or non-associative love because it has nothing to do with your background, race, religion, politics, or any other beliefs you may hold. In Pranayama Healing: The energy for healing is about being present, which is an expression of your essence. I believe that your nature and being are made of the stuff of love. Whether you believe it’s there or not (in my opinion) is irrelevant. This love is the essential nature of your being, flowing through your hands regardless of your mood. Your basic, instinctive and most fundamental energy is that of love. You don’t have to work at it – it’s who you are. Just as a stone doesn’t have to try to be more “stone-like” and water doesn’t have to try to be wetter, we don’t have to try to have more essence of love. We can. However, make an effort to acknowledge how much love there is. The intention is so automatic that most people simply miss it. If you simply walk across the room, you have already created the intention to do so. You see, love and intention are some of the most natural qualities we have. So do not worry. If you are reading this book to learn how to heal, you already have enough love and intention to do a wonderful job.

Basic energy exercises

Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing is a powerful healing work. In order to carry out “Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing”, it is necessary to first learn various energy exercises. For most people, these exercises are easy to learn and a lot of fun. However, you need to take your time and practice these techniques thoroughly. These exercises are designed to help you increase your awareness of the life energy and physical sensations in your hands. The extra time and effort you spend with them will make a huge difference in your ability to direct the energy and increase the power of your healing sessions. Over time you will feel a growing sense of mastery and they will become second nature to you. The energy exercises are arranged in a specific order that makes it easier for you to learn and use these skills. Once you have completed the first round of energy exercises, you are ready to learn the basic breathing techniques. At this point you can begin combining the breathing and energy exercises to begin your healing work. If you do your best when working with these exercises, your success will grow. The best approach is to concentrate while maintaining a very relaxed mood. The less muscle tension you have in your body and hands, the better you will feel.

Exercise 1: Feel your finger

Hold a finger in the air and spend at least two minutes feeling as much sensation as possible in your finger. Tune into the sensation in your finger and focus on intensifying your awareness.
Feel the skin wrap around your finger. Try to feel the blood as it flows through your finger. Use your imagination and try to feel how your fingernail sits on your finger. Try to feel the sensation under your fingernail. The key is to use your focused attention to fully feel your finger. The basic assumption is that energy follows thought. Wherever you place your attention, energy follows you. By increasing the sensations in your finger by moving and holding the energy there, you also cause physiological changes. These sensations may seem like ordinary feelings in your body, but as you will see, you are feeling life energy. Most people say they feel a tingling sensation in their fingers. Some people describe the feeling as vibrating, buzzing, fizzy, or hot. Because everyone experiences things differently. People probably use different words. Some people describe the energy as heat, throbbing, thickness, heaviness or simply as a heightened awareness of the finger itself. Feeling life energy is no stranger to us. Rather, the life force is an energy that we have always felt but that we simply have not learned to recognize. If you are alive, and since you are reading this I assume you are, you feel it every minute of every day.

If you don’t feel any of these sensations, imagine stroking your finger with a feather. Stroke this imaginary feather back and forth across your finger. Now pay close attention to the sensation you feel in your finger. Take about a minute to feel a feeling. This sensation may not seem like much, and you may use a word to describe it that I haven’t used, but whatever it is, I suggest that you use this sensation as a starting point for experiencing the energy . If you don’t feel any sensations in your finger, I recommend you work with the other exercises and see if you can create sensations in other parts of your body. During the exercise, some of you may experience tingling throughout your hand or other parts of your body. If this happens, it’s okay and it means you’re doing wonderfully well. You start spontaneously with the next exercise.

Exercise 2: Feel your body parts

In this exercise we bring energy and feeling to all parts of your body. The sensations you feel will likely be similar to what you felt on your finger in the previous exercise. Many of you will find that there are places in your body where it seems difficult or even impossible to feel a sensation, no matter how much attention you pay to it. This is usually a temporary problem that is quite common and is nothing to worry about when it comes to doing a good job of using the pranic energy. The more you practice, the easier it becomes to feel all parts of your body. This exercise is best done with the help of a friend.

Take off your shoes and then, while sitting or lying down, have your friend stroke them gently upwards, from your feet to your ankles, for a few seconds. The touch should cover as much surface area as possible on the feet and ankles in a gentle, stroking motion for only about two to five seconds. After this upward movement, your friend should let go and not touch you. The purpose of this exercise is to help you feel as much sensation as possible in your feet and ankles. Ideally, you should feel your feet with the same intensity that you previously felt in your finger. A friend’s touch is helpful in focusing your attention. Letting go is also an essential part of the exercise because it allows you to feel the sensations in your body without being touched. If not. If you can’t create feeling in your feet, ask your friend to stroke them again. If you still don’t feel anything, ask your friend to move on to the next step.
When you are ready and feel these sensations well, ask your friend to place her hands on the area just above the ankles for a few seconds and move them up toward your shins, then release them. Continue to the rest of the body, stroking the shins, knees, thighs, hips, lower pelvis, stomach, chest, neck and up to the head. Then go down from the head to the shoulders, arms and hands. This toe-to-head stroking pattern is useful for stimulating directed energy flow when allowing the energy to flow through your body and when conducting a healing session. We’ll do the back of the body later.
You are done when you feel the prana energy throughout your body.
Change locations with your friend and use the same techniques to give them the same experiences.
If you are doing this alone, touch your own feet and stroke upwards for about two to five seconds and then release. Feel as many sensations as possible and repeat the upward motion as many times as necessary. Because another person’s touch is less predictable than your own, you may need to pay a little more attention and concentration when working alone. Continue stroking up the body to the head, then down the shoulders and arms, ending with the hands.

Some people simply find it harder to notice sensations in their body. If this applies to you and you can’t feel a certain part of your body, just move on to another part of your body that you can feel. By simply repeating this exercise, you can clear the blocked areas over time. The more you repeat this exercise, the easier you will feel the sensations throughout your body. You may notice that parts of your body where you previously felt nothing are now easily aware of sensations. Most people report that this exercise produces extremely pleasant body sensations. So enjoy, who said learning to heal has to be painful?

What to do if you don’t feel any body sensation anywhere?

I have found that one to two percent of the people I teach are kinesthetically impaired. This means they have a hard time feeling any sensations in their body. I have found that these people can still learn this, but it requires more effort and concentration than someone who has access to whole body sensations. If you find that you cannot feel the sensations of others, try focusing your attention on the parts of the body that are being caressed. Punctual. Sensation will awaken. Admittedly it’s not easy, but with a little practice it can be done. I have found that most people will be able to create feelings. You can still do the healing work but may also require more concentration.

Exercise 3: Long Sweeps

We follow the same pattern of gentle, sweeping movements as in the last exercise. However, this time have your friend make longer movements, about 50 centimeters long. Again, the touch is light (your friend won’t heal here) and the touch lasts two to five seconds. Have your friend perform a sweeping touch from feet to knees. Use your attention and intention to focus your senses on that area, then invite your friend to either repeat the movement or continue.
The purpose of touching in longer movements is to move energy through your body more fluidly and consciously. We create a gentle wave of prana energy in our body. After your friend lets go, feel the sensations in your body as strongly as possible. The goal is to get these areas of your body to tingle, vibrate, buzz, or heat up like you did in the first exercise. If you don’t feel any sensation or would like to repeat the touch, ask your friend to touch you again. Be sure to wait until you are ready before moving on to the next position. When a friend completes the process, they can swap places after you and repeat the process.
If you are doing this alone, lightly stroke yourself from your feet to your knees for a few seconds, pausing to feel the sensations. Feel as many sensations as possible. Repeat the blow if you feel no sensation. Gradually work your way up to your head, then down over your shoulders and into your hands.

Restricted areas

If you are having difficulty feeling a certain area, you can ask your friend to touch that place again to make it easier for you to feel it. If you can’t get the feeling into the area after three tries, don’t worry and move on to the next area. At this point, that area of your body will “wake up” and be able to feel the energy. In most cases, people learn to wake up difficult areas within hours or perhaps weeks. In rare cases this can take a year or longer. Note that this will not have a significant impact on your power or effectiveness in performing great Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal.

Exercise 4: Full body movements on the front and back

A big swing forward

In one long stroke, go from the feet up, up the legs, up the torso and the top of the head, down the neck, over the shoulders and down the arms and into the hands. As you receive the touch, give yourself time to relive the experience and evoke as much sensation as possible in your body. Ask your friend to repeat the long stroke once or twice. Allow your body to recreate the feeling each time, and do so until it becomes easy for you. Bring the whole body to feel the sensation with the power of intention and attention. If you do this on yourself, you can stroke your feet, legs, and torso up toward your head, fold your arms, and stroke each arm downward.

A big swing backwards

In this exercise we follow the same pattern as the movements on the front of the body, except that we also stroke the back. While your friend is standing, make a long, continuous swing from his feet to the top of his head and over his shoulders, arms, and into your hands. If you work alone, this step will not be as easy and fluid. Just do your best. Sweeping your back is not a crucial step. Feel the sensation as strongly as possible in every part of your body. If you want your friend to repeat one of the sweeps, ask him to do so. Otherwise, say “OK” when you are ready to move on to the next area.

Energy Exercise 5: Full body exercise using your mind

In this step, you mentally reproduce the sensations of the whole body movements. Watch yourself receive a full body massage using the power of your imagination. Now feel the tingling, vibration, or other sensations throughout your body and feel these sensations as strongly as possible. Let the sensations flow through your body in the same pattern as before: from your feet, down your legs, up to your torso, down to your head, and cup your arms in your hands. This pattern of moving energy from the feet to the torso and then down the arms into the hands is what I call a full-body swing. Take your hands and close them into very loose fists. Now channel the energy in your body into your hands. Notice how much feeling is now in your hands. Try this with your hands together in the loose fist position and with your hands open.

Summary of basic energy exercises

Now that you’ve completed the initial prana energy exercises, let’s take a look at what happened here. You have learned to focus attention and sensations on every part of your body. If there are still places where you cannot direct sensation with your focused attention, keep practicing and they will open up to you. It is not necessary for every area to be open and “tingly” to do great healing work. Do your best and you will continue to improve. Once you have done these exercises, you will most likely have reached the point where you no longer need to touch anyone to awaken the process within you. You will be able to bring these sensations into your awareness yourself. You can practice pranic energy almost anytime, anywhere. For example: While standing in line at a bank or grocery store, while talking on the phone, at a boring business meeting, or while watching TV or a movie. Because the experience is so pleasant, I recommend that you practice this exercise often. As you continue to practice this exercise, you will find that you can control the energy significantly more. Repeat these exercises as needed and learn to bring the energy more intensely into each area of your body and channel it into your hands.

Basic breathing techniques

Pranayama Healing: The trick is to keep breathing

In all of Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, it is important to use the breathing techniques in 100 percent of your sessions. If you were in my class, I would tell you this over and over again as you practice directing the energy. Breathing techniques are an essential and crucial part of prana energy. Breathing enhances life force and its value cannot be overemphasized. The Indian yogis called the life force in the air we breathe “Prana.” The Hawaiian kahunas experienced the life force in the breath and called it “mana.” They viewed it as an essential factor in the prayer and healing process. I find it interesting and somewhat amusing that the early Hawaiians were amazed and astonished to see the Western priests suddenly fall to their knees and pray without taking any special breaths at all. The word haole, which refers to these visitors from the mainland, actually means “without breath.”

Most people are shallow breathers. The most common are “upper chest” breathers. You know who you are; You tend to breathe shallowly into your upper chest. Other shallow breathers are “stomach” breathers. You (myself included) tend to breathe shallowly into your stomach area. Each of the breathing techniques in Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal requires full breaths. Breathe through your nose unless the sheer volume of air makes it easier for you to breathe through your mouth. Pranayama Healing: The energy for healing works quite well with mouth or nose breathing. A full breath begins below the belly button and pushes the stomach outward as you inhale. When the lungs are full, the breath should lift the shoulders slightly. Now practice taking a few deep breaths. Place your hands over your stomach, below the navel, and inhale. As you do this, feel your hands being pushed away as you breathe in. Bring your breath up to your shoulders so that they are slightly lifted. This can be uncomfortable for a while for people who are not used to deep breathing.

The 2-6 breath

This is a very powerful breathing technique to increase energy during your pranayama healing sessions. The name says it all: two bars for inhalation and six bars for exhalation.

This breath requires a little effort. You need to inhale a lot of air to fill your lungs with one full breath in just two steps. There is no breath holding in this or any other technique. Exhale gently and evenly to a count of six.

The 1-4 breath

The 1-4 is an extremely powerful boosting technique. Here you breathe in completely to the count of one and breathe out completely to the count of four. Inhaling to the number one requires very strong effort and mouth breathing.

If you feel dizzy, hold back.

Fire breathing, followed by 2-6 or 1-4

This is the most powerful breathing exercise to increase energy and can be done up to once per minute. Excessive use of this breath can cause fainting. Avoid using this technique if you feel weak.

Quickly blow out and suck in large amounts of air five to seven times. Your lungs function like large bellows, moving a large volume of air. You can imagine that as you exhale, you are blowing out a candle that is two feet away from you, and then as you inhale, you are drawing in all the air you just exhaled. Inhaling and exhaling requires mouth breathing and occurs very quickly, similar to rapid panting, with the five to seven breaths lasting only a few seconds. Once you have completed the rapid inhalation and exhalation, immediately inhale and exhale very fully four or six times and then move on to technique 1 or 2.

Circular breathing

Imagine drawing a large circle. Half of the circle is drawn evenly when inhaling and the other half when exhaling. Make the transitions between inhalation and exhalation as gentle and subtle as possible.

This is a good, sustained breath for longer periods of time. You can also use breathing techniques 1 or 2 for longer periods of time. This technique is also suitable for people who suffer from heart or respiratory problems or who do not tolerate fire breathing well.

Connect the energy with your breathing

Now that you’ve moved the energy through your body and practiced the basic breathing techniques, it’s time to practice combining these elements. In “Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal,” it is the combination of breathing and energy movement that makes the system work so effectively.

While sitting or standing, mentally perform a full-body swing. The key is to feel as many sensations as possible throughout your entire body. After practicing the previous exercises, most people are now able to use the power of their intention well enough to create sensation in much or all of their body. Place your hands flat together or gently close them to form “loose fists.” Do two or three full-body movements and feel the energy gathering in your hands. Once you feel the sensations in your hands increasing, it’s time to coordinate them with breathing.
Start with a 2-6 breathing pattern. Take a deep breath to the count of two, exhale fully to the count of six, and place all your attention on your hands. Feel the energy building as you exhale. Do this for a few minutes while coordinating the exhalation with the sensation. When doing these exercises, always work to increase the sensation of exhaling. Don’t worry about the energy building up in your hands as you inhale. Focus on the six cycles of exhalation. If you do this correctly, you will feel an increase in sensation in your hands.
With your hands still gently cupped or cupped, begin the 1-4 breathing pattern. Notice how the sensations in your hands change as you do this. Work on feeling the sensations increase as you exhale. This simply requires that you hold your attention in your hands and have the intention to heighten the sensations. Developing the ability to heighten sensations and link them to the breath is one of the most important skills in pranayama healing. If you do this correctly, you should notice that the feeling in your hands increases with the change in breathing tempo. As long as you don’t get dizzy or fall over, the more air you move, the more vitality increases.
Start with the fire breathing technique. Again, your hands should be gently cupped or cupped as you breathe. When you’re done quickly inhaling and exhaling, take a deep breath and move into a 1-4 or 2-6 breathing pattern. Now notice how the sensations in your hands have changed. If you feel an increase in sensations as you exhale, you are doing a great job and are ready for the next step. The next step is to conduct a healing session.

Breathing exercise to connect the upper chakras

This is a meditative breathing exercise in which we stretch both our mind and our lungs. We will expand our thinking space to include the heart chakra, the third eye and the crown chakra. And combine this space to get into holistic thinking. This is intended to help you connect to the infinite cosmic energy and information field. Additionally, it supercharges our blood with oxygen, resulting in a huge mental and physical energy boost. Try this before meditating, exercising, or making love…

Putting everything together

It’s time to try out your newly acquired skills. At this point, most people can produce some sensation in their hands, perform full-body movements, and breathe fairly well. Additionally, most people can put these elements together and feel the increase in sensation in their hands. Here’s the surprise: Most people don’t realize how powerfully they can now use these rudimentary skills to help another person who is in pain. It doesn’t even seem to matter whether you are incredulous or skeptical about this last statement. Being able to change the vibration of your hands creates an energy field that can help heal and relieve pain. Through practice and experience, you can discover the power of healing energy and gain confidence in your abilities. The next section gives you some tips on how to work with what you’ve just learned. More information about this guide follows.

Your first healing session

Find someone you know who is in pain. Ask your friend how much pain or discomfort he or she is feeling. Have your friends rate their discomfort on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 being the worst. It’s amazing how often people forget how bad the pain was after it’s gone.
Ask your friend where he is hurt. The most important thing is that you don’t make assumptions about where the pain is located. If you ask someone where they are injured and they say their left shoulder hurts, you still need to ask them what part of the shoulder hurts. Unless you are truly psychic, your assumptions on this matter are often wrong. The best way to find out exactly where your friend is hurting is to ask him and point it out to him or place your hands in the right place for you. This is what I now call the “Where does it hurt?” technique.
Make sure to place your hands either directly above or on either side of the areas where your friend is experiencing pain. By “sandwiching” the area of pain between your hands, you are actually creating a strong resonant field that allows the tissue to change vibration and heal itself. +. When working on a problem with a person’s back or neck, place one hand on each side of the vertebrae of the spine.
Experiment with breathing techniques, paying close attention to the sensations in your hands as you exhale. Make sure you breathe deeply throughout the work. If you feel a little dizzy, you should take a break.
Make sure your hands are relaxed as energy flows faster from loose and open hands. Always remember to use both hands during a session. This helps you create a better field into or through the tissue. As you work, pay close attention to how the sensations in your hands change.

This will prove to be very useful information which I will discuss shortly. 7. “Chase” the pain. Ask your friend to keep you updated if the sensations in his body change or change. It is quite common for someone to report that the pain has shifted or that they are experiencing more sensation somewhere else. In this case, move your hands to this spot. In this way, it is as if we are “chasing the pain.” 8. Leave your hands in place for twenty to thirty minutes or longer, the pain has not subsided. if 9. At the end of your session, ask them to assess their pain again.

Understand the sensations you feel in your hands

During a healing session, pranayama practitioners are likely to experience a variety of sensations in their hands. It is important to pay close attention to these sensations as they often give you valuable clues about what is happening in the session and what to do next. The intensity of the sensations you feel is a direct indicator of how much of the energy you have created is being received through your healing touch. The more open your body is to the energy you create, the stronger the sensations will be.

The five basic patterns of energy

There are five primary energy patterns that you are likely to feel in your hands during pranayama healing work:

The Blocked Pattern – At first you feel very little in your hands, and then the sensations gradually increase and reach a peak. Very blocked areas are often areas of chronic problems, diseased organs, or sometimes acute pain (but not often). If you’re working on an area that has a lot of blockage, you’ll probably feel very little in your hands. In most cases, however, you will notice that the energy builds slowly and surely the longer you hold your hands there. This may take some time. You can keep your hands in one position for ten, twenty, forty minutes or even an hour. Over time. The energy in your hands will gradually feel stronger and stronger until it appears to reach a peak in intensity. Sometimes the feeling of energy stays at this peak level for a long time and suddenly reaches a plateau of even greater intensity. More often, the energy begins to level off at some point and can then subside slightly.
The General Pattern – You feel a moderate sensation in your hands that builds to a peak and then decreases. This is the pattern you will probably encounter most often. Sometimes the feeling of energy you feel increases to a very high level and seems to plateau. At this point it’s often a good idea to use some fire breathing to see if you can take it to an even higher level. As you work to direct the energy and increase its intensity, you will eventually notice that it levels off or decreases. In this case, it may be time to move your hands elsewhere.
The Intense Pattern – You feel a very strong energy in your hands that subsides over time. This pattern is most often felt when working with acute symptoms or in a person whose body, for whatever reason, is very receptive to the energy. It looks like this: Being aware of the sensations in your hands and the patterns that energy work usually follows will help you determine how long you should hold your hands in a particular position. You can also just ask your friend how he is doing. If all the pain is gone or has subsided significantly, that’s usually a good sign that the job is done for now.
The Complete Pattern: When you run the energy, sometimes everything seems to be working well, and at some point during the session you may notice that you don’t feel anything in your hands. When you pull your hands away, your hands will feel a strong tingling sensation. This is an indication of the full pattern. The entire pattern occurs when the person has absorbed as much energy as their body wants to absorb. At this point, you no longer have any sensation in your hands when you touch the person. When you come back in ten or twenty minutes, your body may be able to respond to a higher vibration and “absorb” more energy.
The Step Pattern When you have pranic energy, you sometimes feel like the intensity has reached its peak. At this point if you do some fire breathing. You may notice that your hands are now vibrating at an even higher frequency. Just when you think the energy has reached its peak and will no longer rise, practicing the breath of fire again can cause the energy to rise again and again, like climbing stairs. At some point the energy really levels out, subsides, or the feeling leaves your hands, and you know you’re done.

Awareness of these patterns is not rocket science. You won’t harm a person by putting too much energy into it, and if you don’t complete the healing, the person will tell you that more needs to be done. The important thing is to have fun and be there for the person you work with.

When you do pranayama healing sessions, most of the time your hands will feel normal. By using the breathing techniques I describe, practitioners are naturally protected from their energy aligning with the vibration of the person they are working on. Occasionally, you may feel a type of “static energy” that may build up on your hands. This static energy can be easily released by simply rinsing your hands, wrists, and forearms with cold water after each session. You can feel this energy as a thickness around your hands, as if you were wearing “energy gloves.” The feeling is not particularly unpleasant, but it is recommended that you wash your hands at the earliest opportunity. For many people, washing their hands at this point brings a real sense of relief. Shaking your hands as if you were trying to shake off water does the same thing, but in my experience it doesn’t seem to work as well as rinsing your hands with cold water. I find that the need to wash hands is minimally important in pranayama healing. When I practiced polarity therapy, I found it to be extremely important from an energetic perspective. Washing your hands is also an excellent measure for hygiene reasons.

Some of my students who do polarity therapy and practice Reiki have told me that they have felt drained after polarity or Reiki sessions. The trick is to always use breathing techniques during sessions. A friend who practices Reiki and has learned pranayama healing exchanged sessions with me for a while. One day she complained that she felt energy strengthening her arm. I asked her if she had stopped breathing and indeed she had. When I reminded her to continue using the breathing techniques, the problem immediately disappeared.

Chapter 4

frequently asked Questions

“Life is not a problem to be solved, but a mystery to be experienced.”
Frank Herbert

Over the many years I have been teaching pranayama healing workshops, I am asked the same questions over and over again. To get you involved in one of my courses, I provide you with a question and answer chapter. For convenience, the questions have been divided into several general topics. Enjoy,

Practice pranayama healing techniques

Do you get stronger through practice?

Yes absolutely. When you first learn to power run, you’ll likely amaze your friends with your newfound skills. With regular practice, your strength will develop even further. Running strength is a skill that requires mental and physical concentration. Like an athlete who uses different muscles, you become stronger. I would estimate that after 100 hours of pranic energy your strength has doubled or possibly tripled.

What if I don’t practice for a long time? Will I lose my ability?

When you walk down the street, you don’t have to worry about falling off the sidewalk. When you answer the phone, you don’t have to worry about forgetting how to speak. Learning energy flow and pranayama healing is much easier than learning to walk or talk. Once you learn the basic skills, they are yours for life. Within hours of picking up this book, you will be able to do profound healing work. If you haven’t used the energy for a while, e.g. For example, for months or years, you may want to spend five or ten minutes building up the energy before giving a session. Another option is to build energy during the session. Simply practice directing the energy while giving a session.

Should you expend energy when you’re alone?

It’s a great idea to let the energy run whenever you think about it. I usually run the energy for about five minutes before I get up in the morning and another five minutes before I go to sleep. Then I will run the energy from time to time throughout the day. I’m worried about managing the energy correctly? Never do it well enough. What can I do to be sure? This fear of inadequacy is often learned in other areas of life, such as a college entrance exam or a driver’s license exam, but it does not apply to pranayama healing. When you eat at your favorite restaurant, you don’t have to worry about forgetting how to swallow or how to pick up the fork. These skills are natural. If you can feel your hands, perform a full-body swing, and use the breathing techniques, then you’re doing it well enough. Now it’s just a matter of practice and discovering your gifts. You can’t do it wrong. Over time you can learn to do it better and more powerfully. So far I have not met anyone who complained that a miracle requires six sessions instead of one! One fear people have is that they won’t feel loving or spiritual enough to do great work. I remember once having a session on a day where I was extremely depressed and upset. The woman I was working on had a severe neck problem. So there I was. I just channeled the energy as best I could. She was lying on her back on my table and I was sitting on a chair holding her neck. Having held this one position for over forty minutes, I laid my head on the tabletop. Then I suddenly realized that I had fallen asleep during the session. I looked at the clock and realized that I had slept for over ten minutes, but my hands still contained prana energy with tremendous intensity. At the end of the session, the woman I was working on told me that it was the best session she had ever received.

I realized that self-doubt is something that many people feel in other areas of their lives and that they bring into pranayama healing. For many practitioners. The only thing that will finally cure their self-doubt is experience. When you see how incredibly effective you can be at treating your friend’s neck, back, and other pain, you’ll eventually be convinced that you’re doing a great job. There is no substitute for experience.

Is it important for the person receiving the pranayama healing session or the practitioner to believe that it will help it work?

As I wrote in my first book, Your Healing Hands, you don’t have to believe in the ocean to get wet, but you do have to jump in. The same applies here – you don’t have to believe in pranayama healing work to intensively experience how to block the energy. Pranayama healing works, period. Cynics and skeptics are intellectually ignorant. What do you think are the biggest mistakes early adopters make that prevent them from being effective? By and large, young professionals are quite competent and effective at this work. But to answer this question, there are three mistakes that beginners often make. The first is forgetting to keep your breathing going. I encourage all Pranayama Healing teachers to gently urge their students to keep their breathing going. “Keep breathing” becomes a kind of mantra that is repeated every ten minutes during practice sessions. “Keep breathing – keep breathing!” The second mistake is that beginners often have to learn to relax their hands. It is much easier to direct the energy when the hands are relaxed. During a workshop, I walk around the room checking everyone’s hands so they can relax. I take people’s hands and shake them lightly to encourage them to relax more. The work of pranayama healing is done with energy. Clenched and tense hands are not helpful and can block energy.

The third mistake is stopping work before the session is over. Whether you are working on a chronic or acute problem, beginners tend to stop treatment before healing is complete. As a rule of thumb, when you think you’re done getting the pranic energy into an area that needs it, it’s a good idea to spend at least a few extra minutes working on that area. There are two reasons for this: You may notice that the resonance (indicated by the strength of the sensation in your hands) increases again as you stay in one place for longer. New practitioners often have no experience estimating how long they need to channel energy into an area. Pranic energy over a longer period of time can often help secure the new vibration in the tissue, so healing tends to last longer.

Pranayama Healing and Personal Energy

Do you use up your energy when you do pranayama healing? No. We use the power of our love and the power of our intention. From experience I would say: the more of this energy you use, the more you have. You just can’t get over it. When you love someone very much, you don’t walk around all day exhausted and miserable, lamenting, “Poor me, I used up all my love for this day.” I have nothing left to give.” At least let’s hope you do do not do. When you love a lot, you feel like you can give a lot more love, often in all directions. Everyone around you can become a beneficiary of your love – from friends you meet to strangers on the street. Quite simply: the more love you feel, the more you have to give. It’s similar with intention: the more you harness the power of your intention, the more intention you have at your disposal.

Do you sometimes feel exhausted when attending pranayama healing sessions? No, you don’t get drained at all. As I have mentioned several times, breathing techniques are an essential part of the work. As long as you maintain breathing, you can maintain a very high resonance. The other person simply and automatically begins to match your vibration. You don’t give away your energy, you hold a field and let the other person come and adapt to that field so that you don’t become exhausted in pranayama healing. If anything, the opposite is true: the work appears to make the practitioner feel more healed and uplifted. Personally, doing healing work for hours makes me very hungry, and that is a symptom that can be easily corrected. Some practitioners have complained that late-night sessions left them feeling so energized that they had trouble sleeping. This seems to happen to a small percentage of people who use pranayama healing, so I would recommend that they do their sessions earlier in the day. Occasionally someone doing a session will feel tired afterwards, but this seems to be a response to having experienced healing during the work itself. Remember: When you give a session, you raise your vibration, which leads to healing within you. Sometimes you may need to sleep afterwards. However, this has nothing to do with energy being drained. I find that during pranayama healing sessions I often feel more alert after the session than when I started. Why this? If you let the energy run and do breathing exercises, you will also benefit from the energy. There were several times when I felt tired when I wanted to give a lecture with demonstrations. As I give the short demonstration sessions to the audience, I always find myself becoming more alert and energized. After completing 20 or 30 demonstration healing sessions as part of the lecture, I am quite energized and alert. The longer you let the energy run, the stronger you seem to become both physically and energetically.

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning? I find rather the opposite. The longer you run energy, the stronger you seem to become. For large talks where I may be energizing dozens of people for two hours or more, the later sessions I give are far more robust than the earlier ones. Sometimes the energy becomes so strong that people actually feel a small jolt as a massive wave of energy rushes through them the second they are touched. I may be physically tired from lecturing for two hours and doing so many healing sessions, but the energy hasn’t diminished at all. If anything, it is greatly increased.

Preparing for a pranayama healing session

What do I need to do to prepare for a session? If you want to prepare in advance, it can be helpful to perform gentle body movements and see how intensely you can feel the energy throughout your body. While doing these exercises, it is also helpful to use breathing techniques to increase your energy. Most practitioners believe that simply holding a session cannot achieve these things either.

Is it important that I be grounded before a session?For those unfamiliar with the term “grounding,” it refers to the practice of centering our energies and often connecting to the earth. This way, people feel more balanced and less prone to absorbing unwanted energy. I don’t find it necessary to ground myself as long as I perform full body movements and maintain breathing. Some people find grounding exercises helpful because work may make them feel a little lightheaded. Other people find that the process of energy flow itself automatically grounds them.

Using your hands in a pranayama healing session

How much pressure do you put on your hands when you run energy? You don’t need any pressure at all. A light touch works best. I tell my students this and five minutes later, as I walk around the room and touch their hands, I notice that many of them have significant tension in their hands and fingers. At this point I grab their hand and shake it a little to help them feel like they can release the tension. Many people get used to the use of force in massage, acupressure, shiatsu, Rolfing, deep tissue work, etc. The great irony is that you are better able to relax and release the tension in the muscles when you apply no or very little pressure. The secret is to use energy instead of brute force.

In most cases, the use of force is counterproductive. It is easier to conduct energy when the hands are very relaxed. Since I don’t like grabbing your hand and shaking it gently to release the tension, you can try this simple exercise. Gently close your hands into soft fists and feel your hands relax completely. Try to channel energy into your hands. Notice how the prana energy. Now try to clench your fists and channel the energy into your hands. You’ll probably find that it’s much harder to feel the energy when you exert yourself.

Why is it important to surround the areas you are working on with your hands? Why not just use one hand? Having two points of contact creates a stronger vibrational field between you and the person you are working on. Pinching a painful area between your hands is an excellent way to increase tissue resonance. As I describe in the section on group sessions in Chapter 5, four hands or even six hands can quickly become the dominant resonance. I strongly recommend that you always use both hands whenever possible. Additionally, I suggest that you place your hands on either side of the problem area to pinch it between your hands.

I’ve noticed that sometimes when you demonstrate pranayama healing you use your palms, but other times you use your thumbs or fingertips. Why are you doing this? If I want to focus the energy on a small area like the TMJ point or on the sides of the vertebrae, I use my fingertips to concentrate the energy. This is a technique that Bob Rasmusson invented and called the “tripod.” Simply touch your thumb, index finger and middle finger together and direct the energy from your fingertips. Concentrating power in this way allows you to work more effectively when working in very small places. For most of the time it is recommended to use the palms of your hands. If you find it physically awkward or uncomfortable to use your palms during a session, use your fingertips or a tripod. Don’t let the rules I give you prevent you from placing your hands on someone who is doing the healing work. Above all, be comfortable when practicing pranayama healing. I have no feeling in my hands or any part of my body – what should I do? I have found in my courses that a small percentage of people have difficulty feeling sensations. This makes it a little more difficult to learn pranayama healing, but with time and persistence these people have learned to manage their energy quite well. Some of the best healers I know initially had difficulty feeling any part of their body.

The first question to ask yourself is whether you feel a sensation anywhere in your body that you can feel without touching it. Can you think of any part of your body without touching yourself? If you can feel your hands, feet, face, or any other part of your body by placing your attention there, then you have a starting point and can build from there.

The power of focused energy

How important is it to be focused during sessions? To increase the power of your sessions, focusing 100 percent on running can make a big difference. This requires a lot of effort on the part of the practitioner. When I say “effort” I mean focusing on directing the energy, focusing on the breath, and consistently connecting the energy to your breath. Those who have developed great skill with energy often talk about being completely devoted to the process. If I focus 100 percent on directing the energy, does that mean I should never talk during a session? Not necessarily. I highly recommend that you focus on having fun during the pranayama healing sessions. The work is about love, joy, gratitude and wonder, not rigidity or excessive seriousness. If you drive your car onto a highway and need to accelerate, you may need a lot of gas to get the car up to speed. Once the speed is reached, you can accelerate and drive off. Likewise, when running with energy, getting the vibration to a “high pitch” can take a lot of work. Once you have done this, you can maintain the breathing and let the energy continue to work.

It’s okay to talk to your customer from time to time. It is important that you continue to use your breathing techniques while speaking. If you make an effort, you can take deep breaths as you speak. Make sure you keep asking your customer about their experiences as this can provide you with valuable information. To continue with the car analogy, you may want to accelerate to pass another car on the road. In pranayama healing, you may sometimes want to take a few fire breaths to raise the energy to a higher vibration. At this point you would stop talking and focus 100 percent on managing the energy. NO.

The client’s experience of a pranayama healing session

How long does it take for people to know something is happening when they receive a session?

People often notice shifts in energy and changes in their pain levels just a few seconds after being touched. During my lectures, I like to give as many three or four minute sessions as possible. I ask people to tell me about just one area where they are experiencing pain. If I have a large audience, I often bring some of my students or other pranayama healing teachers on stage to help. Typically, about 90 percent of people who receive these short sessions report a significant change in symptoms. Often people come to me six months or a year later and tell me that the pain has not returned, even though the session was relatively short. I like doing these short sessions because they make the work credible. People often need to feel the energy themselves before they are willing to believe in it or use it.

What do people usually feel when they receive a pranayama healing session? People are all unique and will feel the energy in their fashion. Some people will not feel the power at all, many will experience the energy as a hot, cold or tingling sensation. It is important to understand that any sensations a person feels while working – from the slightest to the most intense – are excellent signals that the session is working. The most common feeling people experience is that of heat. The heat can range from mild and slightly warming to burning and painful. If a light touch is capable of causing physical pain, however unpleasant it may be for the client in the short term, this is a very positive sign that you are making excellent progress in healing. I remember a student working on me during a class. Not only did it feel hot on my lower back where he was working, it also felt pretty sunburned.

Is it the temperature of your hand that people respond to when they say they experience hot or cold sensations?

This does not appear to be the case. I recently worked on a man who felt a burning heat as I worked on his back. I let him touch my fingers and much to his surprise he found that my fingers were quite cold. When I touched his back again, I felt the same burning sensation as before. A little later he felt a wonderful feeling around his hips. It is somewhat unusual for a person to feel both heat and cold from the energy, but it does happen. On another occasion I was working on a man who was having problems with his arm. This guy was sure that the burning heat he was feeling was due to my body heat. To prove to himself that the feeling was purely physical, he put on a down coat that would insulate the heat emanating from my hands. I had to laugh out loud because he jumped out of his chair when he felt the same burning sensation as before through his coat. The feeling of heat is probably the most common phenomenon that people report during pranayama healing sessions. Other common sensations people experience during sessions include feeling cold, tingling or vibrating, and pain.

Is it ever painful to receive the energy? Yes, occasionally it is like that. Sometimes people experience a painful reaction when they receive energy. This pain usually doesn’t last very long. I don’t like seeing people in pain, but I’m always happy when something like this happens as it’s always a strong sign that significant healing is taking place. The key here is to continue the session at least until the pain goes away. A few years ago, my friend Dan asked me if I would work on his 13-year-old son who had broken his knee and was still limping after the cast was removed. As I began to direct energy into his knee, he protested, “Ouch, you’re hurting me. “It feels like my knee is killing me.” I told him to take a deep breath and that the sensations wouldn’t last long. About two minutes later he protests: “Now my knee is burning. What are you doing to me?” I explained that this was all part of the healing process. A few more minutes went by and he said that his knee was now feeling a “tingle” and two minutes later he said that his knee was completely fine warm and wonderful to the touch. After about twelve minutes his knee was fine and he was no longer limping. Do you ever get any indication of other places that need healing energy other than the places that are particularly painful? do. The first way involves using anatomical knowledge and logic. You can find advice on this in various chapters of this book. The second way is to let the body tell you exactly where the energy is needed Way much more profound. When you apply energy to one area over a long period of time, the person’s body will often prioritize the use of the energy as it sees fit. As with any healing, the entire process is completely automatic. The only logic and reason for this is the magnificence of the body’s innate intelligence. For example, if you have been working on someone’s lower back pain, that person may tell you that they are now feeling a sensation or even pain somewhere else, perhaps higher up in the back or possibly in their neck, knees or wherever. I like to ask clients to tell me if they feel the energy going somewhere other than where I work. Because their body intelligence directs life force to specific areas of their body, the person receiving the session will likely experience corresponding sensations that they can report. If someone tells you that they feel energy flowing into another part of their body, I suggest you keep that in mind. Once you are done directing energy into the area you are working on, simply bring your hands to the area that is now feeling the new feeling or pain and work that area as well. This is what I call “chasing the pain.” In many cases, you simply chase the pain from one place to another until it goes away. I once demonstrated pranayama healing to an acupuncturist who had several urns on the back of her hand. As I ran the energy into her hand, I asked her to describe what she was feeling. She told me that all the energy went into her elbows. When I asked why her elbow needed energy, she explained that she had broken it two years ago and that it had never healed properly. At this point I stopped working on her hand and started working on her elbow. The energy flowed into her elbow for about five minutes. When the energy changed and became less intense, I asked her how her elbows felt. She was amazed that all the pain and discomfort in her elbow was gone. It is common for beginners to find that when working on a lower back condition, the client will report feeling a surge of energy in their neck at some point in the session. Because the neck and lower back reflect each other, the body says it’s important to work on both areas. Also, when treating a repetitive strain injury to the wrist, people often report energy flowing to the elbow, shoulder, neck, head, or back. These points are most likely involved in the disease and become apparent through this process of secondary sensations.

Does the energy heal conditions other than what you think you are working on?

That happens often. Because the energy goes where it wants, all sorts of surprising healings occur. The most common are people with headaches who find that their sinus pain has also disappeared. It also works the other way around. People who complain of sinus pain often report that their headaches are gone. Once during one of my classes, two students were treating a woman who had severe sinus pain. When the session ended, the woman said she still had sore sinuses. I explained that it wasn’t a perfect system and that it should be given time. The next day she called me and told me her sinuses were still hurting. I told her that this happens occasionally. She continued that her vision, which had always been 20/200 in her right eye, had suddenly changed and was now 20/25, but her sinus pain was still there! She was overjoyed. By the way, her vision did not stabilize at 20/25 but has fluctuated ever since. As she continues to pour energy into her eyes, the situation gradually improves.

If the energy goes automatically to the places where it is needed, why is it important to try to put your hands directly on the most problematic parts of the body? If you had unlimited time, it honestly wouldn’t matter. Given the time constraints, it’s simply much quicker and more efficient to get to the specific locations that need healing. You could fill the pool by connecting a hose to your yard, but it would be much easier to plug the hose directly into the pool.

Pranayama Healing and the Emotions

How does Pranayama Healing affect the emotions of the person I am working on?

The client’s emotions usually become significantly more balanced and harmonious. The energy does not differentiate between physical and emotional problems. It goes where it is needed and does what is necessary for the person. I remember once visiting a friend to do some work. As I walked in the door he warned me, “I have to warn you that I feel very bad today.” I asked him, “Where in your body do you feel bad?” He said, “That’s a very interesting question – I feel them in my upper chest, throat and neck.” I told him to sit down and see what I could do. I just energized those areas for about six or eight minutes. To his surprise, his crankiness had subsided by the time I was finished. “What have you done to me?” he asked. “Oh,” I said, “I just gave you an attitude adjustment.” The purpose of pranayama healing sessions is not to cure your client’s emotional problems, but rather to help them get to a place of better emotional balance and focus so that he can work with and process his own emotions more effectively and responsibly. I know a psychotherapist who uses pranayama healing with her clients with great success. She asks the client in which part of the body the emotions are felt. Then, with the client’s permission, she places her hands on these areas and directs the energy. She is extremely careful to ensure that no sexual innuendos or implications arise from this touch. The result is that her clients get to a place where they can deal with their emotions more effectively. Unresolved emotional issues can block the healing vibrations or cause the disease state to return. This work does not release patients from their personal emotional and psychological transformational healing. If pranayama healing could replace emotional processing and healthy expression of emotions, I would consider this a hindrance. I believe that learning to be emotionally honest with ourselves and feeling and releasing our emotions is a fundamental skill. Anything that undermines this fundamental part of our growth would be counterproductive. Fortunately, pranayama healing only helps people find themselves in a more balanced state where they can then do the expression, forgiveness and letting go necessary for their growth. How does Pranayama Healing affect my emotions when I use it? Each time a pranayama healing practitioner radiates energy—whether performing full-body exercises or working on a client—the practitioner raises their vibration and receives some benefit from the energy. Aside from this mild healing from the mere flow of energy, the act of giving is known to do wonders for the emotional state of the practitioner. I have experienced it myself and have heard from numerous Pranayama healing students how one session increased their emotions.

Ending a pranayama healing session

Do the sensations in your hands change when the session ends?

I have found this to be the case. When the client has all the energy they can handle, their body simply will not accept any more and you may feel the tingling or other sensations in your hands diminish or stop. In many cases, over time, you can feel your body slowly adjusting to the energy vibration of your hands as the vibrations become equal. You may not feel any sensation at all as long as you touch it. It’s funny, but everyone who does pranayama healing work seems to think, “I can’t let the energy run because I don’t feel anything in my hands.” Then when you take your hands away, friend, you’ll feel yours Hands buzzing like crazy. Put your hands back on the other person and you won’t feel anything. That is normal. It is a sign that the process is over for now. I have a secret technique that I use. I like to ask the person how they feel. If they are still in pain, I tend to think the session isn’t over yet. However, I don’t always get to this point. With practice, you will get a feel for how far a person is willing to shift their vibration in a given session. The person I was working on wanted me to stop after ten minutes and told me that she felt like that was all the energy her body could handle. Is that correct? Every now and then the energy feels unpleasant to the person receiving it as their reaction to the healing is very violent. That is understandable. If you stop at this point, remember that the session is not over and you may leave the person in this unpleasant state. If a person reacts so strongly to the healing, I recommend that you gently encourage them to continue with the session. Over time, as the energy levels out, the reaction should feel weaker for both you and your client or friend. It would be premature to stop when the energy is so intense.

How do you determine how many sessions a person needs? There are no hard and fast rules about how many sessions a person needs. If a person has been suffering from a chronic illness for a long time, help often takes longer than with an acute or more recent illness. A general rule of thumb is to continue working on a client for as long as they need help. I would let the client decide how often they need to come. In certain circumstances, he may want a session two or three times a week, or perhaps even every day for a few days. It all depends. It wouldn’t hurt to arrange a series of sessions if you have chronic kidney disease. In the long term we have to see where I make progress.

After a session

What can your client do after a session to improve their healing? If the person completing the session can continue to direct the energy through the parts of the body you have been working on, they can enhance and prolong the healing effects. Is there anything you should do for your client or friend after completing a session? I suggest you give them a glass of water to drink. The session can release toxins that can be washed out by drinking water. I think it’s a wonderful idea to recharge a glass of water by giving it energy to drink. (see p. 196) When the session is over, your hands are still running at very high vibrational energy. You can probably charge a 200ml glass of water quite powerfully in about three to five minutes.

Can Pranayama Healing Be Harmful? Can you ever harm someone by giving them too much energy? As far as I know, this has never happened before. You really can’t give someone too much energy. When one part of the body receives more energy than it needs, it sends the excess energy to another part of the body that needs it more. The recipient will feel sensations going to another place, which can be helpful information. When I Dr. When Norman Shealy visited and taught him how to direct the energy, this question came up. From his point of view, you cannot harm the person because this energy is only balanced. When equilibrium is achieved, the energy stops flowing or simply continues. Is there any danger in pranayama healing? As far as I know, pranayama healing is not dangerous.

I have seen it work wonders on newborns, animals and the elderly. In over twenty years I have not seen anything harmful. Like I said, if you give a person more energy than they can use, their body simply won’t absorb it. I can imagine a case where I would be afraid to give someone a pranayama healing session. A few years ago I met a man who had undergone a liver transplant and was taking medication to stop his immune system from rejecting his new liver. I feared that giving him energy might cause his immune system to function more efficiently, putting him at risk of liver failure. Since I don’t know that this is the case, I would err on the side of caution. Can people use these techniques to harm others? Theoretically yes, but I don’t know anyone who has tried it. The problem with trying to use the energy negatively is that it comes back so quickly to haunt the abuser. For some reason the world seems to be designed in such a way that you tend to get what you spend quickly. That being said, consciously harming other people is a guaranteed way to damage your own self-esteem. To anyone who is tempted to vent their hatred in this way, I highly recommend that he or she find some healthy ways to vent their anger, which can be incredibly empowering.

Pranayama healing and other modalities

Do you have any suggestions for using it with other practical healing techniques? Oh yeah. As far as I know, pranayama healing can be used to work with or enhance the power of any other form of hands-on healing method. I consider it a transparent therapy because it can be so easily combined with other forms of exercise. When using Reiki, simply do pranayama healing during your Reiki sessions. When you practice shiatsu or acupressure, simply direct the energy from your thumbs or fingers as you normally do in your work. Massage practitioners have found that it requires a high level of concentration to keep the energy flowing during the session. With a little practice they can become proficient at it. I have been told that clients report feeling like they are glowing after a Pranayama Healing massage. Chiropractors have discovered that they can use pranayama healing instead of most “quick adjustments.” Cranial Sacral therapists have told me that this work has transformed their practice. The list just goes on and on. Essentially, pranayama healing can enhance the effectiveness of many other techniques.

Can people with disabilities, blind or deaf people learn pranayama healing work? Oh yeah. Running energy depends on intention, attention and breathing. A person who is not distracted by visual or auditory distractions can also stay focused and may even perform better than their sighted or hearing counterparts.

Can children learn pranayama healing? Absolutely. Children usually have no problems learning this work. If they have a desire to do healing work, they can be just as effective as adults. It is not uncommon for children to attend my course and, to the delight of their parents, they do wonderful healing work. In a class I was teaching, a woman brought her 11-year-old son, Zack, to class. Zack had a wonderful time discovering that he could do healing work just as well as the adults, and he was able to help his mother as she worked on his numerous skating injuries and posture misalignments. The love he and his mother shared was one of the most beautiful things I had ever seen. On the way home, Zack said, “You know, I secretly wished I had superhuman strength, and now I feel like this.” The next day at school, Zack told his best friend that he had learned to heal people. His friend said, “Heal me.” Zack asked his friend where he was hurt. The friend replied that it didn’t hurt him anywhere. Zack told him, “I can’t help you unless you’re in pain.” With that, Zack’s friend slammed his hand on the table as hard as he could.

The hand swelled and changed color. Zack calmly picked up his hand and began channeling energy into it. A few minutes later, Zack’s friend said, “Wow, that’s so cool.” Then the two ran off to play. Do you have to be intuitive in this type of work? Being intuitive is by no means a prerequisite for success in pranayama healing. While some people seem to have a natural automatic sense of knowing exactly where to place their hands, I have found that a lot of good can be achieved by asking “Where does it hurt?” Technology. Most of the great results I have seen are based on this “low-tech” method of knowledge.

How different are pranayama alternative practitioners from each other? Just as every flower is unique and beautiful, every practitioner seems to have a unique and beautiful energy. Not all powers are equal. Some doctors seem to do well with broken bones, others might do well with tumors. I find that I do exceptionally well with injuries, inflammation, structural alignment and pain reduction. Other healers appear to have gifts in other areas. I believe that one day we will have opportunities to find out where a person’s expertise lies when working with pranayama healing. Additionally, I think we will see in the future that different people can specialize in areas such as trauma care, heart disease, cancer, etc.

Give me some pointers on conducting a pranayama healing session? Always maintain your breathing techniques. Always keep your breath connected to your sensations while you have energy. (This quickly becomes a habit and is the nature of the practitioner.) Stay focused to keep the energy as strong as possible. Pay close attention to what you feel in your hands and use that information appropriately.

I’m still confused. How can I do pranayama healing work and not be a healer? Our language can be so flawed in some areas. The person doing the pranayama healing work is not a “healer,” even though he or she is doing the healing. When we do pranayama healing work, we create an energy field with our hands. With this energy we create a vibration. The instrument for the person being worked on to heal themselves.

I believe that we are not using up our energy when we are working on someone else, but instead we are using the energy of the universe to keep that energy field close. Your body understands this energy field and through the power of resonance and entrainment, your cells gradually adapt to the vibration of your hands. Somehow in this process, their “body intelligence” and “spiritual intelligence” utilize this new vibration to effect healing that meets the needs of the recipient. Just as no one can scold you or laugh for you, no one can heal for you. No matter how much healing work you receive from other people, remember that it is your body and your body alone that does the healing. Simply put, your body heals itself. In my opinion, anyone who claims they can heal you doesn’t understand the mechanism of healing. The person doing the “healing work” is there to create the environment in which healing can occur, nothing more, nothing less. So when I tell people that my job is that of a healer, I use everyday jargon. Few people would understand me if I said that I have a resonance so that people can harmoniously engage with my vibration to heal themselves.

Chapter 5

Advanced techniques

The life force is an energy that surrounds and permeates all living things. Perhaps the same can be said about love. The intimate connection between the life force and our passion is one of the powerful and enduring mysteries.

If you have been able to perform the energy and breathing exercises described in Chapter 3, you have already learned the fundamental skills you need to be an exceptionally powerful healing practitioner. The easiest way to recognize this is to do the work on people who are in pain. At this point you can start learning the advanced techniques. These skills further strengthen the basic techniques, but are not a replacement for them. I strongly recommend that you continue to practice the introductory techniques as well – you can never practice them too often. The advanced methods that I will share with you are optional, in the sense that some practitioners will be drawn to and embrace certain of these techniques and others will not. I suggest that you find the methods that you like the most and that work best for you.

Resonance factors

When I teach people how to manage energy, I want to show them how easy it is to create effective change. If you have practiced the techniques in Chapter 3, you will have discovered this for yourself. Now is a good time to think about what I call “resonance factors” in controlling energy. These resonance factors are things you can do to increase your resonance and improve the quality and power of your healing work. I want to introduce these factors here because they build on what has not yet been learned and because they can make your healing sessions even more effective. Take time to think about and really work with these resonance factors as they will greatly enhance your healing sessions.

Let the power run

The whole body movements and other body-oriented techniques that intensify your physical body awareness and bring it out of your hands are an essential part of pranayama healing. The more sensations you can create in your body through your intention and attention, the more effective your work will be.

Use breathing techniques.

Like the bellows that heat a blacksmith’s fire, breathing is an essential part of increasing the resonance of your healing work. Managing energy alone is valuable, but combining it with treatment is many times more effective than just doing one or the other. In general, the larger the volume of air you move, the more effective your work will be. Remember to always breathe during your sessions. This not only increases your healing vibration, but at the same time protects you from taking the other person’s energy from a session and exhausting yourself. Breathe deeply, the more air the better, as long as you don’t feel dizzy.

Connect your breath with the energy.

More important than simply breathing or letting the energy flow is to combine the two. Through practice, breathing and your sensations become fully connected. When your breath and the sensations in your hands are fully connected, you will be able to feel how each breath influences and often enhances the sensations in your hands. At this point you are doing your job really well. Like blowing on hot embers to make them brighter, the more air you move, the stronger the energy tends to be. Remember your intention, an important aspect of the work. For most people, this desire to help others heal is natural and almost instinctive

Your intention to heal is a reaction

When we see someone in pain, we feel the desire to help. This response and desire to help is all that is required. It may surprise you, but you can be quite angry, depressed, grieving, or even outraged and still do a wonderful job of “healing.” The process of pranayama healing alone will, in most cases, lift your emotions. Your simple intention to help is enough to get the job done very well. When I talk about “having the intention to heal,” some people begin to doubt themselves and their intentions. The truth is that their desire for healing was evident just by attending my workshop or taking the time to read this book. You don’t have to wait until you are “perfect” or in a holy or enlightened state to help. Additionally, it is important to recognize that your intention goes beyond your current emotional state. That is, your desire for healing is far more important than the particular emotions you may be feeling at any given moment.

Choose to feel love and gratitude.

As you have seen, simply energizing your body and combining it with breathing techniques can give you tremendous healing powers. I have previously described how I believe it is in our nature to love and how the simple act of watching a child play can make the child feel loved as the act of attention is a form of Love is. We don’t have to “try” to be loving during a session because that is our nature. Dogs don’t have to try to be “dog-like,” and trees don’t have to try to act more “tree-like.” Humans are naturally loving creatures and in pranayama healing we do not need to make any special effort to do this. This is why just letting the energy flow can produce such profound and magnificent results. However, I am telling you that you can do even better work for yourself and the person you are working on by consciously choosing to enter states of love and/or gratitude. Whatever you do, don’t force yourself to feel something you’re not. If you don’t feel loving or grateful, don’t feel bad about having a bad session (because you don’t). But when you are able, consciously call forth your dwellings of love and gratitude. Allow yourself to be enjoyed to the fullest and feel the tactile sensations in your body that will trigger love or gratitude in you. Gratitude or love can affect everything in your life. The key here is to raise your vibration. I think you will be very happy with the results. Love and gratitude are the opposite of self-pity and complacency, resonance factors that are best avoided. Consciously putting yourself in a state of gratitude can increase your resonance and fundamentally improve your work.

Have an honest expectation

Emphasize a positive expectation that the body not only can heal, but also has the wisdom to do so, and that it can elevate and improve your resonance. The trick to setting expectations is to always be completely honest about where you stand and expect the best based on your experience and confidence. A good place to start is to say to yourself, “I don’t know if it’s possible to heal this or not, but I’m willing to see what happens and I know that the body has a plan of wholeness that he can.” “You don’t have to know how it’s possible, you just have to have access. I’m open to this being true. Remember that the body has wisdom and the ability to heal itself that far exceeds human understanding. Believing that miracles can happen opens up new possibilities. Because intention and attention are required to control energy, anticipation is a powerful and valuable factor in raising your vibration. Many of the greatest healers I know were aware of the fact and expectation that incredible healings happen quite often and approached their sessions with a joyful sense of positive anticipation.

Ask for help

For those working with a spiritual belief system, the only way things can get better is to ask for help from someone or whatever you believe can help. Be it Angel, God or Goddess, Great Spirit, Jesus, Higher Self, Inner Advisors, Guides or Saints, sincerely asking for help is a great thing. Here’s an important tip: When you ask for help, feel the tactile sensations of their help.

Do your best

When you give a session, give it 100 percent and the results will be greatly improved. When you give it your all, you can let go of all other thoughts, focus on your breathing, and connect the sensations in your hands. get out of the way and even lose track of time and space. Sometimes when you give it your all, you feel like you’ve disappeared – that is, you seem to get out of the way and let the energy do its work. You can feel like you’re working as hard as you can while being as relaxed as you can when you’re giving it your all. There doesn’t have to be any tension in your body, your hands, or even your mind.

Let go of attachment to the outcome.

Sometimes these factors do not work at a certain time. Their energy may not match the specific energy they need at that time. Sometimes a person may not be ready to be healed: they may need to learn some emotional lessons or other factors. Some of these factors may be understandable, others may be beyond our understanding. The point is that we don’t have to judge ourselves as good or bad or be tied to the outcome of a session. You can hope for the best and even expect the best, but it helps to recognize your resonance and realize that their healing is ultimately not your responsibility. They simply act as a catalyst that allows your clients to heal themselves.
Trust

Trusting yourself can have a wonderful effect on keeping your resonance high. This trust has multiple faces: you can trust that your love is good enough and that your ability to increase your resonance is good enough. You can trust that whatever happens during a session is for the best, be it an intense emotional release or a dramatic physical release. Ultimately, you can just trust the process – whatever it is. If symptoms seem to be getting worse, you can maintain a calm demeanor and continue to direct the energy with calming hands until the pain subsides. Take your time and consciously apply the resonance factors as you continue with the pranayama healing sessions. This may take a bit of effort, but the results are worth it. The resonance factors can be so much more than a list that you quickly read through. Take some time to work with each factor and notice how it affects the sensations in your hands. Make the resonance factors as real as possible and you will see a great improvement in your healing work.

Advanced exercises for running energy

Creating a vortex of energy

Energy doesn’t move in straight lines. From electrons to planets to entire galaxies, everything is moving and rotating. In terms of everyday physics, a spiraling soccer ball or spinning Frisbee slices through the air more efficiently because of its rotation. Bullets shoot out of a weapon in a spiral, and their rotating motion causes them to become straighter and have better penetrating power. When you spin the energy, you increase both the vibration and the potential for the energy to penetrate. As you let the energy pass through your body in full-body movements, try rotating it clockwise or counterclockwise throughout your entire body. (Direction doesn’t matter.) As you sit or stand, feel the sensation of the energy swirling up your legs, through your torso, into your head, down your arms, and into your hands. When the energy is in your hands, rotate it in your palms.

This technique requires a lot of practice, but the time you invest in developing your skills is well worth it. With patience, you will be able to feel a large amount of energy flowing powerfully through your body at any time. Remember, the key here is to use your imagination and intention to feel the tactile sensation within yourself. The more sensations you feel, the more effective it will be. Simply imagining the energy is not nearly as sufficient as bringing a tactile feeling to the work.

Working with chakras and colors

Before I met Rosalyn Bruyere, a highly respected healer, I was told that she could see energy. Despite their excellent reputation, I had become skeptical about developing a small test to find out if they were real. Until here. All of them had failed my test. My test was to run the energy as strong as possible from one hand and then casually ask the person to tell me what they saw. When I had the opportunity, I set up everyone who claimed they could detect energy and I had a very powerful charge in my hand and asked Rosalyn to take a look at the energy in my hand. Rosalyn looked me in the eyes and asked me. “Why are you letting so much energy pass through your hand?” I told her I wanted to know if she could see energy. She laughed and said, “I see the energy clearly, thank you.” I received the message. Rosalyn later explained in her class that when you focus your attention on your energy centers, called chakras, the energy that emerges from your hands takes on the color of the chakra of your attention. I tested it again. “What color do you see in my hands now?” I asked as I focused my attention on my third chakra. Without hesitation, she said, “Yellow.” Two seconds later, while focusing my attention on my fifth chakra, I asked again, “What color do you see now?” Just as quickly, she said, “Blue.” “OK, what color do you see you now?” She said, “Green.” I could tell she was getting bored with the game, but I confirmed that firstly, she could actually see energy and secondly, that focusing on the chakras changed the vibration and color of the energy from her hands coming energy changed.

Channeling the energy through a single chakra can amplify the vibration you send out through your hands. Instead of trying to be psychically or intellectually brilliant to figure out exactly what color a part of the body needs, you can point out a whole rainbow spectrum of colors and let the body decide what color it needs, thus deciding what color it needs want to create. I like to think of this as the “multivitamin” approach to healing. Just add all the colors and let the body decide what it needs. Since plants do not do well with a single frequency of light, it stands to reason that the body does not do well with a single frequency of energy. For both plants and humans, I believe full spectrum is appropriate.

Full spectrum chakra technique

I learned a variation of this technique from a meditation by a spiritual teacher named Lazar for working with the chakras and have adapted it for healing purposes.

First chakra

Bring all your attention to the base of your spine (the end of the tailbone and the area of the perineum between the genitals and the anus) and feel a red ball of light there. The red is a bright fire engine red. Tactile sensation is far more important than visualization. The primary purpose of visualization is to help you evoke physical sensations. Use the 2-6 breathing technique and focus your attention on the first chakra area as you exhale in six steps. Once you feel a tactile sensation in the first chakra area, begin rotating the “ball of light” either clockwise or counterclockwise = whatever feels comfortable is fine. What is important is that your intention creates a heightened sensation. Because energy follows thought, the greater your intention and attention, the greater the sensation.

Take a few minutes to see how strongly you can transfer the feeling to your first chakra.

Second chakra

Focus all your attention on the area and directly behind your genitals. Feel a ball of bright orange light, the color like orange but bright. Use 2-6 breathing to send energy into the chakra and rotate the ball in the direction that is most comfortable for you. It doesn’t matter if it faces the same direction as the first chakra. Spend a few minutes bringing as much feeling as possible into the second chakra.

Third chakra

The third chakra is located in the solar plexus area, above and below your belly button, about the size of your outstretched hand. Feel a ball of bright yellow light in your stomach and feel it spinning in a comfortable direction. Spend a few minutes evoking as much sensation as possible, using the two to six breaths to bring more sensation to the area.

Fourth chakra

Bring your attention to the area of your heart and feel a ball of brilliant emerald green light about the size of your fist. Allow it to rotate in the direction you are comfortable with and use the 2-6 breathing to bring more sensation to the area. Take a few minutes to create as much excitement in this area as possible.

Fifth chakra

Feel a small but intense ball of sapphire blue light in the area of your throat. Get the ball to rotate in the direction you find comfortable and again use the 2-6 breathing to bring more sensation to this chakra. As before, spend a few minutes bringing as much excitement to this area as possible.

Sixth chakra

In the area above the brow in the center of your forehead is the sixth chakra, sometimes called the third eye. Feel a small glowing ball of indigo light (the color of deep amethyst – a reddish purple) and allow it to rotate in the direction you find comfortable. Use the 2-6 breath to increase the intensity of the feeling while you focus on this area for a few minutes.

Seventh chakra

Feel a ball of intense violet light in the area of your crown. Feel it turning in the direction you feel comfortable and use the 2nd through 6th breaths to bring more sensation and energy to this area. Spend a few minutes increasing the sensation.

Full spectrum, one chakra at a time

Try to deliver the energy to a person chakra by chakra. Focus on the first chakra and take a few breaths, just twist this chakra and let the energy flow from your hands. Continue this process with each of the other chakras. Be sure to use all seven chakras with this approach so that the body can choose the energies it wants to use in its healing process.

In a recent class, one of my students channeled the energy through each chakra to his friend. When he reached the sixth chakra, his girlfriend said she felt like she was floating. Without saying anything, he tried again to channel the energy into her through different chakras. Every time he fed her energy from his sixth chakra, she felt like she was floating again. Full Spectrum, All Chakras Imagine a colored ball of light glowing and spinning at each chakra, but this time work to have all seven chakras spinning at the same time. Start with the first, move on to the second, third, etc., but as you go, check to make sure they are all still spinning. As you work your way up to the seventh chakra, nudge any chakras that aren’t spinning. At the end of this exercise, you should feel all seven chakras spinning at the same time. If you twist all the colors together, you get white light. Continue using 2-6 breathing to increase the sensation and power of this exercise. To make this easier for you, imagine that you have a hand crank and by turning it you can spin all seven chakras at the same time. Continue doing the 2-6 breaths as you spin it. Repeat the exercise, but this time imagine that you can hear each chakra spinning as it rotates. The faster they spin, the higher the frequency of the sound. This time, get all seven chakras to spin in sequence and hear each of them emit a sound that gets higher and higher as the speed increases. Use your imagination and see if you can feel sparks of light shooting from the chakras as they spin. Continue using 2-6 breathing to increase the strength and feel of this exercise. It can work wonderfully to prime your chakras before starting a session. Occasionally you may want to try them out during the session.

Tonung

Toning is an extremely effective way to enhance the effects of your healing sessions. For many people, this is the preferred way to spend their energy. Toning involves singing a note out loud or mentally. When doing pranayama healing work, you can increase the intensity of the work by steeling yourself mentally or loudly. Because speaking loudly seems strange or socially out of place to many people and can even scare others. It’s good to know that mental training can work just as well as training out loud. Maybe try closing your hand slightly and channeling energy into your hand. Once you get a strong feeling of energy, try singing a note out loud. Be mindful and notice how the energy in your hands has changed. Now try toning different notes. You can sing a series of higher notes and see which one has the strongest vibration in your hands. Once you get used to sounding loudly, try doing it silently. Mentally tone different tones and pay close attention to the sensations in your hands. Most people will notice that certain mental sounds produce more sensations and certain other sounds produce less sensations. When conducting a pranayama healing session, simply find the sounds (whether loud or mental) that evoke the most incredible feeling in your hands and tone them as you let the energy flow. You can refine the tones by exploring the different vowels and finding which ones have the best resonance properties. The problem with sounding loudly during a session is that you often slow your breathing as you exhale slowly. When breathing is out of breath. You tend to lower your vibration and become prone to absorbing energy from the person you are working on. The solution to this problem is to use the “Breathy Tone” technique.

Breathe-Tone-Technik

As you build muscle, make sure you exhale all the air for a count of four or six. This creates a somewhat breathing sound. If you try whispering loudly, you can get a feel for the breathy tone. It may not sound so nice, but it keeps your energy levels high so you are more effective and protected during your sessions. When strengthening, it is important that breathing remains just as strong as if you were not strengthening. Breathing keeps you from adjusting to the vibration of the person you are working on. You can do this by exhaling a lot of air while singing the note.

Getting the client to raise their vibration

Another way to raise the vibration of a session is to have the person being worked on help out. The easiest way to do this is to ask the client to focus all of their attention on where they are being touched. Instruct the client to pay attention and feel as much sensation as possible under your hands or in another part of their body. The second step is to have the client breathe deeply, as if breathing directly into the areas you are touching. This means they should feel as if breath is flowing through the contact area. The third point is for the client to report to you any changes in their sensations in the area you are working on or in any other part of their body. You can have them do a 1-4 breath or a 2-6 breath. Use 1-4 if you feel pain and 2-6 or circuit breathing throughout the rest of the session. By focusing their attention on the area touched, they bring their consciousness there. As you bring the force of your breath into the area, you will further increase the vibration and you will feel stronger sensations in your hands. Another way to do this is to ask your client to adjust your breathing pattern so that your breathing is synchronized. This can be quite dramatic and the results will speak for themselves.

Stacking hands and group sessions

The results of group sessions can be exponentially more impactful than those of a single person working alone. Sometimes when I perform my work in front of a large audience, I may come across someone who doesn’t seem to respond to the energy. In this case, I send the person who doesn’t respond to a few students who can usually do what I couldn’t. When a person places their hands over an area that needs healing, they create a strong resonance between their hands and the site of pain. However, when two people work on someone, the practitioners do not build resonance between themselves and the person in pain, but between themselves. This new and extraordinary resonance is often many times stronger than working alone. I like working in groups – maybe it’s because I’m lazy, or maybe it’s because I like being practical. If you have a friend or client who doesn’t seem to respond, you can definitely try conducting a group session. Something truly magical happens when two or more come together. There’s a powerful way for two people to work together – we call it the Club Sandwich. The two practitioners place their hands on the area they want to work on. Each practitioner has one hand on the client and one hand over the other practitioner’s hand. I remember when my friend Paul called me and told me that his friend Rick had fallen from a five meter high scaffolding.

One of his ribs punctured a lung and doctors had to pump five liters of blood from his right lung to save his life. When Rick was released from the hospital about a week after the accident, he was barely able to walk and was unable to roll over or take care of his body. His breathing in his right lung was incredibly painful and shallow. Since Paul had just finished my pranayama healing course about a week before the accident, I decided to conduct the session with his help. To increase the strength of the session, we used a hand stacking technique. I placed one hand on Rick’s chest and Paul placed one hand on Paul’s back, opposite my hand. I put my other hand on Paul’s hand and he put his other hand on my hand. So each of us had one hand right on Rick, and Paul had one hand on mine and I had one on his. In this way, Paul and I built a new and very powerful resonance that Rick could use to heal himself. As the session progressed, Rick began to moan and arch his upper body. I joked with Rick that it seemed like it either felt really good or that he was having great sex. He laughed, which caused him pain, and said, “This is much better than sex.” As we continued to work, his breathing became much more open and accessible. After about an hour he was able to bend and twist freely, whereas before he was extremely stiff. When Rick went back to his doctor the next day, he was amazed because Rick still had 60 percent of his right lung. The doctor asked if Rick had done the coughing exercise he had prescribed. Rick said that this wasn’t the case, but that his friends had channeled energy into his lungs. The doctor said something very interesting at this time. He said, “I don’t want to hear about it.” Rick then asked whether medicine was an empirical science or a dogmatic religion. The doctor thought about it for a moment and repeated these thoughtful and memorable words: “I don’t want to hear about it.” I encourage you to explore this area of work. Whenever you can have a session with another trained pranayama healing practitioner, it is a great way to increase the effectiveness of your pranayama healing sessions and is a lot of fun.

Chapter 6

Advanced techniques

The depth, wonder, power and brilliance of your love is not only more than you know; It’s more than you can ever imagine.

I recommend you develop a solid foundation of skills and confidence with the beginner and intermediate techniques before moving on to the advanced techniques. As you’ll see, you don’t have to use all the advanced techniques; However, you need to develop skills in using the beginning techniques as they provide a solid foundation for the others. The intermediate and advanced techniques can further increase the strength of your healing work. Advanced techniques typically require skills that are learned naturally after success with the beginner and intermediate techniques. I strongly recommend that you practice beginner and intermediate techniques for about twenty to fifty hours before attempting the advanced techniques. I should also let you know that there are many exceptional healers who simply use the beginning techniques and get incredibly wonderful results. The most important thing is not how many of these techniques you know, but how much you practice and how skilled you become

When I teach pranayama healing workshops, getting to this part of the course is very exciting for me. As we begin to learn the advanced techniques, there will be excitement in the room and we will hear so many people talk about extraordinary healings they have experienced or participated in.

The “advanced” exercises and techniques are based on the skills acquired through performing the basic and intermediate exercises and techniques. I urge you to develop a solid foundation of skills before beginning work on these exercises. These techniques are generally more powerful than the basic and intermediate techniques and require a higher level of skill or confidence that can be acquired through experience.

The “What You Love Most” Technique

This is one of the simplest and most natural techniques. Over many years I have heard stories of people who had no formal training in practical healing who suddenly felt inspired to do this work and were amazed at the enormously successful results. When they later tried to do this again, they had no idea what had happened or how they had done it. In my opinion, the technique that people love the most was probably the secret of their unique success.

When you can connect with the depths of your love, you have changed the vibration of your hands. My friend Billie has and loves about ten cats at any given time. All of her cats are unique and wonderful and loving companions, but as she puts it, one of her cats “humbles” her heart. This cat’s name is Julius and his appearance is amazing and full of devotion (see photo). Billie has learned to use the love she feels for this special cat to empower her healing sessions, and you can do the same. Gratitude, joy and love are contagious.

I put this technique in the advanced section of the book not because it is difficult, but because I wanted to be absolutely sure that you knew you didn’t have to use it to get beautiful results. When some of my students tried to force themselves to use this technique, all they found was a fair amount of discomfort in their attempts. The secret of using the “What you love most” method is to use it only when it does not require special efforts to change your mood.

Your love can be used to become a great healing force.

Allow yourself to remember and relive someone or something in your life that triggers in you an enormous feeling of love, gratitude, happiness, or joy. Simply open your feelings and think about the person, situation, animal, plant, or whatever it is that lights and inspires your passion.
Allow this emotion to fill your body with as many tactile sensations as possible. Pay attention to where in your body you feel the emotion. For example, when you feel love in your chest, feel it there with as much sensation as you can muster and let it spread throughout your body
Allow the tactile sensations of your love, joy, happiness, or gratitude to flow from your hands and combine them with teaching techniques. It’s that simple. Simply use your intention to move the tactile sensation of the emotion through your body and then out of your hands.

Instead of love, you can use any other extremely positive feeling. Other emotions that you can use positively are enthusiasm, satisfaction, wonder or inspiration.

Please do not try to force yourself to feel positive emotions as this is neither effective nor fun. Take advantage of your feelings that come quickly and only use this technique when you feel like it.

The hang breath

I discovered slope breathing because I automatically did it myself after twenty years. It requires a level of skill that may be challenging for many beginners.

Inhale with one, four or two, six breaths, and when you have finished inhaling, let the air out very slowly as you begin to exhale. As you continue to exhale, gradually speed up the exhalation until you have exhaled the air to the count of four or six, depending on which breath you are taking. Exhaling becomes faster and faster as you breathe out more air, just as your speed would increase if you were going down a slope. The trick to using this technique well is to pay extreme attention to the sensations in your hands. You should feel the sensations in your hands increasing as you breathe out more and more air. An image to help you imagine what I’m describing is to imagine yourself blowing on hot coals. The harder you exhale, the brighter the burning coal becomes.

I put this technique in the advanced section because as you exhale you need to feel the intensity of the sensation increase in your hands. Make sure you breathe in deeply and don’t breathe out for longer than a count of six.

Harmonious toning

For those who love toning, harmonic toning is a great way to enhance the power of your pranayama healing sessions. As with other strengthening exercises in pranayama healing, when exhaling, make sure you exhale for a maximum of six seconds. Harmonic toning allows you to mentally tone more than one note at a time to create harmonies. Experiment with different tones and vowels to find the tone that evokes the most feeling in your hands.

Another variation of this technique is to mentally tone a note and raise the pitch higher and higher until it is out of earshot. Don’t be surprised if you can’t imagine hearing it anymore, because that’s the idea. Then raise two more notes until they are also out of the audible range and also harmonize with the first note. So now you have three tones that all harmonize with each other and are all above hearing distance. As you do this, imagine the health and well-being of the person you are working on. Imagine that there is a perfection expressed in your life. Even though you may not know what this perfection is, it still expresses itself. Then in this very pleasant (not stressful) reverie. Just lose yourself and keep training. It’s like you’re having a gentle dream.

The funnel

This is a variant of rotating the energy. Imagine an energy cyclone above your head. The tip of the funnel penetrates into your head and throughout your body, providing you with a tremendous source of energy. Importantly – the only thing that matters here – is that you can feel the funnel as a tactile sensation in your body. Simply imagining a funnel isn’t enough here – it has to be something you can feel in your body for this technique to be fully effective.

Feel the energy funnel rotating through you as you allow energy to flow. This technique can enhance the energy of your healing sessions. With all visualization techniques when using pranayama healing, what is truly important is not what you see, but rather that you can have tactile, solid sensations in your body and hands as a result of the visualization. Remember, it’s all about the sensation.

Flowers

This is a beautiful technique where you change your vibration using your olfactory senses. This is just a fancy way to express your sense of smell. Many people will find that this wonderful technique can work wonders.

Imagine smelling a rose or another flower that you love. Breathe deeply into the rose and as you breathe out let the energy flow into your hands. Pay close attention to how the vibration changes in your hands. Additionally, you can probably notice how just the smell of the flowers affects your body vibration sensations and your attitude. Experiment with your favorite flowers. I particularly like jasmine, roses and gardenias. You may find that certain people respond to one lower level and not another. You may want to imagine that you are inhaling an entire bouquet of flowers. If you have flowers with you, take deep breaths regularly to remind yourself of how they smell. The key to this approach is that the scent of the flower touches you deeply enough to trigger sensations in your body, which you then allow to flow from your hands to do the healing work.

Working with chakras eight to twelve

Many people have heard about and worked with the seven main chakras of the body. Less well known are chakras eight to twelve, which I learned from Lazaris. Let’s say you liked the chakra technique in chapter five. I think you will love working with these other chakras. Now that you are able to spin chakras one through seven, you can further increase the energy of your pranayama healing sessions by learning to work with chakras eight through twelve. Use the same meditative technique to spin each chakra individually and channel this energy from your hands. Many people have told me that using chakras eight through twelve has led them to a greater sense of spiritual connection and sometimes incredible success during their sessions. Remember to use one of the breathing techniques during this exercise.

Eighth chakra

Symbolically, the eighth chakra represents probable realities and the astral plane and can be contacted below the feet. Imagine a ball of blinding and brilliant white light about ten meters below your feet. Let the ball rotate in the direction you feel comfortable. What’s important is not only that you imagine it spinning, but that you can also feel a physical sensation when it spins.

Ninth chakra

Symbolically, the ninth chakra represents possible realities as well as the home of your higher self and is located above the crown of your head. Imagine a ball of blinding, brilliant white light about 8 to 10 inches above your head. Get the ball to spin in the direction that feels good to you. Don’t just imagine it spinning, but feel the physical sensation it brings

Tenth, eleventh and twelfth chakras

Symbolically, the tenth chakra represents what is truly real, beyond the illusion we experience. The eleventh chakra represents the soul and spirit. The twelfth chakra represents your relationship with God, the Universe, the Goddess, All That Is, the Great Spirit, or whatever you choose to use.

The tenth chakra is located about 20 cm above the ninth chakra. Repeat the instructions as in the description of the ninth chakra. The eleventh is about 20 to 25 cm above the tenth. The twelfth is placed another 20-25 cm above the eleventh. Follow the same procedure to get them spinning using your breathing techniques.

Once you have experienced the rotations of chakras eight through twelve, there are two popular approaches to working with the chakras. The first approach is to work your way up chakras one through twelve, channeling the energy from your hands with each chakra. Spend a long time if you find one that gives you more sensations in your hands. This is an indication that there is a greater response there. The second approach is a little more demanding. This means that all twelve chakras rotate at the same time and then the energy flows out of your hands. As long as you create tactile, solid sensations in your hands by rotating the chakras, both techniques work quite well. Some people have found that just rotating the twelfth chakra well can cause all the others to start rotating as well.

Unless you know better, I recommend channeling energy from all chakras. You can spin them one at a time or all at once and then let the energy flow from your hands.

Asking for help

For those of you who enjoy collaborating with your higher self, angels, guides, or spiritual teachers, asking for help during your sessions can only improve things. Tapping into the feelings of your spirituality can only raise your vibration, and the optimistic expectation and help you receive can only make things better too. To make this even more effective, feel the hand of the one you called for help. Feel the tactile sensations of his or her hands on yours and then feel the gratitude for the help.

Raise expectations

In 1980, I sat with Bob Rasmusson for hours trying to understand why he could direct energy so much more than anyone else. I would ask him every question I could think of to uncover his secrets. I believe one of these secrets has to do with expectation.

I consciously chose to include this technique in this chapter because I have seen people abuse it to their detriment. Having high expectations about the outcome of a session increases your response and can be an influencing factor in shaping the outcome of a session. However, asking people to have high levels of expectations before they are ready can only lead to self-doubt. By the way, self-doubt is not one of the preferred states in this work.

Even if you are not yet at a point where you know how wonderful pranayama healing is, you can believe that anything is possible. Because beliefs take precedence over expectations, you can choose to believe that healing might be possible, that the body knows how to heal itself, that there is a perfection that the body can come close to. If all else fails, you can approach a session with a completely neutral expectation: “I don’t know what’s going to happen.” A neutral expectation can also work wonderfully. The main thing here is to raise your expectations as high as you can honestly address them without falling into self-doubt.

Heal the past

The first time I used this technique I was simply amazed and overjoyed with the results. I have noticed that most children in Western civilization are not held as often as children who come from many undeveloped or primitive cultures. Jean Liedloff, an anthropologist who wrote a great book called The Continuum Concept, wrote that in some primitive societies children never hugged each other. In these societies, babies were carried everywhere and not laid down. She suspected that the children had an excess of energy that they needed to release, and that when the children were held, they passed on some of that energy to their parents. If children are not restrained, they become aggressive and violent. I suspect that much of the discontent and alienation that is so painfully visible in Western civilization may have its roots in the severe deprivation of its people. We have become so rich that we feel alienated and isolated.

One day I decided to meditate on healing my past as a toddler and allow myself some of the physical touch I wasn’t receiving. During this meditation, I mentally went back in time and imagined myself holding myself like a toddler. Since I was holding this baby in my hands, I decided to energize the baby. In just a few seconds after I started energy running, I had an experience that I had never had before or since. Suddenly a huge wave of energy ran through me. My spine spontaneously moved like a whip, causing me to suddenly sit up a little straighter. I don’t know what happened, but it was quite unexpected and dramatic.

The technology is very simple. Just relax, get into a meditative state and imagine that you are traveling back in time. Keep the young version of yourself at whatever age you want. At the same time you hold the baby or child. Simply begin by channeling the energy from your hands and breathing as you would any other healing session.

Combine multiple techniques

With practice you will be able to combine techniques to great advantage. The combination of techniques requires greater concentration from the practitioner, and ultimately the more one surrenders to the process, the more effective it becomes. By combining your favorite techniques, you can creatively complement your work and find what suits you best.

Here are some examples of how you can combine techniques while directing the energy from your hands and continuing the breathwork: Tone while rotating the energy, as in the vortex technique or funnel technique. The higher the tone, the faster the energy rotates.

Spin the chakras one at a time while using the “What You Love Most” technique. Enter the tissue to be healed as described in Chapter 12 while toning it and maintaining a high expectation.

One would think that you understand what I’m talking about. Go ahead and create the combinations you like. Have fun!

Chapter 7

Change your posture with energy

On the edge

We are now on the threshold of extraordinary breakthroughs in the art of practical healing. Human abilities that were previously considered “science fiction” are completely natural and can withstand rigorous scientific scrutiny.

Confronting the impossible

A few years ago I gave a talk at a large conference in San Francisco. I had explained to the audience how easy it is to learn to use pranayama healing and that in many types of healing processes, bones – even skull bones – spontaneously return to proper alignment with just a light touch.

After my lecture ended, a man came up to me and said, “I have a Ph.D. I have a degree in physiology, and I know that it’s impossible to move the bones of the skull because they’re so tightly connected!” I replied, “I’m very pleased to meet you. Come here; Let me show you what I’m talking about.” Within moments, I found someone in my audience whose skull bones were severely uneven.

I placed my thumbs on either side of the back of her head, pushed them up to the back of her head, and saw that one side was much higher than the other. “What do you see here?” I asked him. He placed his thumbs in the same position and pushed up. After a quick analysis he said, “The left side looks higher.” “How much higher?” I asked. He put his thumbs back on the back of her head, measured even more carefully and said, “At least half an inch, maybe five-eighths of an inch.” I told him that was exactly what I had seen. I then lightly touched the base of the back of her head with my thumbs, placed my fingertips on the side of her head, and began running the energy. After about fifteen seconds I asked him to look again. He rolled his eyes in disbelief and measured her. This time he measured and measured for about a full minute. Finally he announced that the occipital ridge looked perfectly even. “Are you interested in researching this?” I asked. And with that he said, “No, I work on amphibians.” And then he just walked away.

I’m going to show you that you can easily do what conventional science says is completely impossible. I warn you: if you discover that you can do this, you may need to expand your beliefs a bit. This can be uncomfortable for some people. I’m not asking you to do this

Change your beliefs, but just follow the instructions and honestly see what happens.

Once you’ve practiced the exercises in Chapter 3, you’re ready to move on. At this point you should be able to:

Feel the prana energy through your body and into your hands.

Do the breathing techniques.

Connect your breathing with your sensations.

Remember when running the energy with the intention of changing a person’s posture, there are a few important things to keep in mind: This type of manipulation of the skeletal structure is so harmonious. The bones seem to “melt” again. You rarely hear a clicking or grinding sound like with many chiropractic maneuvers.

You don’t have to decide where or whether the bones should move – the body figures it out on its own. The person’s body intelligence decides what should happen. In most cases, the person’s body chooses to move the bones back into place. For reasons I can only speculate about, the body seems to like having its structure aligned.

Bones move faster when you touch them lightly. Do not try to direct, push or use force as this is counterproductive. People are so conditioned to control situations through the use of violence. This is a case where force is not only unnecessary but also ineffective. Make sure your hands are very relaxed. Many students, especially people who have performed various types of massage or deep tissue work, have a strong tendency to hold tension rigidly in their hands. Let your hands become soft and relaxed. The flow of prana, which I also call the flow of energy, flows through it more easily when you are not tense. Structural corrections occur more easily when a person is sitting or standing. For some reason, structural realignment occurs most smoothly when people are upright. This is not to say that you can never create change when a person is lying down, but it is easier when a person is sitting or standing. This is very convenient because almost everywhere you go you can find a place to stand and in most cases sit. When you allow energy to flow, many types of healing can take place and only part of this process results in that the bones move. Because the change in posture caused by a light touch is so dramatic and unexpected, I like to demonstrate it to groups. Many who observe this will naturally assume that this work is about a structural realignment. The movement of bones is like the tip of an iceberg because there is so much more going on beneath the surface. Since we are not readily aware of the countless changes that take place at the cellular level, we say that the bones are moving because we can see it.

Sometimes the bones move quickly, sometimes slowly, and occasionally not at all. There are times when the body is very happy to have the structure as it is, and no matter how much energy you put into the system, it will remain structurally the same. It’s just common sense that you can’t fix what isn’t broken. When treating people with chronic back problems, structural changes can be observed within a few minutes, but it can also take ten, twenty or even thirty minutes for the changes to become visible. In most cases, some postural adjustments occur within two to five minutes, sometimes even within seconds.

If you have successfully completed the exercises in Chapter 3, then you are actually ready, even though you may not believe it!

There are two places in the body where the bones move most noticeably and quickly: the hips and the occiput. To see that you can change posture with a light touch, let’s start with the hips.

Measurement and change of hip position

Find someone whose one hip is higher than the other. Some people have long legs and this technique cannot correct that. The vast majority of people can be adjusted if they are not properly aligned.

Place your fingertips on the top of the hip bone and press down lightly and evenly on both sides. To see if one side is higher than the other, you need to have your eyes at eye level with the other spot you are measuring. I have to constantly remind students to get down on one knee so they can check if their hips are straight. In many cases the difference will be quite noticeable, in other cases the difference will be insignificant. To test this yourself, I suggest you find some people who are high on a site.
Once you have determined which side is higher and how much higher it is, take your palms and gently place them on the ridge of the ileum. Don’t push down, just start the energy flow. Make a full-body movement, feel full sensations gathering in your hands, and use one of the breathing techniques. For this demonstration, I would suggest that one to four breaths should work quite well. The trick is to continue breathing and directing the energy into the ileum for one to ten minutes. Sometimes the bones move almost immediately as soon as they are touched; sometimes it takes longer.
Be sure to ask the person you are working on if they can feel anything or experience exciting sensations. Many people can feel the energy almost the second they start running.
On the back of the ileum, follow exactly the instructions you used on the front. The ileum is a surprisingly complex structure because it can rotate sideways, up and down, and in all sorts of ways. Sometimes one side is high in the front and the other side is high in the back. It is always a good idea to balance both the front and back of the ileum.

Measuring and changing the position of the occipital crest

Based on more than twenty years of experience with this phenomenon, the human body feels a tremendous desire to realign the skeletal structure and especially the skull. The occipital spine is probably the easiest structure in the body to move with life energy. Ironically, it is considered by physiologists and doctors to be the structure least able to move. For whatever reason, the body’s innate intelligence wants you to keep your head straight.

The first time I had this done, I had an experience that I will never forget. This was the first session I was to receive from my teacher Bob Rasmusson. I remember sitting at the end of the table and looking out the open window. Bob placed his thumbs lightly on the base of the back of my head and suddenly the entire window seemed to tilt to the side at about 35 degrees. A moment later everything calmed down. I believe that as the occiput moved, the eye sockets that hold the eyes in place also moved, causing my brain to momentarily see the window at a severe angle. In about half a second my brain was able to recalibrate itself and make everything seem level again.

In the last twenty years I have observed this displacement of the skull bones about fifty times. If I find someone whose occipital ridge is way out of alignment, I will ask them to keep their eyes open for the next thirty seconds to see if they have had this experience. About one in ten people who are very far out of alignment will experience it. To reproduce my expectations, I was careful not to explain why I wanted them to keep their eyes open until the bones returned to their place, as I wanted them to have their own experience.

Chiropractors have told me that changing the bones of the skull is a great way to get the body to realign the entire spine.

Undoubtedly, this step has other benefits as the body seems so determined to do it. Some people have told me that it relieves or eliminates chronic headaches or sinus pain. In general, more healing work is warranted for these illnesses.

If you slide your thumbs up either side of the neck and press in gently, you will eventually get to the base of the skull. The tissue there is not as soft as the neck because you are now pushing against the bone.
Try to place your thumbs so that they are the same distance from the center of the head, with one thumb on each side. There is usually a small edge on either side where your thumbs can fit comfortably.
Don’t let the person you’re measuring move their hair out of the way. Raising the hair tilts the head and makes it impossible for you to judge whether the occipital ridge is flat or not. Instead, place your thumbs over the hair and push it up.
Look closely at the positions of your thumbs to see if they are even with each other. Adjust your body so that your eyes are level with the back of your head. If you want to get good results, you need to have your eyes at thumb level. Admittedly, some of my students seem capable of this, and others never become proficient.
Have the customer take a seat. The power of this move can be quite remarkable. I saw a woman faint for a few minutes and several others almost faint. These rare individuals are more likely to faint while standing. These extreme reactions are the body’s way of finding a new balance. People with these reactions always felt much better after the session.
With a client in a sitting position, lightly touch the base of the occiput with your thumbs and place your fingertips on the sides of their head. Let the energy flow from your fingertips and use one of the breathing techniques. The skull bones usually move in the first five to twenty seconds that you do this. There is also an advantage to doing this step longer.

If you’ve been able to do the energy exercises in Chapter 3 and have worked with a few people, you should have seen by now that bones actually move. I suggest you enjoy this experience.

Chapter 8

Work for back and neck problems

Love can unite your breath with intention, as if you could focus light and ignite fire. The most common problems I see with clients are neck and back pain. Since these diseases are so widespread, I decided to write a separate chapter about them. Be aware that treating this type of pain over the years is just one of the many highly effective uses of pranayama healing. I have found it extremely gratifying to see how new students have been able to help relieve neck pain, lower back pain and sciatica in their first few sessions.

Work on both sides of the vertebrae

The first thing you should do when dealing with someone who has neck or back pain is to work on both sides of the spine. The ideal place to place your hands or fingertips is at the outer ends of each vertebra. It is ineffective to work from the front of the body because by doing so you regulate the energy in all organs, including the spine. In general, the closer you can place your hands to the exact spot where the pain occurs, the more effective you will be. By positioning the tripod hand on either side of the spine, a strong resonance is created, allowing the vertebrae to spontaneously slide back into proper alignment.

Energy balancing

If you look at a person’s spine from the side, you will see that the spine is not straight, but rather gently curves in and out from the top of the neck to the tip of the tailbone. These curves are fairly well placed to provide support and balance to the spine.

Keilbein
Back of head
Keilbein
Back of head
1 cervical spine
2 cervical spine
3 cervical spine
4 cervical spine
5 cervical spine
6 cervical spine
1 Thorax
2 Thorax
3 Thorax
4 Thorax
5 Thorax
6 Thorax
7 Thorax
8 Thorax
9 Thorax
10 Thorax
11 Thorax
12 Thorax
1 lumbar spine
2 lumbar spine
3 lumbar spine
4 lumbar spine
5 lumbar spine
sacrum
coccyx
sacrum

When one part of the spine hurts or is injured, the body often compensates by putting stress on other parts as well. This makes sense if you think of the spine as a complete structure rather than a series of sections. There is a reflexive reaction between the top of the spine and the lower part of the spine. In most cases, an injury or pain is compensated for by the spine as a whole.

If you come across a person who has pain in the lower part of the back, it is usually necessary to work on the neck. And even if someone has pain in their neck, work on their lower back is usually necessary. Before the spine can realign itself, it must “know” that it can safely change position. Before the neck can move safely into the correct position, it may need to know that the lower back can move as well. In this way, the entire spine can find a new balance in which to function.

General points to consider for neck and back pain

Ask the person in pain to point to the exact spot where they are in pain. Place your hands there and let the energy flow. Don’t make assumptions about where the pain is. The closer you are to the exact point, the faster the effect occurs.
Use a tripod hand position or palms when touching your client. The tripod is excellent if you are comfortable; Otherwise, use the palms, thumbs, or fingertips. Remember that you can direct the energy from any part of your body when you implement your intention.
Place your hands in the most comfortable position you can find. I recommend that you move if you don’t feel comfortable and find a position that makes you feel comfortable.
Do not use force or pressure when touching. Keep your hands relaxed and let the energy do the work.
Work on people’s necks and backs while sitting or standing. Standing generally works best for the lower back, while sitting works best for the neck. If the tissue is injured, it is probably best for the person to sit or lie down. Most importantly, make sure the person you are working with is comfortable.

The trick is to keep breathing and use one of your chosen energy techniques. Make sure you connect your breathing with the feeling of energy

Hold the points for as long as necessary. Pay attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. It may take as little as a few minutes or require repeated hour-long sessions to help your client. The easiest way to find out is to give energy and ask the person how they are doing.
Track the pain or feeling. Have a dialogue with the person you are working with and let them tell you if the pain has shifted or moved. Change the position of your hands to follow the pain or sensation

Sometimes the introduction of energy into the body can cause temporary pain. This has proven time and time again to be a very good sign that healing is taking place. This pain is usually short-lived. If pain occurs, encourage your client to breathe deeply into the pain while it is still there.

Increase the power of your work by having the person you are working on breathe deeply too.

For longer sessions and particularly difficult areas, you can place a person face up or face down on a massage table with their hands on their spine. You can also place the person face up on the massage table with your hands under their spine.

Working with neck pain

Using your fingertips on the sides of your head along the line of the temporal suture, apply energy to the occipital spine for one to two minutes.
Be sure to work on both sides of the cervical vertebrae, paying particular attention to the painful areas.
You may need to pay special attention to the atlas, axis and seventh cervical vertebrae.
Be sure to target the energy to areas of the client’s lower back where there is tension or pain, which may equate to neck pain.
Adjust your hips. Front and back. as shown in the previous chapter.

Working with lower back pain

Adjust hips front and back as previously described
Direct energy to the areas of pain.
Direct energy into the neck, particularly areas of tension or pain. Follow the guidelines for working on the neck listed in the previous section.
Continue the dialogue and chase the pain or sensation.

Working with sciatica

Follow the guidelines for working your lower back with these supplements:

Use your thumbs and pay special attention to the areas of the buttocks shown here. Work on both sides of the buttocks, paying more attention to the painful side.
Direct energy to any area of the leg or foot that is feeling pain. Go ahead and chase the pain or feeling wherever it takes you.
Treat any other area that feels pain during or after the session.

Middle back pain

If there are problems in the middle of the back, you need to often do relaxation exercises in the neck and lower back. You can do as follows:

Direct energy into the occiput and neck.
Direct energy into the lower back and balance the hips.
Treat the painful area.

These simple guidelines will work wonders for most back pain caused by misalignments and injuries. Of course, this is not the intended treatment for back pain due to kidney problems.

Chapter 9

Work throughout the body

Open your eyes, pause to wonder, and stand in awe as you realize the true nature of your gifts.

healing Hands

Have you ever wondered why people immediately and automatically place their hands on the part of their body that was just injured? It appears that this action is universal and integrated into our neural hardware. Perhaps part of us instinctively knows that this is a way we can help ourselves and others when they are in pain. It’s funny, but after doing this work for over two decades, now whenever I’m around someone in severe pain, I have an immediate and automatic reaction – I start directing the energy. I feel it flowing through my body and into my hands. This may be a function of compassion or simply conditioning, but perhaps it is a natural human response to seeing another in distress.

Before we get into the many ways to place your hands, I thought it would be a good idea to give you a little insight into how to work with hand positions. Over the years, I have observed that some students manage to become annoyed and even overwhelmed by the idea of having to know exactly where to place their hands in order to be effective. This is understandable as most classroom subjects have become overly complicated with technical language so that only highly paid professionals know what they are about. This is not the case with practical healing in general and with pranayama healing in particular.

If you are ever in doubt about where to place your hands, the easiest and covers a variety of problems is to simply do what I showed you in Chapter 3: place the area that is in pain or need, to be healed firmly between your two hands. The vast majority of conditions can be treated by sandwiching.

The basic hand sandwich (hold the mayonnaise) sandwiching means having one hand on one side and the other hand on the other side of the body part you are treating.

The most important thing to remember is this: if the position in which you have placed your hands is not optimal, in the vast majority of cases the person you are working on will feel some sensation or pain spread to another part of her body. If you have an open dialogue with the person you’re working on, they can tell you other places to put your hands. This is an example of how trusting the process can be extremely useful.

You could honestly place one hand on the head and the other hand on the knee and eventually get good results as the body directs the life energy where it needs to go. However, you will get better results if you place your hands as close as possible to the exact spot where pain or difficulty is occurring. So here are the key things to keep in mind when making sandwiches, and then I’ll show you some hand positions that are a little less obvious.

Grasp the part of the body that needs to be healed with your hands as close as possible to and on either side of the problem you are working on. If possible, go directly to the specific area. Of course, use common sense. That is, do not put your hands in a wound or touch a burn. A workaround may mean placing your hands above and below or on either side of the point you want to focus the energy on.
Use your fingertips or a tripod to direct energy into very small areas. The concentration of energy works very well in such cases. This also helps you bring your hands closer to the center of the area that needs healing.
Pursue the pain. Have a dialogue with the person you are working on and track their sensations or pain on their body.
Make sure your body feels comfortable while working.
The trick is to continue breathing throughout the session.

Running energy directly on or near the surface

There are cases where sandwiching is not as effective as directly injecting energy into the affected body tissue. Examples of places where you could work directly on the tissue more effectively include topical issues such as bee stings, poison oak, and burns. You can also treat eyes, sinuses, gums, kidneys and adrenal glands. The idea is that you want to work on tissue that is not too far below the skin.

The field of your hands directly above the body does a great job when it doesn’t have to travel more than a few inches. If the energy needs to be more than a few inches, the sandwich position is the preferred position for your hands.

Since I’m not with you when you practice, I’ll have to make do with this: the trick is to keep breathing!

Special conditions

Headaches are probably one of the most common problems you will face, and in most cases even migraines can be treated effectively. I recommend that the person you are working with either sit or lie down. Of course, make sure your body is comfortable in whatever position you work.

occiput
Bone
Atlas
axis
7. Cervical spine
Cervical vertebrae
1. Thorax
2. Thorax

Rest your head around the area of pain.
Balance the occipital spine.
Introduce energy into the seams.
You may also need to direct energy into the atlas and axis.

Eye problems

Simply place your palms over your eyes and let the energy flow directly in. Be careful not to press on the eyes. Let the energy do the work. Be patient as repeated sessions may be required to make good progress. I have seen many cases where a person’s vision has improved, at least temporarily.

Sinus-Problems

Sinus problems often respond very quickly to the direct introduction of energy. Use fingertips or palms.

Temporal-Mandibulargelenk (TMJ)

Use a tripod hand position and place your fingertips directly on the joint. You can tell if you’re in the right place because the temporomandibular joint is a bony surface that moves when the mouth is opened or closed. In most cases, the energy can relieve pain or tension in the joint. If a loud snapping sound is heard when the jaw opens, this may be due to osteoporosis and is best treated nutritionally (see Chapter 14).

throat

Place your hands gently on or around the person’s neck. There is no need to worry about doing anything wrong.

Carpal tunnel syndrome and repetitive strain injuries

Carpal tunnel syndrome can be caused by problems in the wrist, elbow, shoulder, neck or even the lower back, knee or foot. In most cases, you can speed recovery by working on your wrist, elbow, shoulder, and neck

Be sure to do the following:

Direct energy directly into the wrists. Make sure the person’s hand is in a comfortable upright position, as shown here.
Direct energy to the area of the seventh cervical vertebra and the first thoracic vertebra.
If you have pain in your lower back, make sure you energize there too.

Shoulder problems

Direct energy directly to the area that hurts. Be sure to ask the person you are working on to make sure your hands are in the correct position.
Also try channeling energy from the armpit into the shoulder, as shown.

If these movements were unsuccessful, try working the seams, occipital back, neck, lower back and hips, then go back to the shoulder.

windpipe
Lunge
Lunge
esophagus
Heart
spleen
Adrenal glands (above the kidneys).
liver
Kidneys
Qvarie
Small intestine
Blase
genitals

Rectum

Sandwiching works well on most organs in the body. You simply place one hand on each side of the body to allow the energy to flow between your hands. Have a dialogue to find out what sensations your client is experiencing during a session. This information can lead you to work in places that may not have occurred to you.

Simply introducing energy into the heart can improve blood pressure, cardiac arrhythmias and heart palpitations.

When energy is directed to the kidneys and adrenal glands, it works best directly through the organs. This approach works well for other organs or body parts that are near the surface, such as the eyes, throat, or bladder.

pineal gland
Pituitary gland
thyroid
Hypothalamus
Thymusdrüse
adrenal glands (above the kidneys)
Lymph nodes
spleen
Pancreas
ovaries (in women)
Lymphatic vessels
testicles (in men)
immune system

You can use the energy to rebuild or heal the immune system:

Direct energy into the endocrine glands, which include the pineal gland, pituitary gland, thyroid, thymus, adrenal glands, ovaries and testes.

Lymphatic system, located primarily around the neck, armpits, chest, breasts, abdomen, and inner thighs.

Direct energy to important organs – heart, lungs, liver and kidneys.

Direct energy to where the client is in pain.

With these few simple guidelines, you can do incredible healing work with your family, friends, and those lucky enough to be around you.

Chapter 10

self-healing

The heart of healing is the heart.

Treating yourself to a session can be quite remarkable. Still, I think it’s only fair to say that channeling energy into yourself is usually not as effective as receiving a session from someone else. Because we are already used to the vibration of our energy, flowing our energy back into ourselves is rarely as spectacular as receiving the energy from another person. A friend of mine said, “Healing yourself with energy is a bit like sex. You can do it to yourself, but it’s just not the same.”

Receiving love from another person is neither predictable nor controllable. This applies both energetically and emotionally. I believe that there are many types of love – many flavors, if you will. Each person will express their unique combination of these characteristics. Some people can express their love vibrationally as caring, compassion, courage, commitment, trustworthiness, empathy, honesty, vulnerability, intimacy, security, etc. There are so many delicious flavors of love that just can’t be fit into a little four letter word fit. Maybe your self-healing needs a taste of the love you don’t normally give.

There are some conditions that I have been able to treat well by focusing the energy on myself, and others where I have been ineffective. For example, while I managed to improve my vision and injuries, I was unable to adjust the position of my skeletal structure. Know that everyone is different and that my strengths and weaknesses are certainly not yours.

A few years ago I noticed that the moon became increasingly blurry when I looked at it and wondered why astronomers weren’t saying anything about it. I also had to hold books further and further away while reading. When I started putting energy into my eyes (about five to ten minutes twice a day), I felt a deep burning sensation that lasted for the first two weeks. About a month after I started doing this every day, I went outside one night and looked at the full moon. It was completely sharp, with no blurred edges. It took significantly longer for my eyesight to become impaired enough for me to read comfortably when I held the page closer to me.

Maybe it’s human nature, but I tend to get lazy when it comes to working with my own eyes. When I practice regularly, I can read from about ten to eleven inches away, and when I stop practicing after a few months, I find myself reading from thirteen to fourteen inches away. When I start again, it will only be a few days before I can see again.

About a year ago I had oral surgery. As I left the dentist’s office, the left side of my face began to swell significantly. Sitting behind his office, I looked out over a river and energy began to flow into my cheek over the spot where the operation had taken place. I spent about an hour and was able to reduce the inflammation by about 90 percent. My next appointment was to see my tax officer. He couldn’t believe I had just had surgery for a root canal as I had no pain and almost no inflammation. The only time I felt pain was when I got home. I had just gotten out of my car and suddenly felt a sharp pain. This pain only lasted a split second and disappeared as soon as I put my hand back on my cheek. I spent much of the day with at least one hand touching my cheek. During the dentist’s three procedures on this tooth, I did not need any painkillers and only experienced occasional hints of pain. This discomfort immediately subsided when I started running the energy.

I remember another time when some friends helped me move. As I stood up after suddenly picking up a box. I hit my head hard against a wooden post. This caused me to fall to my knees and see stars. My immediate urge was to rub my head, but instead I forced myself to gently touch the area with my fingertips, setting off a flow of prana energy. After about two minutes the pain went away and I went back to work. After about twenty minutes, I started wondering if I was going to have one of those bumps on my head like those cartoon characters. I touched my head very carefully and felt no pain. I started pushing harder and harder, but couldn’t find any evidence that I had ever hurt myself. And just so you know, I’m not the only one who can do this.

One of my students was cutting vegetables when her knife slipped and cut her finger to the bone. She grabbed the finger with her other hand and immediately started the flow of prana energy into the finger. Within a few minutes the pain and bleeding stopped. The pain did not return and she did not need stitches or other treatments. It seems that recent injuries are easier to self-treat than systemic illnesses because your body has not yet identified the problem.

As I was thinking about which of the many other examples of self-healing I should write about, I happened to receive a letter from a friend. She wrote, “By the way, I am using pranayama healing these days. I slipped into dance class and injured my knee with a bump the size of a large fried egg. I energized it after class and within a few hours it is now just slightly pink, with almost no swelling and very minimal size. Hey, it works!”

Guidelines for self-healing sessions

Practice channeling energy into yourself regularly and often. Self-healing may require many sessions. So if you practice full body movements and running energy, it can be a good idea to give yourself strength. You can practice while watching TV or movies, or even reading a book. This can be a one-handed session unless you find a unique way to hold the book.
Identify any part of your body that you can comfortably reach and place your hands directly on the areas you cannot pinch. For example, it would be difficult to clamp your own heart between your hands, so place both hands over your heart.
If you are working on an inaccessible area, such as the middle of the back, you can use distance healing techniques as described in Chapter 12.
To make sessions as powerful as possible, pump the breath by exaggerating breathing techniques. If you lie down, you can do the breath of fire for much longer without feeling dizzy. This way you can change your vibration more profoundly and be more effective. People with certain heart conditions may not be able to do this safely. If you are unsure, ask your doctor.
This can be a good time to try combinations of techniques. You can use more than one technique at the same time. For example, you could use toning and the enhanced resonance technique described in Chapter 12 while working on yourself.
Be patient. Many people are happy to spend forty or sixty minutes working on a friend, but barely find five or ten minutes to work on themselves.

Chapter 11

Healing animals

“Monkeys are my favorite people.”

Working with animals can be a wonderful joy because their love is so available and their affection so generous. Our pets and other animals do not judge us based on our age, weight, breed or lifestyle. Furthermore, they have no prejudices against Western medicine – they simply respond to love.

Pranayama healing has worked wonderfully on all types of animals: dogs, cats, horses, mice, turtles and even rabbits. It doesn’t seem to make any difference. Everyone seems to like animal stories, so I’ll tell you a few.

When I came to Maine last year to teach a course, I stayed at Billie’s house. As she said, she had ten cats, all long-haired Maine Coons. In my conversations with Billie, I had learned that Julius (after whom a technique was named in Chapter 5), Billie’s favorite cat, had been very sick for a few months. She had taken the cat to the vet a few times, but the vet couldn’t help him or figure out what his problem was. As soon as I got to her house I saw cats everywhere, but off to the side was a cat whose fur was all shaggy and who looked like she had passed out on the arm of the couch. I knew immediately that I had found Julius

I put my bags down, went straight to him and introduced myself (in cat language that meant letting the cat sniff my hand). Julius appeared limp and weak, his fur was slightly damp and he hardly seemed to have the strength to lift his head. Within a minute or two, I began channeling energy into his stomach. I realized that I was dealing with what I call the “blocked energy pattern” described in Chapter 3. As I powered in for about five minutes, the vibration started to get just a little stronger. At this point I called Billie and Heather and asked them to help me. Heather and Billie are both experienced pranayama practitioners and group sessions are generally much easier and quicker.

The three of us expended energy for another ten minutes and Julius stood up to stretch and then jumped to the floor. I didn’t think much of the meeting at the time. A few minutes later I had found a cat toy that consisted of a stick with a string and a ball at the end of the string. As I dragged the ball across the floor, I was surrounded by a circle of cats politely waiting for the ball to get to them before they could give it a good hit.

When Julius watched the game, he did something Billie said she had never seen him do before. He started jumping about half a meter into the air, almost like a gazelle. He did this three or four times as if he was jumping towards the game. When he got there, he took full control and repeatedly jumped all over the circle to get to the ball. A few minutes later Billie opened her door and Julius was the first out.

Julius has had no health problems since that single session. When I returned about seven months later to teach another pranayama healing course, I had the opportunity to spend time with him again. He seemed to recognize me and was extremely affectionate. I decided to energize him to see what would happen this time. He just loved it and became more and more excited. This time he grabbed my hand and licked, bit and scratched me in a playful way that was starting to hurt a little. After a few seconds Julius looked at me and saw that I wasn’t enjoying this and immediately stopped biting. He got up and walked away.

An hour later, Billie told me that Julius had done something he had never done before – he had caught a bird. It seems that both sessions brought out the cat’s “inner tiger.” I’ve heard similar stories about cats wanting to go into hunting mode after a good pranayama healing session.

On another occasion, a friend had a dog (a Newfoundland) that had problems with his sacroiliac. The dog was unable to walk and had to be taken to a vet by ambulance. The vet said that in most cases like this the dog has to be put down. When I saw the dog, he was back home and couldn’t walk. After two sessions over two days, the dog was able to walk again without any problems.

You may remember in the first chapter how I energized a frightened young puppy and he responded by rolling onto his back and stretching out as far as he could. My friend Henri achieved very similar results with her turtle. He is a 20 cm long African sideneck and is extremely protective by nature. In the wilderness. Its habitat would be at the water’s edge, near overhanging ferns, or it burrows into tight spaces to escape predators. He avoids any kind of exposure and never basks in the sun. Henri writes: “When I let energy into him. I hold him on my lap. One hand grips its upper shell, the other lies underneath. Within seconds he closes his eyes. As I continue to run energy, he relaxes completely, stretches his neck forward and spreads his arms and legs. We can stay like this for minutes or hours.”

I’ll tell you another story to get you excited about sessions with animals. A friend asked me to do pranayama healing work on her horse. I’m not one of those people who spends time with horses, but I thought I would enjoy the new experience. One sunny afternoon I ran energy into the horse’s back and she said I would “put the horse to sleep.” “I hope you don’t mean it in the veterinary sense,” I told her. She said, “No, you’re putting the horse to sleep.” “How do you know?” I asked. “Just look at his eyes,” she replied. I looked into her horse’s eyes and saw them drooping and closing while her bottom lip drooped and trembled. A moment later the horse’s head drooped, like a person falling asleep while sitting. The horse was awake again and now laid his head on a metal railing next to the box. As I continued to energize the horse, his head slipped off the metal railing three more times.

Just like with my human patients, I never know what the energy will do. I just trust that something extraordinary will happen.

Working with animals

Be sure to directly energize or direct any area that you feel needs healing. A diagnosis from a veterinarian can help you pinpoint the problem.

Be sure to maintain your breathing techniques throughout the work because the trick is to keep breathing!

Since the animal cannot speak, pay close attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. This will help you know how long you should keep your hands in one place.

Realize that you won’t do it “wrong.” Energy finds its way where it needs to go and does what needs to be done.

Deliver a series of sessions if necessary. When you brush your pet’s hair, try to give him energy at the same time. This works with any type of petting motion, be it scratching behind the ears or rubbing the belly.

Try to energize them before or during bathing. For a special treat, you can also add energy to the bath water (see Chapter 15). This works especially well if baths aren’t on your pet’s wish list.

They can also put energy into their food and water, as well as your own food (see Chapter 15). Animals primarily eat canned food, which increases the energetic signature of their food.

I am sure you will be quite surprised and delighted with the results of your work.

Chapter 12: Distance Healing

Infinitely faster than the speed of light, our compassion and prayers move at the speed of love.

Be connected

I believe that we are all much more connected than the consensus would have us believe. On a personal level, the well-being of family and friends is often much more important to us than we admit to ourselves on a daily basis. A sudden loss can bring this point into focus. Although many people become indifferent or jaded by the blare of bad news in the media, sometimes the story of the loss of a child or a leader we never met touches us deeply. From an economic perspective, we see that problems on one continent can have a direct impact on all global markets. We only have one large ocean in the world and they all have the same water, air and soil. Our lives and our destiny are inextricably linked. What you may not know is that even the smallest particles are connected to each other in surprisingly profound ways.

Numerous books have been written about the strange and almost magical world of quantum physics. In Gary Zukav’s beautiful book The Dancing W Li Masters he writes:

Bell’s theorem is a mathematical construct that, as such, is indecipherable to the non-mathematician. However, its implications could have profound implications for our fundamental worldview. Some physicists are convinced that it is perhaps the single most important work in the history of physics. One of the implications of Bell’s theorem is that, at a deep and fundamental level, the “separate parts” of the universe are intimately and immediately connected… Let’s assume that we have what physicists call a two-particle system with zero spins. This means that the spin of each particle in the system cancels out the other. If one of the particles in such a system has a spin up, the other particle will have a spin down. If the first particle has a right-hand spin, the second particle has a left-hand spin. No matter how the particles are oriented, their spins are always equal and opposite.

Many quantum physicists have been angered by thinking about how paired photons moving away from each other at the speed of light can somehow react to each other instantaneously, infinitely faster than the speed of light.

When these two particles are sent in opposite directions, they are still connected to each other no matter how far apart they are. They could be thousands of light years apart, but when one of the particles passes through a magnetic device that changes its spin, say from top to bottom, the other particle, regardless of distance, instantly and spontaneously changes its spin from bottom to top . I believe that the effect of our love is similar.

I have often thought about our connection in an intellectual or spiritual sense, but the real meaning of physical connection to one another was brought home to me in a powerful and personal way when I met Dr. C. Norman Shealy, MD, Ph., attended. D. at his clinic in Springfield, Missouri. After demonstrating how pranayama healing affects posture and showing him how effective it is in treating some of his most difficult chronic pain patients, Dr. Shealy to investigate how pranayama healing could remotely affect brain wave patterns. This was something I had honestly never tried before. I wasn’t at all confident about the outcome.

Dr. Shealy asked an elderly gentleman to lie down for an hour to have his brain waves mapped. The man had not been told that I would attempt to conduct a distance healing session with him. When I use the word “distanced” I mean that there is no physical contact between the practitioner and the client. In this case I was only about 1.5 meters away. But based on my experience and that of others, it wouldn’t have mattered whether I was twelve miles away or twelve thousand miles away. We monitored the man’s brainwaves for thirty minutes and used that information as a baseline. At this point, one of Norm’s assistants tapped me on the shoulder as a signal to begin distance healing. For the next thirty minutes I ran the power, and when I was finished we monitored his brainwaves for another five minutes to see if stopping was affected.

Distance healing

The data above represents a baseline of brain wave activity after the subject had rested for thirty minutes. Five minutes after the distance healing began. Note the significant increase in delta activity.

After thirty minutes of distance healing, all brain wave activity has become profoundly silent.

The results surprised me very much. In the first five minutes after I started energy running, the man’s delta brainwave activity increased significantly. In the left and right front parts of his brain, delta waves increased from 11.7 and 12.6 to 23.2 and 23.3, respectively. Midbrain scores increased from 18.8 to 58.7 and occipital scores increased from 18.8 and 15.0 to 25.0 and 26.3. By the end of the session, his frontal delta scores had dropped to an astounding 3.6 and 4.4, his midbrain was at 5.1, and occipital scores were 8.2 and 10.4, respectively. Dr. Shealy told me that in thirty years of studying brain waves, he had never seen such a calm pattern. He added that if he hadn’t known better and had only seen the latest readings of brain activity, he might have thought the man was brain dead. I find this comment particularly interesting. comes from a former neurosurgeon.

In the weeks following this experience, I realized that the depth of the work had once again shocked me. Deep down, I didn’t believe my thoughts could have such a big impact, but they did. As I thought about what had happened, it occurred to me that distance healing work shows how connected we all are to one another and gave me another little taste of how powerful our love is.

When we touch someone during a session, we help change the vibration of the tissue in a very direct way. Because of the closeness of the practitioner to the client, I have come to call this “local healing.” In “non-local healing” the practitioner might be 2 to 3 meters away, or possibly on the moon, and the effect would be just as powerful because the field is created by thought.

One way remote healing differs from local healing is that the field created during remote work does not easily move the structure. This means that the bones do not adapt at the same time, as is the case with local healing. Since this is the case, it appears that distance healing work creates a different field than local healing. It occurred to me that by holding the distant field and the local field at the same time, we could establish a vibrational synergy, similar to two people working together. The results are very profound and gratifying.

When I teach my pranayama healing classes, I lead groups to perform distance healing on everyone in the room. The experience is very immediate and dramatic as almost everyone can feel the energy. Like everything else, distance healing work seems to have its strengths and limitations.

Here are just a few examples to give you a taste of how distance healing can work: One of my students named John had told me about his aunt who had a tumor. He was very worried about her. At seven o’clock sharp, John set off to send her some energy. He concentrated deeply, did the breathing techniques and continued for a full thirty minutes. Shortly after eight. He called her and started chatting about things: how is your husband, how are the kids, what’s going on? After about fifteen minutes, John asked her how she was doing, especially her tumor. Suddenly her voice became very excited and animated and said that it was the most amazing thing, exactly at seven o’clock she could feel “all this energy going into the tumor” and she told him that it felt like it was dream and become smaller. He asked her how long it had lasted and she said it had been exactly thirty minutes, but now it felt all warm and wonderful and she was excited about her potential to be healed. He said he didn’t want to tell her what he had done because he didn’t think she would understand. She could appreciate the love, but if not, the explanation was that one evening she was on the phone with my friend Lauri and told me that she was having a severe allergy attack and excruciating back pain. After training as a nurse, Lauri prepared to self-administer medication, but was hesitant because she knew the medication would “knock her out” for a few days, preventing her from working effectively. I invited her to come over and let me work on her, but she said it was too late and she didn’t feel well enough to drive. “Then let me do some distance healing,” I suggested. She insisted on taking her medication and I protested. We eventually negotiated that if she wasn’t feeling better after an hour, she would take her medication. I started using the electricity and after twenty-five minutes my phone rang. She called to say that not only were all of her allergy symptoms gone, but her back pain was gone too.

Distance healing

It is always a good idea to get permission for distance healing. If you don’t get permission for one reason or another, simply ask that the energy be used for the highest good and send it to the person. Sending the energy for the highest good is a great thing anyway.

Connect with the person being healed. Whether you are sending energy to a person, animal, or plant, you need to know who the energy is being sent to. If you don’t know the topic personally, it can be helpful to have a photo to help you focus and direct the energy.

Connect with your spirituality. This is useful for those who are prone to this. Asking for help can only improve the work.

Use a substitute object to help you concentrate. Admittedly, it requires more concentration to stay focused when performing distance healing. You can’t just keep your hands on the person and focus on your breathing; You still need to make sure the energy goes where you send it. For these reasons, many people like to hold an object such as a teddy bear, pillow, or blanket to give them a physical focal point. It is not necessary to use a replacement, but it is an option if you choose to do so.

Focus your attention on the area that needs the energy and imagine that it is between your hands. You can imagine and see that the exact place where you are sending the energy is right between your hands. Because you let your imagination run wild, you can work directly on organs or other tissue. The key here is not only to focus your attention on the place where you want to send the energy, but also to keep your attention there as you direct the energy

Use breathing and let the energy flow. As with all pranayama healing, the trick is to keep breathing, so keep breathing and let the energy flow powerfully from your hands

Combine different techniques. Distance healing can be a great opportunity to experiment and combine different techniques during the session.

Take your time. Distance healing sessions can last thirty, forty-five. or sixty minutes. This can require a lot of commitment from the practitioner.

Don’t be tied to the outcome. As with other pranayama healing works. It is important to keep in mind that you are simply holding a resonance and that you are responsible for the healing.

It’s so wonderful to realize that our love has an impact and can be felt by the people we want to give it to. Well, if I could use the expression. “Send her my love,” I suddenly realize, “Hey, I can do it myself!”

The amplified resonance technology

The enhanced resonance technique is a practical technique that also utilizes distance healing abilities, so I have included it in this chapter. This technique is extremely powerful and has become one of my favorite approaches to generating energy while running. AR technology, as we now call it, requires a high level of skill and concentration as you are doing two things at the same time.

Place your hands on the client as you normally would and begin letting the energy flow.
As you direct the energy from your hands, use your mind to “penetrate” the tissue to be treated. With each breath, keep your mind in the tissue you are working on and stay there while simultaneously channeling the energy from your hands.

When I say to use your mind to penetrate the tissue. I suggest that you focus your attention on the part of your body you are working on. You don’t need to have any particular idea of what’s going on in the tissue you’re working on; You just need to use your intention to keep your awareness there. If you want, you can imagine that the part of the body you are focusing on is illuminated by light. Another option is to imagine that you are bringing a ball of energy that is physically located in the area you are working on. The most important point is to focus your attention on this place. With your mind you channel the energy into your body, and while you maintain breathing, you also channel the energy out of your hands.

Chapter 13: Emotional Healing

Beneath the murky waters of unwanted and denied emotions lie the vast and hidden treasures of who we truly are.

Emotions and the healing process

Five of us gave Helen a group session. She was one of Dr.’s most difficult chronic pain patients. Norman Shealy, who had not responded to any traditional or alternative therapy. About twenty minutes into the session she became extremely distressed. When we asked her what was wrong, she said: “Feelings are coming up that I don’t want to feel, and I’m afraid that when I feel those feelings, they’re so dark.” I’m afraid I’ll never be well again will go.” It was August 1998 and I showed Dr. Shealy and his colleagues demonstrated how effective pranayama healing was in treating chronic pain patients. At that moment Helen received a pranayama healing session from me, Dr. Shealy and three of his associates. In the minutes that followed, her despair continued to increase, and Dr. Shealy talked to her while the rest of us continued to breathe.

In the kindest and most caring way, Dr. Shealy Helen to let you feel the emerging emotions. “No, no, no,” she protested, “if I allow myself to feel these feelings, I will be stuck in these feelings for the rest of my life.” After a few minutes of compassionate and gentle persuasion. Dr. Shealy helped her feel safe enough to let her feelings come out. Then she experienced a violent wave of crying that lasted about five minutes, and soon she began to feel wonderful. Another fifteen minutes into the session, she felt a whole new wave of sadness. Once again, she protested, if she allowed herself to experience the emotions, she would be stuck there forever. Dr. Shealy reassured her again that this was not the case and that she would be fine. She felt safer and then let the next wave of emotions flow through her. This wave of grief grew even stronger than before. After a few minutes of tears, joy filled the place where the pain had been.

At the end of the session, she reported that about 70 percent of her physical pain had been relieved. This was pain that had not responded to traditional or alternative therapy for ten years. When we asked her what she experienced emotionally, she said that she grieved because she knew that she would never have a baby in this life. Somehow they allowed themselves to fully feel the intensity of these feelings and much of their physical pain also subsided. Helen even said that she could now look forward to her future and accept herself as a creative and successful person who does not have to raise a child.

Emotions arising during pranayama healing sessions are not uncommon. I find it fascinating how the specific emotions that produce cathartic experiences consistently seem to be the emotions that have been repressed, repressed, or repressed. Often, the courageous act of allowing oneself to fully experience these emotions is exactly what is needed to alleviate or change physical discomfort. I am convinced that the greatest human blockage is our unwillingness to fully experience the intensity of our emotions.

For most people, expressing anger is particularly difficult and frightening. It is often not easy to express a variety of other emotions such as hurt. Humiliation. Shame. Fear. Fury. and hate. Unfortunately, the positive emotions are also suppressed. Many people will live painful lives full of shame and anger. and fear. and so avoid feeling anything truly uncanny, like the wondrous depth of their splendor.

If you shine light on a shadow, it disappears.

It is well beyond the scope of this book to deal with the main problems of emotional causality. Here are some approaches you can use in your pranayama healing sessions.

Guidelines for working with emotions that arise during a session

Trust the process. Admittedly, watching someone experience intense emotions can be distressing. The most important thing I’ve relied on over the years is to simply trust the process. I just let the energy flow until things settle naturally. The worst thing would be to get scared and cancel the session. It is best to gently reassure your client that it is okay to feel what he or she is feeling and to continue breathing and letting the energy flow.

Grounding: Maintain the sensations in your body as I described in Chapter 3. This will help you stay grounded and be able to help better. (Grounding is described in Chapter 4)

Remember, the trick is to keep breathing. So keep breathing and encourage your friend to breathe too. This can speed up the process and protect those people who tend to take on the other person’s symptoms or emotions, direct energy to the part of their body where they feel the emotions. This is a wonderful technique that can be effective in helping your friend find emotional balance and process feelings as they arise. Place the front and back area together so that it feels like your hands are encircling it. If they are sitting upright, you can ask them to lean forward while you support their weight. I know several psychotherapists who use this approach to help their patients center themselves and process their emotions more responsibly.

Channel energy into the chakras. Infusing energy into each chakra is a great way to balance emotions and can also help release the emotions. They can direct energy into each of their chakras, paying particular attention to the chakras closest to the part of their body where they feel the emotions most, while overlaying the chakra points in the front and back can work very well.

In most cases, touching people above their first and second chakras would be uncomfortable or embarrassing. An alternative to placing your hands on the perineum, which is located between the anus and genitals, is to touch a point about three finger-widths below the navel. This point reflects the first chakra. The other hand can touch the tailbone so that together they make good contact with the first chakra. The second chakra can be reached by placing the fingertips at the very top of the pubic bone. If this is too threatening for your friend or client, you can direct energy to the inside and outside of the heels. If you press lightly on the sides of your heels, you’ll likely find tender spots. These are great places to channel the energy.

Direct energy into the occipital spine. This can help break old thoughts and emotional patterns and can sometimes be helpful with addictions. Distance healing can be useful when treating psychotherapy patients is not therapeutic, contraindicated or physically impossible.

I think it’s important to remember that the goal of working with people’s emotions is not to heal their emotions, but to energetically help them let go of what needs to be let go, or release them naturally Way to find your emotional balance. Just as water seeks its level, the emotional body also seeks to find balance. It’s not your job to fix anyone, and given the opportunity, people will heal themselves naturally.

Chapter 14: Diet and Lifestyle Healing

If you have a hole in the bottom of your bucket, it doesn’t really matter how much water you put in it, otherwise it will all spill out.

Fix Me Doc

I’m not sure how this idea came about, but many people feel that they can treat their body with less respect than their car and still expect it to run well. Ultimately, all healing must occur within the cells for cellular health and the body to remain healthy. Every farmer or gardener knows that if you feed and care for a plant properly, it will be resistant to pests and diseases. Therefore, it is obvious that we too can be healthy if we treat our bodies well through diet and lifestyle habits.

Over the years I have seen many people come to me wanting me to “fix” them, as if it were a clock or a radio that could easily be fixed. If someone has not made an effort to maintain a good diet or a healthy lifestyle, my work, although it provides some relief, is often like pouring water into a leaky bucket. The sick person is the healer and must learn to take responsibility for their health. Hopefully this isn’t a new concept.

Since there are many good books on the subject of nutrition and healthy lifestyle habits, I won’t go into them in detail here. I want to summarize many areas that should be obvious and some others that may not be so obvious. Before I start, I would like to say that people are very different. What may be good for most people may not be good for you at all. Listen to your body and perhaps experiment to find what works best for you. Many people will find that they naturally prefer healthier diets and lifestyles, and the ideas presented in this chapter may be reminiscent of what you already know. I think the most important thing here is to recognize that good food or a healthy lifestyle is often part of a person’s self-love ritual. So play with these ideas and discover your love rituals that work for you.

Lifestyle habits you might consider

Find stretching and cardiovascular exercises that you enjoy and do them regularly. Moderate exercise is most beneficial. Practice relaxation for at least ten to fifteen minutes a day. Meditation can be helpful.

Focus your thoughts and feelings on what you love, your dreams, and your gratitude.

Expressing stored emotions honestly and releasing them in a self-actualizing way.

Do what you love, even if just for a few minutes a day, and engage in life.

Give up smoking, excessive alcohol consumption and dangerous drugs.

Nutritional suggestions

As I said, everyone is different and the following are just suggestions based on my experience and research. Find out what works for you and if you have any questions, please contact a competent specialist, alternative practitioner, chiropractor or acupuncturist.

Avoid caffeine. Caffeine disrupts blood sugar levels and sleep patterns, can demineralize the body and contribute to osteoporosis. It’s not as difficult as it sounds if you provide your body with good nutrition. Use decaffeinated coffee.

Cut back on sugar and finally eliminate anything that ends in “-ose”: glucose, sucrose, fructose, etc. This includes more than a few ounces of fruit juice, honey, molasses, corn dates, candy, chocolate, ice cream, pastries, cereal in Boxes … The average American eats about 150 pounds of sugar per year. Sweets are addictive, but you can often avoid sugar by consuming enough protein and remineralizing the body. This often improves a person’s mood and energy levels over time.

Avoid fried foods and hydrogenated fats such as margarine. These trans fatty acids wreak havoc on the body, accelerating the aging process and contributing to a variety of degenerative diseases. Avoid all foods cooked in oil such as potato chips, French fries, onion rings, stir-fries, etc.

Avoid food additives, preservatives and processed foods such as white flour and white rice.

Some people thrive as vegetarians, but many do not. The most common warning sign of a protein deficiency is a craving for sweets. For those who want to be vegetarian and crave sweets every day, you could try eating more soy, spirulina, and nuts. If this doesn’t work, try adding eggs, fish, or poultry to your diet.

Replenish the microminerals in your body by using plant-based colloidal minerals. Using these minerals often helps reduce or eliminate cravings for fried foods, sugar, caffeine, alcohol, and even tobacco.

Many people cannot tolerate wheat, cheese or milk; There may also be other foods that cause allergic reactions. If you have doubts, try this simple test. Take your pulse on an empty stomach and then eat a suspicious food. Check your pulse again after fifteen, thirty, and sixty minutes. If your heart rate has increased by ten percent or more, you are probably allergic to this food and may need to avoid it

Eat grains and starchy and leafy vegetables. About 25% of your diet should consist of meat, fish, eggs, nuts, seeds and milk.

Take nutritional supplements. These can include:

Vitamin A, 10,000 units per day
B complex
Vitamin C, 1000 mg with bioflavonoids once or twice daily
MCHA Calcium 1000-1500 mg per day as needed
Magnesium glycinate or taurate 500-750 mg per day
Zink 15-25 mg pro Tag
Copper 1.5-2.5 mg per day MSM Sulfur 50LI0UgaDay
Vitamin E. 400 to 1200 units per day
Selenium, 200 megabytes per day
Calcium deficiency syndromes

I became aware of this through the writings of Luke Bucci, Ph.D. Alan Pressman, DC, Ph.D., Herbert Goodman, MD, Ph.D., Jason Theodosakis, MD, and the infamous Joel Wallach, ND, DVM, discuss how many seemingly unrelated diseases can result from calcium deficiency caused by osteoporosis. I thought I would provide some insight into this topic as the majority of students who attend my workshops seem to suffer from one or more of the various forms of calcium deficiency. These include necks that sound like gravel, joints that crack or grind, numerous back and neck pains, and osteoarthritis or widow’s hunchback. The bad news is that these conditions can be very painful and debilitating. The good news is that they are often reversible.

The process works like this: To maintain health, the body needs a certain level of calcium in the blood. If it doesn’t get this calcium from food, it steals it from our bones and teeth. As bones weaken from the inside (osteoporosis and fractures), the body builds up hard tissue on the outside of the bones, making the bones thicker. This often leads to severe pain in people as they get older because the enlarged bones press on nerves. In areas where an injury has occurred, the now weakened bones become more vulnerable to further injury. The body compensates for this by storing protective tissue around the neck or back (widow’s hump, Legg-Perthes disease) and extra calcium in the joints (osteoarthritis).

In other cases, the stored calcium is called calcium deposits or bone spurs, depending on its shape and location. As the body removes bone from the jaw, gum recession and loose or lost teeth can occur. If there is also a magnesium deficiency, the calcium can build up in the blood vessels through a process of malignant calcification, which leads to hardening of the arteries and an increase in blood pressure. This problem is often wrongly attributed to cholesterol. When the bones in the head become thicker, they can put pressure on the nerves that go to the brain, causing Menière’s disease, tinnitus, or Bell’s palsy. Calcium deficiency can also cause insomnia, cramps, muscle twitching, lower back pain, sciatica, and may play a role in panic attacks and worsen PMS.

For various reasons, the calcium extracted from bones cannot be absorbed by the body as well as from other sources. The body compensates for this by consuming ever larger amounts of calcium. When people with severe osteoporosis are diagnosed by their doctors, they are likely to be told that they have elevated calcium levels. These people are often advised to follow a low-calcium diet and take calcium channel blockers. This may be a very bad idea for someone suffering from severe osteoporosis if they need more calcium, not less. Similar. When calcium levels in the blood are too high, kidney stones can form, and in many cases doctors have advised their patients to avoid calcium altogether. Fortunately, there are recent studies that show that the more calcium a person consumes, the less likely they are to get kidney stones.

The good news is that this process is usually reversible. Have you ever made soup from boiled bones? If you put the soup in the fridge, it will have a gelatinous consistency. Bones are about 30 percent gelatin, and it is the gelatin that holds the bones’ minerals in place. If you put a chicken bone in a jar filled with vinegar for a few weeks and then take it out, the acidity of the vinegar would strip the minerals from the bone and what would be left behind would be gelatin. This bone could then be tied into a knot.

By taking beef gelatin, chicken cartilage, or shark cartilage (which you can find at better health food stores), you can provide this missing ingredient so that the calcium supplements you take can rebuild your bones and cartilage. You can mix a tablespoon of gelatin or cartilage with a small amount of juice and drink it two to three times a day (it will take on the flavor of the juice). I recommend you take it with dietary enzymes to help break down the gelatin for digestion. Many of the best companies now produce MCHA calcium, and people who want to rebuild their bones can consume up to twice the daily recommended amount. (Please consult a knowledgeable healthcare professional.) MCHA appears to be the most absorbable form of calcium and often contains important cofactors such as boron, magnesium, B vitamins, vitamin D, zinc, copper and MSM sulfur. Taking calcium without gelatin is like baking a cake without milk or eggs – it just won’t work! The gelatin and cartilage are primarily collagen, about 10 percent glucosamine and 10 percent chondroitin sulfates. Taking additional glucosamine and chondroitins can be beneficial, but is not a replacement for gelatin or cartilage.

I can tell you based on my research, personal experiences, and those of my students that this program works. Unfortunately, I don’t know of any vegetarian alternative that contains collagen or does the job.

Whatever you do, be gentle with yourself. I realize that I have come a long way very quickly and that I am only scratching the surface on this topic. I believe you will find this information very helpful.

Chapter 16: The Future of Energy Healing

Energy is the actual substance behind the appearance of matter and forms.

– Dr. Randolph Stone

Introduce

I believe this is a good time to share a dream that I have had for over twenty years, and at this crucial time, perhaps that dream can take root and begin to manifest. Deep within myself, like a silent prayer, I carry a vision that is close to my heart. I imagine a future in which the life force is universally accepted as real – real in the same sense that we accept magnetism and gravity. While awareness of Ki, Chi and Prana is becoming increasingly popular in scientific circles. Life energy is still considered little more than myth or folklore.

So come to my thoughts, if you will, and consider what the world would be like if the consensus was that the life force was real. With new tools to measure or evaluate the effects of life force, he wants to put on new glasses to view the world. Every aspect of life could be judged by whether it increases or decreases vitality – and whole new choices could be made. To name just a few examples:

If life force is considered real, I envision a new branch of science called “life force science” being intensively studied at all reputable colleges and universities. Discoveries would be made with extraordinary speed. and the acceptance of the energy that distinguishes the living from the dead would finally be recognized. Understanding that consciousness affects matter through the function of the life force would have profound implications for the study of physics, chemistry, biology, medicine, and psychology

If you view the life force as real, I see healers working in every hospital, emergency room, and ambulance. Groups of healers would work on patients several times a day. DR.

Norman Shealy suggested that intensive care unit patients could receive group pranayama healing sessions around the clock. Healing sessions would be routinely conducted before, during and after surgery. By today’s standards of patient recovery, the cure would look like something out of science fiction. When insurance companies figure out how many billions of dollars they can save by paying for pranayama healing sessions, I believe this work will be realized.

I envision a day when every preschool child will learn to do healing work. Of course, when a child falls and gets injured, the other children rush in and do healing sessions. If a child is hyperactive and causes problems in class, instead of punishing the child, the teacher can ask the children which of them would like to give love to that child. When each child completes their training, they will be amazingly powerful and wonderful healers.

When the life force is embraced, I anticipate the day when people will engage in mutual healing sessions in a natural and casual way, whenever needed and wherever they happen to be – in line at the movie theater, at a bookstore, anywhere else Party, in a train station, wherever people are.

If Life Force is accepted, I expect all professional sports teams to travel with a team of experienced practitioners. There is no question that this work accelerates the healing of injuries.

I imagine that life healing work is widespread in both developed and third world countries.

Ultimately, I can imagine that this work will lead to breakthroughs that I cannot even imagine today.

Today scientists seem to be the modern priests, telling the world what is and what isn’t, and I believe that working with the double-blind scientific model can be of great value. Skeptical scientists are quick to point out that this “so-called energy” we like to talk about is not energy at all because it does not “work” on the physical plane. “Work” is a precise term that physicists use to describe how energy affects matter. Numerous experiments by Dr. Bernard degrees at McGill University in Montreal in the 1960s revealed that, among other things, healers could cause a slight but measurable reduction in the surface tension of water. Changing the hydrogen bonding of water and affecting surface tension is evidence of “work” on the physical plane.

More recently, Dr. Glen Rein, Ph.D. and director of the Quantum Biology Research Lab in Northport, New York, conducted similar experiments that showed that healers were able to make DNA samples tighter or looser depending on the intention of the practitioner. I believe it is only a matter of time before we can conclusively prove that what we call “energy” is actually energy, even from a physics perspective.

I believe that it is also necessary to prove that the life force is not a psychological phenomenon. To test this, we contact universities and tell them that we have a “placebo therapy” that produces disproportionately good results and we want to understand the “psychological mechanism.” A simple test could be developed for people who have just had their wisdom teeth extracted. One group received a real session with the hands placed lightly over the jaw. A second group would receive an identical session with an untrained practitioner, and a third group would receive no session at all. There are new types of drugs that can block the part of the brain that allows suggestion, placebo, or habituation to function. Some of the subjects would receive these medications. I believe that the result of these experiments would show that the healing was not based on a psychological mechanism. If the question then arises as to which mechanism could be responsible for the results, we can use the work of Dr. Bernard Degree or Dr. Glen Rein repeat and show that a physical force is involved.

If a phenomenon is not due to a psychological mechanism but is caused by an energy force, we are now discussing the creation of a new branch of science. I like to think of it as “life”

Force Science” as the name is universal and would encompass a variety of natural healing methods.

While this may seem completely self-evident to practitioners of energy work for political, religious, social and economic reasons, these findings remain a mystery to the culture at large. I can only imagine how wonderful it would feel to live in a world where life force is not only acknowledged, but also embraced and valued.

When life force is seen as real, we have a new lens through which to view the world. The way we grow food and what we eat is influenced by how we breathe and how this affects our life force. Education is measured by how creative and loving processes strengthen the child’s vitality. Medical practices vfdPreana Healing, the trick is to reduce planet to a small fraction of what we see today. I have seen families grow closer through their practice of healing one another. I foresee a day when the family of humanity can grow closer together through the innate and universal power of mutual love through the use of this healing energy.Pranayama Healing:

The trick is to keep breathing

Preface

The process is very similar to learning to ride a bike. Before you start, the idea of sitting upright on two skinny wheels probably seems pretty impossible. When you start to stay upright, it may seem like a miracle at first, but after a while it becomes completely natural and second nature. When you first observe the results of pranayama healing, the experience will often surprise you and be unforgettable. As with riding a bicycle, what initially seemed miraculous to us becomes natural over time.

Additionally, there is great joy and satisfaction in knowing that you can help others in their healing process. A little warning in advance: I believe that this joy is contagious.

Deepak Chopra wrote:
“To promote the healing response,
you have to overcome all the coarser levels of the body’s cells,
tissues, organs and systems,
and arrive at a connection between spirit and matter,
the point at which consciousness actually begins to make an impact.”I think that’s where consciousness starts to have an influence. Such a point where consciousness and matter intersect, that this connection exists at a quantum level (subatomic level) and that this extraordinary connection between mind and matter is accessible to us through our love and intention. By harnessing the innate power of our love, we can dynamically and positively activate the body’s healing process. From DNA to bones, every cell and system responds effortlessly to the healing vibration of your love. The following are some interesting things I would like you to know about Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing: Practitioners of all practical healing modalities who have studied Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing in Bali, Indonesia and throughout Southeast Asia told me that it significantly increased the power or effectiveness of their healing practice. Chiropractors consider it an advanced form of chiropractic. Physical therapists consider it a more effective form of physical therapy. Similar. Acupuncturists have told me that it is an advanced form of acupuncture. Reiki masters call it “Reiki empowerment” or “turbocharging Reiki.” Pranayama Healing: The energy of healing combines seamlessly with numerous other techniques to increase its effectiveness: massage, shiatsu, Jin Shin Do, acupressure, polarity, cranial-sacral, therapeutic touch, healing touch, and so on. Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal is a wonderful stand-alone therapy for people without prior training. This is perhaps the easiest healing technique to learn. Almost anyone can learn to do extraordinary healing work after two days of training. It is so simple that you can easily learn from this book. Children can usually learn this work almost immediately. Pranayama Healing: The energy for healing will empower people to relieve tremendous pain and suffering from friends and loved ones. It is truly one of the essential life skills that we should all know. On a purely selfish and personal level, I want to live in a world where healing is seen as real, where healing is widely practiced, and where the kind and generous good nature of humanity can be easily expressed. Because of these and numerous other heartfelt desires, I invite you to go on a wondrous journey of discovery with me – the discovery of pranayama healing: the energy for healing.

“It is not important that you know everything,

but only the important things.”

Miguel de Unamuno

Chapter 1 Discovery

A firmly anchored blessing

Café sessions

“My mother is in a lot of pain – can she please sit here?” asked a woman who appeared to be in her 60s. My friend and I stood up from the bench in the bookstore and invited the women to take our seats. The very old woman was hunched over and breathing very heavily as she sat down painfully and very slowly. I asked the daughter what her mother’s problem was. worried that she might need help. She told me that her mother was in a lot of pain. For about thirty seconds. I debated internally whether I should get involved in this matter or not, but the “healer” prevailed. I explained to the daughter that my job involves using a form of hands-on healing where I touch the painful area very lightly, and asked her mother if I would like to do that. She spoke to her mother in French, and the older woman said that was fine. In my typical fashion, I do it all over my office. I was often seen giving healing sessions at concerts, lectures, movies, golf courses, seminars, supermarkets, or wherever I happened to be. I call these “café sessions.” I asked the mother to point to the place where she was in pain. The daughter translated and a moment later I was kneeling with my hands on her mother’s aching lower back. She was breathing very heavily and her face was contorted in pain as I began to “run energy through my hands.” Within five minutes, the older woman’s face appeared peaceful. She turned to me and simply said, “Thank you, I’m feeling better now.” The two women stood up, smiled at me and left the bookstore without another word. I immediately sat back down on the bench and picked up the book, ready to pick up where we left off. To my surprise, my friend was visibly quite shaken by the experience. Although she and I had enjoyed a casual friendship for several years, she had somehow escaped my relentless encounter with people’s skepticism. “How can you just pick up the book after such an experience?” She demanded an explanation that healing was an everyday experience. Although these experiences were unexpected to me when I first practiced Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, over the years I had become accustomed to them and even learned to expect them!

Early confusions

Over the many years, events like the one mentioned above have become relatively commonplace for me, but I sometimes forget that for too many other people, such events can be quite confusing to their systems. To be honest, I had quite a bit of excitement myself when I first learned to do this kind of work.

Hero Gus

Gus is a yoga teacher who I met in 2015 during a Balinese healing yoga teacher training. And in fact he made up a number of stories that seemed completely unbelievable to me. He then asked one of the audience members to act as a volunteer. The friend who had invited me to class stepped forward. We took a few minutes as a group to examine my friend’s posture. He had never noticed before that his spine had a pronounced “S” curve: one shoulder was much higher than the other, one hip was higher, and so on. Gus just worked very matter-of-factly, touching one spot, then another. He clearly showed us how badly the occipital spine (at the base of the skull) was misaligned. He began to breathe deeply, lightly touching the base of her skull for just a few seconds. The ridge immediately appeared to be completely flat. He touched her hips, her shoulders and ran his hands down her back. Honestly, I couldn’t believe my eyes as I watched bones seem to fuse together. Within ten to fifteen minutes, her spine was almost straight and her hips and shoulders were properly aligned. To put it mildly, I was amazed! I immediately came to three important conclusions. The first conclusion was that Gus Wira possessed a rare and incredible gift. The second conclusion was that no one else would ever be able to learn this. The third conclusion was that I would never learn. At the end of the day I found that I could barely move the bone positions with a light touch. I was shocked. Luckily, I was wrong on all three counts. I soon became Gus’ friend and neighbor, and I often spend time at his house, watching him at work and trying to figure out how and why he was so much more powerful than the people he trained. For the next few years, I spent hours every day practicing directing the energy. Eventually, I became creative in my attempts to get the work done and was able to discover new ways to amplify energy and increase my strength. I got to the point where Gus liked my work.

Come on

I think the most excitement I felt in this healing work came about two years after I first learned the basic technique from Gus. I was in Denpasar demonstrating Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing to a group of about eight people. Ayu had volunteered to be the subject of my demonstration. She had severe osteoporosis and was stooped. She looked at the ground as she walked. I had her put on a button down shirt backwards so we could get a good look at her back. I was quite shocked when I saw her spine for the first time. Every vertebra was severely misaligned. One vertebra was deflected far to the left, the next one deeper was much further to the left and the one underneath was somehow massively pushed to the right. Some bones stuck out further than I ever thought possible. They looked like dinosaur bones. Other bones were badly dented. Looking at her back, it was easy to see why Ayu was hunched over when she walked. I began channeling energy into her spine. I worked on one vertebra at a time, spent a minute or two there, and then went to the next one and did the same thing. After about fifteen minutes, people in the group started commenting, “Does this look better, or is it just my imagination?” Another fifteen or twenty minutes later, I heard comments like, “I’m pretty sure it is now looks better.” It seemed that the bones were gradually finding a better aligned position. After the next fifteen minutes the comments were like, “Oh my God, it’s so much better!” After an hour and fifteen minutes we were all completely amazed, I could hardly believe my eyes. Every vertebra in Ayu’s spine was now in a straight line. The heavily pushed out vertebrae now seemed to be in a natural position, now they seemed to be pushed out inwards. Ayu stood up and suddenly she was much taller than me, whereas before we were face to face in her bent position. Ayu’s daughter came into the room and started crying when she saw her mother standing upright. Mother and daughter hugged each other and cried. The people in the room couldn’t stop talking about it and I was just as amazed as everyone else. The Swirls That Were Disgusting By the time I arrived at my friend’s house in Denpasar where I was staying, the day’s events had upset my beautiful and comfortable beliefs. I remember sitting on the floor with my cheek against the wall, thinking about what had just happened. Suddenly I heard a loud and very credible voice in my head saying, “THAT DIDN’T HAPPEN!” For a brief moment I believed it. Then I protested to myself, remembering how people had said that they thought their spine was starting to look better, the way the vertebrae moved until they were all aligned again. I remembered her standing up very straight and tall and crying gratefully with her daughter. “No,” I protested to myself, “it actually happened! That is real.”

The little Yorkshire Terrier

After letting the energy run for about a minute or two, I felt the shaking stop and the small muscles under my hands relax. Out of curiosity, I kept the power running. After a few more minutes, the dog did something unexpected: he stretched his front paws as far forward as possible and his back paws as far back as possible and lay completely relaxed. “Hey Lola, this is fun.” I thought. I continued to run energy into the dog, and then Lola suddenly rolled onto his back, front paws stretched forward, back paws back, and my hands on his stomach. This pet looked like it was having a pleasant day at the beach, stretched out and drinking in the sun. I had never seen a dog do something like that, and I had never heard of a dog doing something like that. At this point it was beginning to occur to me that some pretty remarkable things might happen during these sessions, and I wasn’t quite as distraught as I had been during my session with Ayu.

Gus’ gallbladder

Chapter 2

Resonance, life force and the principles of pranayama healing

resonance

There is a mystery and a miracle in the seemingly simple function of resonance. All people and particles dance to its power, from the galaxies to the subatomic. If a piano and a guitar were both in tune and a G was played on the piano, the G string on the guitar would also vibrate. Sound waves moving in the air transfer the acoustic energy from the piano to the guitar. Likewise, tuned oscillators, things that can oscillate at the same frequency, require very little work to transfer energy from one to another. In this example, the guitar’s string absorbs the piano’s energy waves because it is tuned to the same frequency. When similarly tuned oscillators are present, they form what is known as a resonant system. The strings of the guitar and piano vibrate together. If pendulum-type grandfather clocks were mounted on a wall and their pendulums oscillated out of phase with each other, their pendulums would lock in phase and strike together within a few days. In this case, the energy transferred through the common wall would be enough to bring the clocks into phase with each other. This is entrainment, a phenomenon that allows two similarly tuned systems to align their movement and energy so that they match in rhythm and phase. This phenomenon also occurs in the field of electronics. If you have similarly tuned resonant circuits that oscillate at similar frequencies, the slower circuit will increase to match the speed of the faster one. In both examples we can see how energy is transferred from one similarly tuned system to another. What can we learn from it? First, when two systems vibrate at different frequencies, there is a driving force called resonance that causes the two systems to transfer energy from one to the other. When two similarly tuned systems oscillate at different frequencies, another aspect of this energy transfer, called entrainment, causes them to align and oscillate at the same frequency. Entrainment is the process by which things adjust their movement and energy to match rhythm and phase. This also seems to work with biological systems. On warm nights in many parts of the world, fireflies gathering in a tree light up randomly. Soon everyone will be turning their lights on and off in a coordinated manner. I have often heard crickets or frogs all finding the same rhythm and coordinating their sounds. In these cases, nature finds it useful, or perhaps economical, to take individuals along rhythmically. Perhaps over time, through a more mysterious process, women who share a house or dorm room will find that their menstrual cycles also move rhythmically. Scientists have found that even disembodied animal hearts, when kept alive in a laboratory and placed close to each other, entrain – the individual hearts then begin to beat in unison. The process appears to be universal. Perhaps Itzhak Bentov was right in his fascinating 1977 book “Stalking the Wild Pendulum.” He explains, “We may think of disease as a disordered behavior of one or other of our body organs. When a strong harmonizing rhythm is applied to it, the interference pattern of waves that represents the organ can begin to beat in unison again.” He postulates that this theory may be the reason why energy healing works. I agree. When two things vibrate at different frequencies through resonance and entrainment, either the lower vibration rises, the higher vibration falls, or they meet in the middle. In “Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal,” practitioners learn to increase the vibration of their hands to a very high frequency through breathing and meditation techniques. When they bring their hands near another person in pain, the client’s body resonates like a similarly tuned circuit and is picked up by the practitioner’s hands. Love is the universal vibration that allows people to transmit healing energy from one to another. In his book “Loving Hands Are Healing Hands,” Bruce Berger writes: “Sympathetic resonance describes the tendency of two waveforms with the same degree of arc to resonate sympathetically together, energize each other, and communicate universally with one another.” Thus, waveforms of the same length and frequency become one another during of the entire creation carry and influence each other. This is key to understanding one of the dynamics that hold creation together and to understanding our theory of the body as the energy of sacred sound.” When working with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, the practitioner maintains the highest vibration possible, which is becomes the dominant frequency. The “healer” (also called the client or patient), the person whose body is healing, will simply adapt and align with the vibration of the practitioner. A spiritual teacher named Lazaris said, “The definition of a great healer is someone who was very sick and quickly recovered.” In my opinion, anyone who claims to be able to heal others is either ignorant, false, arrogant, or delusional . They simply provide the resonance energy that allows others to heal themselves. The practitioner simply has an enormously strong harmonizing energy and the clients adapt to this vibration. The innate body intelligence of the person receiving the energy will do whatever the body deems useful to bring about healing. The body heals itself with an unimaginable level of intelligence. Western civilization often takes for granted the body’s innate healing ability, but it is the true healer. When we look at the cells in our body, we see that we have hundreds of billions of cells that are constantly feeding themselves with oxygen and the food we eat, releasing carbon dioxide and other waste products. These cells are also busy reproducing and healing themselves, with thousands of microscopic changes taking place every minute of every day! It’s a good thing I don’t have to keep track of all this activity, because I’m already having a hard time keeping myself to remember where I left my keys. Without the breathing and meditation techniques learned in Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing, a practitioner can become immersed in the client’s vibration and become drained by the experience. This is not the case with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal as long as we use the techniques to maintain a naturally high resonance. Perhaps one day healers will be known as resonant doctors.

vitality

“No, I have no idea what water is,” said the fish.

“Why do you ask?”

Principles

Love is a universal vibration; Love communicates with all species, functions on all levels, and expresses our true nature. It is the basis of all healing and the essence of life force.

Energy follows thought. The practitioner uses intention and various meditations to create a high-energy field and uses this field to surround the area to be healed.

Resonance and participation cause the area to be healed to adapt its vibration to that of the practitioner. The practitioner simply raises the new resonance and holds it.

The energy follows the body’s natural intelligence to bring about the necessary healing. The practitioner pays attention to the “body intelligence” and “chases the pain.”

The practitioner also experiences healing through the work. Breathing increases your life force.

Each person’s gifts in life and healing are unique. Some people are particularly skilled at treating specific illnesses.

Healing can be done remotely and can be very effective. Pranayama healing can be easily and effectively combined with other healing methods.

Chapter 3

healing Hands

“I believe that the best medicine is the gentlest treatment that produces the maximum healing response.” – Andrew Weil, MD

Healing and chopsticks

To be a “healer.”

Some would have us believe that becoming a naturopath requires many years of hard work and discipline. They would have us believe that only the most brilliant, gifted and educated among us could ever hope to achieve such a title. If the truth is told, children, seniors, and everyone in between can learn to become health practitioners. I would even say that doctors and people with postgraduate degrees can learn this healing work. There were many celebrated “healers” whose talents were well documented and recognized as genuine. However, most of them had no explanation for what they were doing or how it happened. The importance of pranayama healing is that we now have a cognitive explanation of how to stimulate the healing process and a proven method for teaching others how to do this successfully. Since the true healer is the person receiving the energy, the practitioner merely acts as a catalyst that allows the healer to heal themselves. and to access and utilize a higher vibrational field of energy. During this process the truth about healing is as follows:

Healing is real. Becoming a highly effective health practitioner is one of the easiest skills to learn.

Healing is a great joy. Anyone with a strong desire can learn this.

From now on you can learn to be an exceptional naturopath!

It starts with love

Healing work is all about love, and the practitioner learns to hold a vibrational field of that love. To clarify my terms, when I say “love,” I do not mean in the traditional sense the kind of love that a mother feels for a child, a husband for his wife, or a winged cherub with a bow and arrow. I’m talking about a more fundamental form of love – one that is more innate and intrinsic. Have you ever watched children play? They always seem to say, “Watch me!” No matter whether you are from the child’s culture or another culture, whether you speak the language or not, if you sit there and just watch the child, he will feel loved. The very attention you give to a child is automatically experienced as an act of love. This is not what I call cultured or non-associative love because it has nothing to do with your background, race, religion, politics, or any other beliefs you may hold. In Pranayama Healing: The energy for healing is about being present, which is an expression of your essence. I believe that your nature and being are made of the stuff of love. Whether you believe it’s there or not (in my opinion) is irrelevant. This love is the essential nature of your being, flowing through your hands regardless of your mood. Your basic, instinctive and most fundamental energy is that of love. You don’t have to work at it – it’s who you are. Just as a stone doesn’t have to try to be more “stone-like” and water doesn’t have to try to be wetter, we don’t have to try to have more essence of love. We can. However, make an effort to acknowledge how much love there is. The intention is so automatic that most people simply miss it. If you simply walk across the room, you have already created the intention to do so. You see, love and intention are some of the most natural qualities we have. So do not worry. If you are reading this book to learn how to heal, you already have enough love and intention to do a wonderful job.

Basic energy exercises

Exercise 1: Feel your finger

Hold a finger in the air and spend at least two minutes feeling as much sensation as possible in your finger. Tune into the sensation in your finger and focus on intensifying your awareness. 2. Feel the skin wrap around your finger. Try to feel the blood as it flows through your finger. Use your imagination and try to feel how your fingernail sits on your finger. Try to feel the sensation under your fingernail. The key is to use your focused attention to fully feel your finger. The basic assumption is that energy follows thought. Wherever you place your attention, energy follows you. By increasing the sensations in your finger by moving and holding the energy there, you also cause physiological changes. These sensations may seem like ordinary feelings in your body, but as you will see, you are feeling life energy. Most people will say that they feel a tingling sensation in their fingers. Some people describe the feeling as vibrating, buzzing, fizzy, or hot. Because everyone experiences things differently. People probably use different words. Some people describe the energy as heat, throbbing, thickness, heaviness or simply as a heightened awareness of the finger itself. Feeling life energy is no stranger to us. Rather, the life force is an energy that we have always felt but that we simply have not learned to recognize. If you are alive, and since you are reading this I assume you are, you feel it every minute of every day.

Exercise 2: Feel your body parts

Take off your shoes and then, while sitting or lying down, have your friend stroke them gently upwards, from your feet to your ankles, for a few seconds. The touch should cover as much surface area as possible on the feet and ankles in a gentle, stroking motion for only about two to five seconds. After this upward movement, your friend should let go and not touch you. The purpose of this exercise is to help you feel as much sensation as possible in your feet and ankles. Ideally, you should feel your feet with the same intensity that you previously felt in your finger. A friend’s touch is helpful in focusing your attention. Letting go is also an essential part of the exercise because it allows you to feel the sensations in your body without being touched. If not. If you can’t create feeling in your feet, ask your friend to stroke them again. If you still don’t feel anything, ask your friend to move on to the next step.
When you are ready and feel these sensations well, ask your friend to place her hands on the area just above the ankles for a few seconds and move them up toward your shins, then release them. Continue to the rest of the body, stroking the shins, knees, thighs, hips, lower pelvis, stomach, chest, neck and up to the head. Then go down from the head to the shoulders, arms and hands. This toe-to-head stroking pattern is useful for stimulating directed energy flow when allowing the energy to flow through your body and when conducting a healing session. We’ll do the back of the body later.
You are done when you feel the prana energy throughout your body.

Change locations with your friend and use the same techniques to give them the same experiences.

If you are doing this alone, touch your own feet and stroke upwards for about two to five seconds and then release. Feel as many sensations as possible and repeat the upward motion as many times as necessary. Because another person’s touch is less predictable than your own, you may need to pay a little more attention and concentration when working alone. Continue stroking up the body to the head, then down the shoulders and arms, ending with the hands.

What to do if you don’t feel any body sensation anywhere?

I have found that one to two percent of the people I teach are kinesthetically impaired. This means they have a hard time feeling any sensations in their body. I have found that these people can still learn this, but it requires more effort and concentration than someone who has access to full-body sensations. If you find that you cannot feel the sensations of others, try focusing your attention on the parts of the body that are being caressed. Punctual. Sensation will awaken. Admittedly it’s not easy, but with a little practice it can be done. I have found that most people will be able to create feelings. You can still do the healing work but may also require more concentration.

Exercise 3: Long Sweeps

We follow the same pattern of gentle, sweeping movements as in the last exercise. However, this time have your friend make longer movements, about 50 centimeters long. Again, the touch is light (your friend won’t heal here) and the touch lasts two to five seconds. Have your friend perform a sweeping touch from feet to knees. Use your attention and intention to focus your senses on that area, then invite your friend to either repeat the movement or continue.

The purpose of touching in longer movements is to move energy through your body more fluidly and consciously. We create a gentle wave of prana energy in our body. After your friend lets go, feel the sensations in your body as strongly as possible. The goal is to get these areas of your body to tingle, vibrate, buzz, or heat up like you did in the first exercise. If you don’t feel any sensation or would like to repeat the touch, ask your friend to touch you again. Be sure to wait until you are ready before moving on to the next position. When a friend completes the process, they can swap places after you and repeat the process.

If you are doing this alone, lightly stroke yourself from your feet to your knees for a few seconds, pausing to feel the sensations. Feel as many sensations as possible. Repeat the blow if you feel no sensation. Gradually work your way up to your head, then down over your shoulders and into your hands.

Restricted areas

If you are having difficulty feeling a certain area, you can ask your friend to touch that place again to make it easier for you to feel it. If you can’t get the feeling into the area after three tries, don’t worry about it and move on to the next area. At this point, that area of your body will “wake up” and be able to feel the energy. In most cases, people learn to wake up difficult areas within hours or perhaps weeks. In rare cases this can take a year or longer. Note that this will not have a significant impact on your power or effectiveness in performing great Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal.

Exercise 4: Full body movements on the front and back

A big punch forward

A big swing backwards

Energy Exercise 5: Full body exercise using your mind

Summary of basic energy exercises

Now that you’ve completed the initial prana energy exercises, let’s take a look at what happened here. You have learned to focus attention and sensations on every part of your body. If there are still places where you cannot direct sensation with your focused attention, keep practicing and they will open up for you. It is not necessary for every area to be open and “tingly” to do great healing work. Do your best and you will continue to improve. Once you have done these exercises, you will most likely have reached the point where you no longer need to touch anyone to awaken the process within you. You will be able to bring these sensations into your awareness yourself. You can practice pranic energy almost anytime, anywhere. For example: While standing in line at a bank or grocery store, while talking on the phone, at a boring business meeting, or while watching TV or a movie. Because the experience is so pleasant, I recommend that you practice this exercise often. As you continue to practice this exercise, you will find that you can control the energy significantly more. Repeat these exercises as needed and learn to bring the energy more intensely into each area of your body and channel it into your hands.

Basic breathing techniques

Pranayama Healing: The trick is to keep breathing

The 2-6 breath

This is a very powerful breathing technique to increase energy during your pranayama healing sessions. The name says it all: two bars for inhalation and six bars for exhalation.

The 1-4 breath

If you feel dizzy, hold back.

Fire breathing, followed by 2-6 or 1-4

This is the most powerful breathing exercise to increase energy and can be done up to once per minute. Excessive use of this breath can cause fainting. Avoid using this technique if you feel weak.

Circular breathing

Connect the energy with your breathing

While sitting or standing, mentally perform a full-body swing (see p. 36). The key is to feel as many sensations as possible throughout your entire body. After practicing the previous exercises, most people are now able to use the power of their intention well enough to create sensation in much or all of their body. Place your hands flat together or gently close them to form “loose fists.” Do two or three full-body movements and feel the energy gathering in your hands. Once you feel the sensations in your hands increasing, it’s time to coordinate them with breathing.

Start with a 2-6 breathing pattern. Take a deep breath to the count of two, exhale fully to the count of six, and place all your attention on your hands. Feel the energy building as you exhale. Do this for a few minutes while coordinating the exhalation with the sensation. When doing these exercises, always work to increase the sensation of exhaling. Don’t worry about the energy building up in your hands as you inhale. Focus on the six cycles of exhalation. If you do this correctly, you will feel an increase in sensation in your hands.

With your hands still gently cupped or cupped, begin the 1-4 breathing pattern. Notice how the sensations in your hands change as you do this. Work on feeling the sensations increase as you exhale. This simply requires that you hold your attention in your hands and have the intention to heighten the sensations. Developing the ability to heighten sensations and link them to the breath is one of the most important skills in pranayama healing. If you do this correctly, you should notice that the feeling in the hands increases as the pace of breathing changes. As long as you don’t get dizzy or fall over, the more air you move, the more vitality increases.

Start with the fire breathing technique. Again, your hands should be gently cupped or cupped as you breathe. When you’re done quickly inhaling and exhaling, take a deep breath and move into a 1-4 or 2-6 breathing pattern. Now notice how the sensations in your hands have changed. If you feel an increase in sensations as you exhale, you are doing a great job and are ready for the next step. The next step is to conduct a healing session.

Breathing exercise to connect the upper chakras

Putting everything together

Your first healing session

Find someone you know who is in pain. Ask your friend how much pain or discomfort he or she is feeling. Have your friends rate their discomfort on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 being the worst. It’s amazing how often people forget how bad the pain was after it’s gone.

Ask your friend where he is hurt. The most important thing is that you don’t make assumptions about where the pain is located. If you ask someone where they are injured and they say their left shoulder hurts, you still need to ask them what part of the shoulder hurts. Unless you are truly psychic, your assumptions on this matter are often wrong. The best way to find out exactly where your friend is hurting is to ask him and point it out to him or place your hands in the right place for you. This is what I now call the “Where does it hurt?” technique.

Make sure to place your hands either directly above or on either side of the areas where your friend is experiencing pain. By “sandwiching” the area of pain between your hands, you are actually creating a strong resonant field that allows the tissue to change vibration and heal itself. +. When working on a problem with a person’s back or neck, place one hand on each side of the vertebrae of the spine.

Experiment with breathing techniques, paying close attention to the sensations in your hands as you exhale. Make sure you breathe deeply throughout the work. If you feel a little dizzy, you should take a break.

Make sure your hands are relaxed as energy flows faster from loose and open hands. Always remember to use both hands during a session. This helps you create a better field into or through the tissue. As you work, pay close attention to how the sensations in your hands change.

Understand the sensations you feel in your hands

The five basic patterns of energy

There are five primary energy patterns that you are likely to feel in your hands during pranayama healing work:

The Blocked Pattern – At first you feel very little in your hands, and then the sensations gradually increase and reach a peak. Very blocked areas are often areas of chronic problems, diseased organs, or sometimes acute pain (but not often). If you’re working on an area that has a lot of blockage, you’ll probably feel very little in your hands. In most cases, however, you will notice that the energy builds slowly and surely the longer you hold your hands there. This may take some time. You can keep your hands in one position for ten, twenty, forty minutes or even an hour. Over time. The energy in your hands will gradually feel stronger and stronger until it appears to reach a peak in intensity. Sometimes the feeling of energy stays at this peak level for a long time and suddenly reaches a plateau of even greater intensity. More often, the energy begins to level off at some point and can then subside slightly.

The General Pattern – You feel a moderate sensation in your hands that builds to a peak and then decreases. This is the pattern you will probably encounter most often. Sometimes the feeling of energy you feel increases to a very high level and seems to plateau. At this point it’s often a good idea to use some fire breathing to see if you can take it to an even higher level. As you work to direct the energy and increase its intensity, you will eventually notice that it levels off or decreases. In this case, it may be time to move your hands elsewhere.

The Intense Pattern – You feel a very strong energy in your hands that subsides over time. This pattern is most often felt when working with acute symptoms or in a person whose body, for whatever reason, is very receptive to the energy. It looks like this: Being aware of the sensations in your hands and the patterns that energy work usually follows will help you determine how long you should hold your hands in a particular position. You can also just ask your friend how he is doing. If all the pain is gone or has subsided significantly, that’s usually a good sign that the job is done for now.

The Complete Pattern: When you run the energy, sometimes everything seems to be working well, and at some point during the session you may notice that you don’t feel anything in your hands. When you pull your hands away, your hands will feel a strong tingling sensation. This is an indication of the full pattern. The entire pattern occurs when the person has absorbed as much energy as their body wants to absorb. At this point, you no longer have any sensation in your hands when you touch the person. When you come back in ten or twenty minutes, your body may be able to respond to a higher vibration and “absorb” more energy.

The Step Pattern When you have pranic energy, you sometimes feel like the intensity has reached its peak. At this point if you do some fire breathing. You may notice that your hands are now vibrating at an even higher frequency. Just when you think the energy has reached its peak and will no longer rise, practicing the breath of fire again can cause the energy to rise again and again, like climbing stairs. At some point the energy really levels out, subsides, or the feeling leaves your hands, and you know you’re done.

Chapter 4

frequently asked Questions

“Life is not a problem to be solved, but a mystery to be experienced.”

Frank Herbert

Practice pranayama healing techniques

Do you get stronger through practice?

What if I don’t practice for a long time? Will I lose my ability?

Should you expend energy when you’re alone?

Is it important for the person receiving the pranayama healing session or the practitioner to believe that it will help it work?

Pranayama Healing and Personal Energy

Do you use up your energy when you do pranayama healing?

No. We use the power of our love and the power of our intention. From experience I would say: the more of this energy you use, the more you have. You just can’t get over it. When you love someone very much, you don’t walk around all day exhausted and miserable, lamenting, “Poor me, I used up all my love for this day.” I have nothing left to give.” At least let’s hope you do do not do. When you love a lot, you feel like you can give a lot more love, often in all directions. Everyone around you can become a beneficiary of your love – from friends you meet to strangers on the street. Quite simply: the more love you feel, the more you have to give. It’s similar with intention: the more you harness the power of your intention, the more intention you have at your disposal.

Do you sometimes feel exhausted when attending pranayama healing sessions? No, you don’t get drained at all. As I have mentioned several times, breathing techniques are an essential part of the work. As long as you maintain breathing, you can maintain a very high resonance. The other person simply and automatically begins to match your vibration. You don’t give away your energy, you hold a field and let the other person come and adapt to that field so that you don’t become exhausted in pranayama healing. If anything, the opposite is true: the work appears to make the practitioner feel more healed and uplifted. Personally, doing healing work for hours makes me very hungry, and that is a symptom that can be easily corrected. Some practitioners have complained that late-night sessions left them feeling so energized that they had trouble sleeping. This seems to happen to a small percentage of people who use pranayama healing, so I would recommend that they do their sessions earlier in the day. Occasionally someone doing a session will feel tired afterwards, but this seems to be a response to having experienced healing during the work itself. Remember: When you give a session, you raise your vibration, which leads to healing within you. Sometimes you may need to sleep afterwards. However, this has nothing to do with energy being drained. I find that during pranayama healing sessions I often feel more alert after the session than when I started. Why this? If you let the energy run and do breathing exercises, you will also benefit from the energy. There were several times when I felt tired when I wanted to give a lecture with demonstrations. As I give the short demonstration sessions to the audience, I always find myself becoming more alert and energized. After completing 20 or 30 demonstration healing sessions as part of the lecture, I am quite energized and awake. The longer you let the energy run, the stronger you seem to become both physically and energetically.

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning?

I find rather the opposite. The longer you run energy, the stronger you seem to become. For large talks where I may be energizing dozens of people for two hours or more, the later sessions I give are far more robust than the earlier ones. Sometimes the energy becomes so strong that people actually feel a small jolt as a massive wave of energy rushes through them the second they are touched. I may be physically tired from lecturing for two hours and doing so many healing sessions, but the energy hasn’t diminished at all. If anything, it is greatly increased.

Preparing for a pranayama healing session

What do I need to do to prepare for a session?

If you want to prepare in advance, it can be helpful to perform gentle body movements and see how intensely you can feel the energy throughout your body. While doing these exercises, it is also helpful to use breathing techniques to increase your energy.

Most practitioners believe that simply holding a session cannot achieve these things either. Is it important that I be grounded before a meeting?

For those unfamiliar with the term “grounding,” it refers to the practice of centering our energies and often connecting to the earth. This way, people feel more balanced and less prone to absorbing unwanted energy. I don’t find it necessary to ground myself as long as I perform full body movements and maintain breathing. Some people find grounding exercises helpful because work may make them feel a little lightheaded. Other people find that the process of energy flow itself automatically grounds them.

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning?

Using your hands in a pranayama healing session

How much pressure do you put on your hands when you run energy?

You don’t need any pressure at all. A light touch works best. I tell my students this and five minutes later, as I walk around the room and touch their hands, I notice that many of them have significant tension in their hands and fingers. At this point I grab their hand and shake it a little to help them feel like they can release the tension. Many people get used to the use of force in massage, acupressure, shiatsu, Rolfing, deep tissue work, etc. The great irony is that you are better able to relax and release the tension in the muscles when you apply no or very little pressure. The secret is to use energy instead of brute force.

Why is it important to surround the areas you are working on with your hands? Why not just use one hand?

Having two points of contact creates a stronger vibrational field between you and the person you are working on. Pinching a painful area between your hands is an excellent way to increase tissue resonance. As I describe in the section on group sessions in Chapter 5, four hands or even six hands can quickly become the dominant resonance. I strongly recommend that you always use both hands whenever possible. Additionally, I suggest that you place your hands on either side of the problem area to pinch it between your hands.

I’ve noticed that sometimes when you demonstrate pranayama healing you use your palms, but other times you use your thumbs or fingertips. Why are you doing this?

If I want to focus the energy on a small area like the TMJ point or on the sides of the vertebrae, I use my fingertips to concentrate the energy. This is a technique that Bob Rasmusson invented and called the “tripod.” Simply touch your thumb, index finger and middle finger together and direct the energy from your fingertips. Concentrating power in this way allows you to work more effectively when working in very small places. For most of the time it is recommended to use the palms of your hands. If you find it physically awkward or uncomfortable to use your palms during a session, use your fingertips or a tripod. Don’t let the rules I give you prevent you from placing your hands on someone who is doing the healing work. Above all, be comfortable when practicing pranayama healing. I have no feeling in my hands or any part of my body – what should I do? I have found in my courses that a small percentage of people have difficulty feeling sensations. This makes it a little more difficult to learn pranayama healing, but with time and persistence these people have learned to manage their energy quite well. Some of the best healers I know initially had difficulty feeling any part of their body.

The first question to ask yourself is whether you feel a sensation anywhere in your body that you can feel without touching it. Can you think of any part of your body without touching yourself?

If you can feel your hands, feet, face, or any other part of your body by placing your attention there, then you have a starting point and can build from there.

The power of focused energy

How important is it to be focused during sessions?

To increase the power of your sessions, focusing 100 percent on running can make a big difference. This requires a lot of effort on the part of the practitioner. When I say “effort” I mean focusing on directing the energy, focusing on the breath, and consistently connecting the energy to your breath. Those who have developed great skill with energy often talk about being completely devoted to the process. If I focus 100 percent on directing the energy, does that mean I should never talk during a session? Not necessarily. I highly recommend that you focus on having fun during the pranayama healing sessions. The work is about love, joy, gratitude and wonder, not rigidity or excessive seriousness. If you drive your car onto a highway and need to accelerate, you may need a lot of gas to get the car up to speed. Once the speed is reached, you can accelerate and drive off. Likewise, when running with energy, getting the vibration to a “high pitch” can take a lot of work. Once you have done this, you can maintain the breathing and let the energy continue to work.

The client’s experience of a pranayama healing session

How long does it take for people to know something is happening when they receive a session?

What do people usually feel when they receive a pranayama healing session?

People are all unique and will feel the energy in their fashion. Some people will not feel the power at all, many will experience the energy as a hot, cold or tingling sensation. It is important to understand that any sensations a person feels while working – from the slightest to the most intense – are excellent signals that the session is working. The most common feeling people experience is that of heat. The heat can range from mild and slightly warming to burning and painful. If a light touch is capable of causing physical pain, however unpleasant it may be for the client in the short term, this is a very positive sign that you are making excellent progress in healing. I remember a student working on me during a class. Not only did it feel hot on my lower back where he was working, it also felt pretty sunburned.

Is it the temperature of your hand that people respond to when they say they experience hot or cold sensations?

Is it ever painful to receive the energy?

Yes, occasionally it is like that. Sometimes people experience a painful reaction when they receive energy. This pain usually doesn’t last very long. I don’t like seeing people in pain, but I’m always happy when something like this happens as it’s always a strong sign that significant healing is taking place. The key here is to continue the session at least until the pain goes away. A few years ago, my friend Dan asked me if I would work on his 13-year-old son who had broken his knee and was still limping after the cast was removed. As I began to direct energy into his knee, he protested, “Ouch, you’re hurting me. “It feels like my knee is killing me.” I told him to take a deep breath and that the sensations wouldn’t last long. About two minutes later he protests: “Now my knee is burning. What are you doing to me?” I explained that this was all part of the healing process. A few more minutes went by and he said that his knee was now feeling a “tingle” and two minutes later he said that his knee was completely fine warm and wonderful to the touch. After about twelve minutes his knee was fine and he was no longer limping. Do you ever get any indication of other places that need healing energy other than the places that are particularly painful? do. The first way involves using anatomical knowledge and logic. You can find advice on this in various chapters of this book. The second way is to let the body tell you exactly where the energy is needed Way much more profound. When you apply energy to one area over a long period of time, the person’s body will often prioritize the use of the energy as it sees fit. As with any healing, the entire process is completely automatic. The only logic and reason for this is the magnificence of the body’s innate intelligence. For example, if you have been working on someone’s lower back pain, that person may tell you that they are now feeling a sensation or even pain somewhere else, perhaps higher up in the back or possibly in their neck, knees or wherever. I like to ask clients to tell me if they feel the energy going somewhere other than where I work. Because their body intelligence directs life force to specific areas of their body, the person receiving the session will likely experience corresponding sensations that they can report. If someone tells you that they feel energy flowing into another part of their body, I suggest you keep that in mind. Once you are done directing energy into the area you are working on, simply bring your hands to the area that is now feeling the new feeling or pain and work that area as well. This is what I call “chasing the pain.” In many cases, you simply chase the pain from one place to another until it goes away. I once demonstrated pranayama healing to an acupuncturist who had several urns on the back of her hand. As I ran the energy into her hand, I asked her to describe what she was feeling. She told me that all the energy went into her elbows. When I asked why her elbow needed energy, she explained that she had broken it two years ago and that it had never healed properly. At this point I stopped working on her hand and started working on her elbow. The energy flowed into her elbow for about five minutes. When the energy changed and became less intense, I asked her how her elbows felt. She was amazed that all the pain and discomfort in her elbow was gone. It is common for beginners to find that when working on a lower back condition, the client will report feeling a surge of energy in their neck at some point in the session. Because the neck and lower back reflect each other, the body says it’s important to work on both areas. Also, when treating a repetitive strain injury to the wrist, people often report energy flowing to the elbow, shoulder, neck, head, or back. These points are most likely involved in the disease and become apparent through this process of secondary sensations.

Does the energy heal conditions other than what you think you are working on?

That happens often. Because the energy goes where it wants, all sorts of surprising healings occur. The most common are people with headaches who find that their sinus pain has also disappeared. It also works the other way around. People who complain of sinus pain often report that their headaches are gone. Once during one of my classes, two students were treating a woman who had severe sinus pain. When the session ended, the woman said she still had sore sinuses. I explained that it wasn’t a perfect system and that it should be given time. The next day she called me and told me her sinuses were still hurting. I told her that this happens occasionally. She continued that her vision, which had always been 20/200 in her right eye, had suddenly changed and was now 20/25, but her sinuses still hurt! She was overjoyed. By the way, her vision did not stabilize at 20/25 but has fluctuated ever since. As she continues to pour energy into her eyes, the situation gradually improves.

If the energy goes automatically to the places where it is needed, why is it important to try to put your hands directly on the most problematic parts of the body?

If you had unlimited time, it honestly wouldn’t matter. Given the time constraints, it’s simply much quicker and more efficient to get to the specific locations that need healing. You could fill the pool by connecting a hose to your yard, but it would be much easier to plug the hose directly into the pool.

Pranayama Healing and the Emotions

How does Pranayama Healing affect the emotions of the person I am working on?

Ending a pranayama healing session

Do the sensations in your hands change when the session ends?

How do you determine how many sessions a person needs? There are no hard and fast rules about how many sessions a person needs. If a person has been suffering from a chronic illness for a long time, help often takes longer than with an acute or more recent illness. A general rule of thumb is to continue working on a client for as long as they need help. I would let the client decide how often they need to come. In certain circumstances, he may want a session two or three times a week, or perhaps even every day for a few days. It all depends. It wouldn’t hurt to schedule a series of sessions if you have a chronic back condition. In the long term we have to see where I make progress.

After a session

What can your client do after a session to improve their healing?

If the person completing the session can continue to direct the energy through the parts of the body you have been working on, they can enhance and prolong the healing effects. Is there anything you should do for your client or friend after completing a session? I suggest you give them a glass of water to drink. The session can release toxins that can be washed out by drinking water. I think it’s a wonderful idea to recharge a glass of water by giving it energy to drink. (see p. 196) When the session is over, your hands are still running at very high vibrational energy. You can probably charge a 200ml glass of water quite powerfully in about three to five minutes.

Can Pranayama Healing Be Harmful? Can you ever harm someone by giving them too much energy?

As far as I know, this has never happened before. You really can’t give someone too much energy. When one part of the body receives more energy than it needs, it sends the excess energy to another part of the body that needs it more. The recipient will feel sensations going to another place, which can be helpful information. When I Dr. When Norman Shealy visited and taught him how to direct the energy, this question came up. From his point of view, you cannot harm the person because this energy is only balanced. When equilibrium is achieved, the energy stops flowing or simply continues. Is there any danger in pranayama healing? As far as I know, pranayama healing is not dangerous.

Pranayama healing and other modalities

Do you have any suggestions for using Quantum-1ouch in conjunction with other practical healing techniques?

Oh yeah. As far as I know, pranayama healing can be used to work with or enhance the power of any other form of hands-on healing method. I consider it a transparent therapy because it can be so easily combined with other forms of exercise. When using Reiki, simply do pranayama healing during your Reiki sessions. When you practice shiatsu or acupressure, simply direct the energy from your thumbs or fingers as you normally do in your work. Massage practitioners have found that it requires a high level of concentration to keep the energy flowing during the session. With a little practice they can become proficient at it. I have been told that clients report feeling like they are glowing after a Pranayama Healing massage. Chiropractors have discovered that they can use pranayama healing instead of most “quick adjustments.” Cranial Sacral therapists have told me that this work has transformed their practice. The list just goes on and on. Essentially, pranayama healing can enhance the effectiveness of many other techniques.

Can anyone learn to do pranayama healing?

Can people with disabilities, blind or deaf people learn pranayama healing work?

Oh yeah. Running energy depends on intention, attention and breathing. A person who is not distracted by visual or auditory distractions can also stay focused and may even perform better than their sighted or hearing counterparts.

Can children learn pranayama healing?

Absolutely. Children usually have no problems learning this work. If they have a desire to do healing work, they can be just as effective as adults. It is not uncommon for children to attend my course and, to the delight of their parents, they do wonderful healing work. In a class I was teaching, a woman brought her 11-year-old son, Zack, to class. Zack had a wonderful time discovering that he could do healing work just as well as the adults, and he was able to help his mother as she worked on his numerous skating injuries and posture misalignments. The love he and his mother shared was one of the most beautiful things I had ever seen. On the way home, Zack said, “You know, I secretly wished I had superhuman strength, and now I feel like this.” The next day at school, Zack told his best friend that he had learned to heal people. His friend said, “Heal me.” Zack asked his friend where he was hurt. The friend replied that it didn’t hurt him anywhere. Zack told him, “I can’t help you unless you’re in pain.” With that, Zack’s friend slammed his hand on the table as hard as he could.

How different are pranayama alternative practitioners from each other?

Just as every flower is unique and beautiful, every practitioner seems to have a unique and beautiful energy. Not all powers are equal. Some doctors seem to do well with broken bones, others might do well with tumors. I find that I do exceptionally well with injuries, inflammation, structural alignment and pain reduction. Other healers appear to have gifts in other areas. I believe that one day we will have opportunities to find out where a person’s expertise lies when working with pranayama healing. Additionally, I think we will see in the future that different people can specialize in areas such as trauma care, heart disease, cancer, etc.

Pino, can you give me some pointers on how to conduct a pranayama healing session?

Always maintain your breathing techniques.

Always keep your breath connected to your sensations while you have energy. (This quickly becomes habitual and is the nature of practitioners.)

Stay focused to keep the energy as strong as possible.

Pay close attention to what you feel in your hands and use that information appropriately.

I’m still confused. How can I do pranayama healing work and not be a healer?

Our language can be so flawed in some areas. The person doing the pranayama healing work is not a “healer,” even though he or she is doing the healing. When we do pranayama healing work, we create an energy field with our hands. With this energy we create a vibration. The instrument for the person being worked on to heal themselves.

Chapter 5

Advanced techniques

Resonance factors

Let the power run

Use breathing techniques.

Connect your breath with the energy.

Your intention to heal is a reaction

Choose to feel love and gratitude.

Have an honest expectation

Emphasize a positive expectation that the body not only can heal, but also has the wisdom to do so, and that it can elevate and improve your resonance. The trick to setting expectations is to always be completely honest about where you stand and expect the best based on your experience and confidence. A good place to start is to say to yourself, “I don’t know if it’s possible to heal this or not, but I’m willing to see what happens and I know that the body has a plan of wholeness that he can.” “You don’t have to know how it’s possible, you just have to have access. I’m open to the fact that this is true. Remember that the body has wisdom and the ability to heal itself that far exceeds human understanding. Believing that miracles can happen opens up new possibilities. Because intention and attention are required to control energy, anticipation is a powerful and valuable factor in raising your vibration. Many of the greatest healers I know were aware of the fact and expectation that incredible healings happen quite often and approached their sessions with a joyful sense of positive anticipation.

Ask for help

Do your best

Let go of attachment to the outcome.

If you remember, I talked about how the definition of a great healer is someone who was very sick and got well quickly. When you think about it, it becomes clear that the “healer” is really a healing agent. When you do pranayama healing, you are not healing anyone. What you are doing is stimulating a vibrational field so that the vibration of your body can be raised through the power of resonance and entrainment. When you perform pranayama healing, it is not your responsibility to ensure that the person you are working on is actually healed. for you cannot influence anyone other than yourself. However, it is your responsibility to keep the vibration as high as possible and for as long as necessary to do the best job possible. There were times when, despite my best efforts, there was no obvious benefit. Just as I truly can’t acknowledge that my clients are doing well, I also can’t take the blame for them not getting better. How one responds to this work depends only on receiving the healing energy and maintaining that vibration. We cannot always judge the effectiveness of what we do at the time of our work. The healer’s job is to maintain the highest vibration possible – period. Sometimes these factors are not effective at a particular time. Their energy may not match the specific energy they need at that time. Sometimes a person may not be ready to be healed: they may need to learn some emotional lessons or other factors. Some of these factors may be understandable, others may be beyond our understanding. The point is that we don’t have to judge ourselves as good or bad or be tied to the outcome of a session. You can hope for the best and even expect the best, but it helps to recognize your resonance and realize that their healing is ultimately not your responsibility. They simply act as a catalyst that allows your clients to heal themselves.

Trust

Advanced exercises for running energy

Creating a vortex of energy

Working with chakras and colors

Full spectrum chakra technique

I learned a variation of this technique from a meditation by a spiritual teacher named Lazar for working with the chakras and have adapted it for healing purposes.

First chakra

Take a few minutes to see how strongly you can transfer the feeling to your first chakra.

Second chakra

Third chakra

The third chakra is located in the solar plexus area, above and below your belly button, about the size of your outstretched hand. Feel a ball of bright yellow light in your stomach and feel it spinning in a comfortable direction. Spend a few minutes evoking as much sensation as possible and use the two to six solar breaths to bring more sensation to the area.

Fourth chakra

Fifth chakra

Sixth chakra

Seventh chakra

Full spectrum, one chakra at a time

Tonung

Breathe-Tone-Technik

Getting the client to raise their vibration

Stacking hands and group sessions

Chapter 6

Advanced techniques

The depth, wonder, power and brilliance of your love is not only more than you know; It’s more than you can ever imagine.

The “What You Love Most” Technique

(Also known as the “Julius Technique”)

Your love can be used to become a great healing force.

Allow yourself to remember and relive someone or something in your life that triggers in you an enormous feeling of love, gratitude, happiness, or joy. Simply open your feelings and think about the person, situation, animal, plant, or whatever it is that lights and inspires your passion.

Allow this emotion to fill your body with as many tactile sensations as possible. Pay attention to where in your body you feel the emotion. For example, when you feel love in your chest, feel it there with as much sensation as you can muster and let it spread throughout your body

Allow the tactile sensations of your love, joy, happiness, or gratitude to flow from your hands and combine them with teaching techniques. It’s that simple. Simply use your intention to move the tactile sensation of the emotion through your body and then out of your hands.

Instead of love, you can use any other extremely positive feeling. Other emotions that you can use positively are enthusiasm, satisfaction, wonder or inspiration.

The hang breath

I discovered slope breathing because I automatically did it myself after twenty years. It requires a level of skill that may be challenging for many beginners.

Harmonious toning

The funnel

Flowers

Working with chakras eight to twelve

Eighth chakra

Symbolically, the eighth chakra represents probable realities and the astral plane and can be contacted below the feet. Imagine a ball of blinding and brilliant white light about twenty to ten inches below your feet. Let the ball rotate in the direction you feel comfortable. What’s important is not only that you imagine it spinning, but that you can also feel a physical sensation when it spins.

Ninth chakra

Tenth, eleventh and twelfth chakras

Unless you know better, I recommend channeling energy from all chakras. You can spin them one at a time or all at once and then let the energy flow from your hands

Asking for help

Raise expectations

Heal the past

Combine multiple techniques

Here are some examples of how you can combine techniques while channeling the energy from your hands and continuing breathwork:

Tone while rotating the energy, as in the vortex technique or funnel technique. The higher the tone, the faster the energy rotates.

Spin the chakras one at a time while using the “What You Love Most” technique.

Enter the tissue to be healed as described in Chapter 12 while toning and maintaining a high level of expectation.

One would think that you understand what I’m talking about. Go ahead and create the combinations you like. Have fun!

Chapter 7

Change your posture with energy

On the edge

Confronting the impossible

Change your beliefs, but just follow the instructions and honestly see what happens.

Once you’ve practiced the exercises in Chapter 3, you’re ready to move on. At this point you should be able to:

Feel the prana energy through your body and into your hands.

Do the breathing techniques.

Connect your breathing with your sensations.

Keep in mind

When running the energy with the intention of changing a person’s posture, there are a few important things to keep in mind:

This type of manipulation of the skeletal structure is so harmonious,

The bones seem to “melt” again. You rarely hear a clicking or grinding sound like with many chiropractic maneuvers.

You don’t have to decide where or whether the bones should move – the body figures it out on its own. The person’s body intelligence decides what should happen. In most cases, the person’s body chooses to move the bones back into place. For reasons I can only speculate about, the body seems to like having its structure aligned.

Bones move faster when you touch them lightly. Do not try to direct, push or use force as this is counterproductive. People are so conditioned to control situations through the use of violence. This is a case where force is not only unnecessary but also ineffective. Make sure your hands are very relaxed. Many students, especially people who have performed various types of massage or deep tissue work, have a strong tendency to hold tension rigidly in their hands. Let your hands become soft and relaxed. The flow of prana, which I also call the flow of energy, flows through it more easily when you are not tense.

Structural corrections occur more easily when a person is sitting or standing. For some reason, structural realignment occurs most smoothly when people are upright. This is not to say that you can never create change when a person is lying down, but it is easier when a person is sitting or standing. This is very convenient as you can find a place to stand and, in most cases, sit almost everywhere you go

When you allow energy to flow, many types of healing can occur, and only part of this process causes the bones to move. Because the change in posture caused by a light touch is so dramatic and unexpected, I like to demonstrate it to groups. Many who observe this will naturally assume that this work is about a structural realignment. The movement of bones is like the tip of an iceberg because there is so much more going on beneath the surface. Since we are not readily aware of the countless changes that take place at the cellular level, we say that the bones are moving because we can see it.

Sometimes the bones move quickly, sometimes slowly, and occasionally not at all. There are times when the body is very happy to have the structure as it is, and no matter how much energy you put into the system, it will remain structurally the same. It’s just common sense that you can’t fix what isn’t broken. When treating people with chronic back problems, structural changes can be observed within a few minutes, but it can also take ten, twenty or even thirty minutes for the changes to become visible. In most cases, some postural adjustments occur within two to five minutes, sometimes even within seconds.

If you have successfully completed the exercises in Chapter 3, then you are actually ready, even though you may not believe it!

There are two places in the body where the bones move most noticeably and quickly: the hips and the occiput. To see that you can change posture with a light touch, let’s start with the hips.

Measurement and change of hip position

Find someone whose one hip is higher than the other. Some people have long legs and this technique cannot correct that. The vast majority of people can be adjusted if they are not properly aligned.

Place your fingertips on the ileal ridge (top of the hip bone) and press down lightly and evenly on both sides. To see if one side is higher than the other, you need to have your eyes at eye level with the other spot you are measuring. I have to constantly remind students to get down on one knee so they can check if their hips are straight. In many cases the difference will be quite noticeable, in other cases the difference will be insignificant. To test this yourself, I suggest you find some people who are high on a site.

Once you have determined which side is higher and how much higher it is, take your palms and gently place them on the ridge of the ileum. Don’t push down, just start the energy flow. Make a full-body movement, feel full sensations gathering in your hands, and use one of the breathing techniques. For this demonstration, I would suggest that one to four breaths should work quite well. The trick is to continue breathing and directing the energy into the ileum for one to ten minutes. Sometimes the bones move almost immediately as soon as they are touched; sometimes it takes longer.

Be sure to ask the person you are working on if they can feel anything or experience exciting sensations. Many people can feel the energy almost the second they start running.

On the back of the ileum, follow exactly the instructions you used on the front. The ileum is a surprisingly complex structure because it can rotate sideways, up and down, and in all sorts of ways. Sometimes one side is high in the front and the other side is high in the back. It is always a good idea to balance both the front and back of the ileum.

Measuring and changing the position of the occipital crest

Chiropractors have told me that changing the bones of the skull is a great way to get the body to realign the entire spine.

If you slide your thumbs up either side of the neck and press in gently, you will eventually get to the base of the skull. The tissue there is not as soft as the neck because you are now pushing against the bone.

Try to place your thumbs so that they are the same distance from the center of the head, with one thumb on each side. There is usually a small edge on either side where your thumbs can fit comfortably.

Don’t let the person you’re measuring move their hair out of the way. Raising the hair tilts the head and makes it impossible for you to judge whether the occipital ridge is flat or not. Instead, place your thumbs over the hair and push it up.

Look closely at the positions of your thumbs to see if they are even with each other. Adjust your body so that your eyes are level with the back of your head. If you want to get good results, you need to have your eyes at thumb level. Admittedly, some of my students seem capable of this, and others never become proficient.

Have the customer take a seat. The power of this move can be quite remarkable. I saw a woman faint for a few minutes and several others almost faint. These rare individuals are more likely to faint while standing. These extreme reactions are the body’s way of finding a new balance. People with these reactions always felt much better after the session.

With a client in a sitting position, lightly touch the base of the occiput with your thumbs and place your fingertips on the sides of their head. Let the energy flow from your fingertips and use one of the breathing techniques. The skull bones usually move in the first five to twenty seconds that you do this. There is also an advantage to doing this step longer.

If you’ve been able to do the energy exercises in Chapter 3 and have worked with a few people, you should have seen by now that bones actually move. I suggest you enjoy this experience.

Chapter 8

Work for back and neck problems

Love can unite your breath with intention, as if you could focus light and ignite fire.

The most common problems I see with clients are neck and back pain. Since these diseases are so widespread, I decided to write a separate chapter about them. Be aware that treating this type of pain over the years is just one of the many highly effective uses of pranayama healing. I have found it extremely gratifying to see how new students have been able to help relieve neck pain, lower back pain and sciatica in their first few sessions.

Work on both sides of the vertebrae

Compensation

Keilbein

Back of head

Keilbein

Back of head

1 cervical spine

2 cervical spine

3 cervical spine

4 cervical spine

5 cervical spine

6 cervical spine

1 Thorax

2 Thorax

3 Thorax

4 Thorax

5 Thorax

6 Thorax

7 Thorax

8 Thorax

9 Thorax

10 Thorax

11 Thorax

12 Thorax

1 lumbar spine

2 lumbar spine

3 lumbar spine

4 lumbar spine

5 lumbar spine

sacrum

coccyx

sacrum

General points to consider for neck and back pain

Ask the person in pain to point to the exact spot where they are in pain. Place your hands there and let the energy flow. Don’t make assumptions about where the pain is. The closer you are to the exact point, the faster the effect occurs.

Use a tripod hand position or palms when touching your client. The tripod is excellent if you are comfortable; Otherwise, use the palms, thumbs, or fingertips. Remember that you can direct the energy from any part of your body when you implement your intention.

Place your hands in the most comfortable position you can find. I recommend that you move if you don’t feel comfortable and find a position that makes you feel comfortable.

Do not use force or pressure when touching. Keep your hands relaxed and let the energy do the work.

Work on people’s necks and backs while sitting or standing. Standing generally works best for the lower back, while sitting works best for the neck. If the tissue is injured, it is probably best for the person to sit or lie down. Most importantly, make sure the person you are working with is comfortable.

The trick is to keep breathing and use one of your chosen energy techniques. Make sure you connect your breathing with the feeling of energy

Hold the points for as long as necessary. Pay attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. It may take as little as a few minutes or require repeated hour-long sessions to help your client. The easiest way to find out is to give energy and ask the person how they are doing.

Track the pain or feeling. Have a dialogue with the person you are working with and let them tell you if the pain has shifted or moved. Change the position of your hands to follow the pain or sensation

Increase the power of your work by having the person you are working on breathe deeply too.

For longer sessions and particularly difficult areas, you can place a person face up or face down on a massage table with their hands on their spine. You can also place the person face up on the massage table with your hands under their spine.

Working with neck pain

Using your fingertips on the sides of your head along the line of the temporal suture, apply energy to the occipital spine for one to two minutes.

Be sure to work on both sides of the cervical vertebrae, paying particular attention to the painful areas.

You may need to pay special attention to the atlas, axis and seventh cervical vertebrae.

Be sure to target the energy to areas of the client’s lower back where there is tension or pain, which may equate to neck pain.

Adjust your hips. Front and back. as shown in the previous chapter.

Working with lower back pain

Adjust hips front and back as previously described

Direct energy to the areas of pain.

Direct energy into the neck, particularly areas of tension or pain. Follow the guidelines for working on the neck listed in the previous section.

Continue the dialogue and chase the pain or sensation.

Working with sciatica

Follow the guidelines for working your lower back with these supplements:

Use your thumbs and pay special attention to the areas of the buttocks shown here. Work on both sides of the buttocks, paying more attention to the painful side.

Direct energy to any area of the leg or foot that is feeling pain. Go ahead and chase the pain or feeling wherever it takes you.

Treat any other area that feels pain during or after the session.

Middle back pain

If there are problems in the middle of the back, you need to often do relaxation exercises in the neck and lower back. You can do as follows:

Direct energy into the occiput and neck.

Direct energy into the lower back and balance the hips.

Treat the painful area.

These simple guidelines will work wonders for most back pain caused by misalignments and injuries. Of course, this is not the intended treatment for back pain due to kidney problems.

Chapter 9

Work throughout the body

Open your eyes, pause to wonder, and stand in awe as you realize the true nature of your gifts.

healing Hands

The basic hand sandwich (hold the mayonnaise) sandwiching means having one hand on one side and the other hand on the other side of the body part you are treating.

Grasp the part of the body that needs to be healed with your hands as close as possible to and on either side of the problem you are working on. If possible, go directly to the specific area. Of course, use common sense. That is, do not put your hands in a wound or touch a burn. A workaround may mean placing your hands above and below or on either side of the point you want to focus the energy on.

Use your fingertips or a tripod to direct energy into very small areas. The concentration of energy works very well in such cases. This also helps you bring your hands closer to the center of the area that needs healing.

Pursue the pain. Have a dialogue with the person you are working on and track their sensations or pain on their body.

Make sure your body feels comfortable while working.

The trick is to continue breathing throughout the session.

Running energy directly on or near the surface

Since I’m not with you when you practice, I’ll have to settle for nagging you from a distance. The trick is to keep breathing!

Special conditions

Headache

occiput

Bone

Atlas

axis

Cervical spine

Cervical vertebrae

Thorax
Thorax

Rest your head around the area of pain.

Balance the occipital spine.

Introduce energy into the seams.

You may also need to direct energy into the atlas and axis.

Eye problems

Sinus-Problems

Sinus problems often respond very quickly to the direct introduction of energy. Use fingertips or palms

Temporal-Mandibulargelenk (TMJ)

throat

Place your hands gently on or around the person’s neck. There is no need to worry about doing anything wrong.

Carpal tunnel syndrome and repetitive strain injuries

Be sure to do the following:

Direct energy directly into the wrists. Make sure the person’s hand is in a comfortable upright position, as shown here.

Direct energy to the area of the seventh cervical vertebra and the first thoracic vertebra.

If you have pain in your lower back, make sure you energize there too.

Shoulder problems

Direct energy directly to the area that hurts. Be sure to ask the person you are working on to make sure your hands are in the correct position.

Also try channeling energy from the armpit into the shoulder, as shown.

If these movements were unsuccessful, try working the seams, occipital back, neck, lower back and hips, then go back to the shoulder.

windpipe

Lunge

esophagus

Heart

spleen

Adrenal glands (above the kidneys).

liver

Kidneys

Qvarie

Small intestine

Blase

genitals

colon

Rectum

organs

Simply introducing energy into the heart can improve blood pressure, cardiac arrhythmias and heart palpitations.

pineal gland

Pituitary gland

thyroid

Hypothalamus

Thymusdrüse

adrenal glands (above the kidneys)

Lymph nodes

spleen

Pancreas

ovaries (in women)

Lymphatic vessels

testicles (in men)

immune system

You can use the energy to rebuild or heal the immune system:

Direct energy into the endocrine glands, which include the pineal gland, pituitary gland, thyroid, thymus, adrenal glands, ovaries and testes.

Conduct energy into the

Lymphatic system, located primarily around the neck, armpits, chest, breasts, abdomen, and inner thighs.

Direct energy to important organs – heart, lungs, liver and kidneys.

Direct energy to where the client is in pain.

With these few simple guidelines, you can do incredible healing work with your family, friends, and those lucky enough to be around you.

Chapter 10

self-healing

The heart of healing is the heart.

Apply energy to yourself

Guidelines for self-healing sessions

Practice channeling energy into yourself regularly and often. Self-healing may require many sessions. So if you practice full body movements and running energy, it can be a good idea to give yourself strength. You can practice while watching TV or movies, or even reading a book. This can be a one-handed session unless you find a unique way to hold the book.

Identify any part of your body that you can comfortably reach and place your hands directly on the areas you cannot pinch. For example, it would be difficult to clamp your own heart between your hands, so place both hands over your heart.

If you are working on an inaccessible area, such as the middle of the back, you can use distance healing techniques as described in Chapter 12.

To make sessions as powerful as possible, pump the breath by exaggerating breathing techniques. If you lie down, you can do the breath of fire for much longer without feeling dizzy. This way you can change your vibration more profoundly and be more effective. People with certain heart conditions may not be able to do this safely. If you are unsure, ask your doctor.

This can be a good time to try combinations of techniques. You can use more than one technique at the same time. For example, you could use toning and the enhanced resonance technique described in Chapter 12 while working on yourself.

Be patient. Many people are happy to spend forty or sixty minutes working on a friend, but barely find five or ten minutes to work on themselves.

Chapter 11

Healing animals

“Monkeys are my favorite people.”

Unknown

Just like with my human patients, I never know what the energy will do. I just trust that something extraordinary will happen.

Guidelines for working with animals

Be sure to directly energize or direct any area that you feel needs healing. A diagnosis from a veterinarian can help you pinpoint the problem.

Be sure to maintain your breathing techniques throughout the work because the trick is to keep breathing!

Since the animal cannot speak, pay close attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. This will help you know how long you should keep your hands in one place.

Realize that you won’t do it “wrong.” Energy finds its way where it needs to go and does what needs to be done.

Deliver a series of sessions if necessary.

When you brush your pet’s hair, try to give him energy at the same time. This works with any type of petting motion, be it scratching behind the ears or rubbing the belly.

Try to energize them before or during bathing. For a special treat, you can also add energy to the bath water (see Chapter 15). This works especially well if baths aren’t on your pet’s wish list.

They can also put energy into their food and water, as well as your own food (see Chapter 15). Animals primarily eat canned food, which increases the energetic signature of their food.

I am sure you will be quite surprised and delighted with the results of your work.

Chapter 12: Distance Healing

Infinitely faster than the speed of light, our compassion and prayers move at the speed of love.

Be connected

Numerous books have been written about the strange and almost magical world of quantum physics. In Gary Zukav’s beautiful book The Dancing W Li Masters he writes:

Distance healing

The data above represents a baseline of brain wave activity after the subject had rested for thirty minutes.

Five minutes after the distance healing began. Note the significant increase in delta activity.

After thirty minutes of distance healing, all brain wave activity has become profoundly silent.

Here are just a few examples to give you a taste of how distance healing can work:

One of my students named John had told me about his aunt who had a tumor. He was very worried about her. At seven o’clock sharp, John set off to send her some energy. He concentrated deeply, did the breathing techniques and continued for a full thirty minutes. Shortly after eight. He called her and started chatting about things: how is your husband, how are the kids, what’s going on? After about fifteen minutes, John asked her how she was doing, especially her tumor. Suddenly her voice became very excited and animated and said that it was the most amazing thing, exactly at seven o’clock she could feel “all this energy going into the tumor” and she told him that it felt like it was dream and become smaller. He asked her how long it had lasted and she said it had been exactly thirty minutes, but now it felt all warm and wonderful and she was excited about her potential to be healed. He said he didn’t want to tell her what he had done because he didn’t think she would understand. She could appreciate the love, but if not, the explanation was that one evening she was on the phone with my friend Lauri and told me that she was having a severe allergy attack and excruciating back pain. After training as a nurse, Lauri prepared to self-administer medication, but was hesitant because she knew the medication would “knock her out” for a few days, preventing her from working effectively. I invited her to come over and let me work on her, but she said it was too late and she didn’t feel well enough to drive. “Then let me do some distance healing,” I suggested. She insisted on taking her medication and I protested. We eventually negotiated that if she wasn’t feeling better after an hour, she would take her medication. I started using the electricity and after twenty-five minutes my phone rang. She called to say that not only were all of her allergy symptoms gone, but her back pain was gone too.

Distance Healing Guidelines

get permission. It is always a good idea to get permission for distance healing. If you don’t get permission for one reason or another, simply ask that the energy be used for the highest good and send it to the person. Sending the energy for the highest good is a great thing anyway

Connect with your spirituality. This is useful for those who are prone to this. Asking for help can only improve the work.

Use breathing and let the energy flow. As with all pranayama healing, the trick is to keep breathing, so keep breathing and let the energy flow powerfully from your hands

Combine different techniques. Distance healing can be a great opportunity to experiment and combine different techniques during the session.

Take your time. Distance healing sessions can last thirty, forty-five. or sixty minutes. This can require a lot of commitment from the practitioner.

Don’t be tied to the outcome. As with other pranayama healing works. It is important to keep in mind that you are simply holding a resonance and that you are responsible for the healing.

The amplified resonance technology

Place your hands on the client as you normally would and begin letting the energy flow.

As you direct the energy from your hands, use your mind to “penetrate” the tissue to be treated. With each breath, keep your mind in the tissue you are working on and stay there while simultaneously channeling the energy from your hands.

Chapter 13: Emotional Healing

Beneath the murky waters of unwanted and denied emotions lie the vast and hidden treasures of who we truly are.

Emotions and the healing process

If you shine light on a shadow, it disappears.

It is well beyond the scope of this book to deal with the main problems of emotional causality. Here are some approaches you can use in your pranayama healing sessions.

Guidelines for working with emotions that arise during a session

Grounding: Maintain the sensations in your body as I described in Chapter 3. This will help you stay grounded and be able to help better. (Grounding is described in Chapter 4)

Direct energy to the part of your body where you feel the emotions. This is a wonderful technique that can be effective in helping your friend find emotional balance and process feelings as they arise. Place the front and back area together so that it feels like your hands are encircling it. If they are sitting upright, you can ask them to lean forward while you support their weight (I know several psychotherapists who use this approach to help their patients center themselves and process their emotions more responsibly).

Direct energy into the occipital spine. This can help break old thoughts and emotional patterns and can sometimes be helpful with addictions.

Use distance healing. Distance healing can be useful when treating psychotherapy patients is not therapeutic, contraindicated or physically impossible.

Chapter 14: Diet and Lifestyle Healing

If you have a hole in the bottom of your bucket, it doesn’t really matter how much water you put in it, otherwise it will all spill out.

Fix Me Doc

Lifestyle habits you might consider

Find stretching and cardiovascular exercises that you enjoy and do them regularly. Moderate exercise is most beneficial.

Practice relaxation for at least ten to fifteen minutes a day. Meditation can be helpful.

Focus your thoughts and feelings on what you love, your dreams, and your gratitude.

Expressing stored emotions honestly and releasing them in a self-actualizing way.

Do what you love, even if just for a few minutes a day, and engage in life.

Give up smoking, excessive alcohol consumption and dangerous drugs.

Nutritional suggestions

Avoid food additives, preservatives and processed foods such as white flour and white rice.

Many people cannot tolerate wheat, cheese or milk; There may also be other foods that cause allergic reactions. If you have doubts, try this simple test. Take your pulse on an empty stomach and then eat a suspicious food. Check your pulse again after fifteen, thirty, and sixty minutes. If your heart rate has increased by ten percent or more, you are probably allergic to this food and may need to avoid it

Eat grains and starchy and leafy vegetables. About 25% of your diet should consist of meat, fish, eggs, nuts, seeds and milk.

Take nutritional supplements. These can include:

Vitamin A, 10,000 units per day

B complex

Vitamin C, 1000 mg with bioflavonoids once or twice daily

MCHA Calcium 1000-1500 mg per day as needed

Magnesium glycinate or taurate 500-750 mg per day

Zink 15-25 mg pro Tag

Copper 1.5-2.5 mg per day MSM Sulfur 50LI0UgaDay

Vitamin E. 400 to 1200 units per day

Selenium, 200 megabytes per day

Calcium deficiency syndromes

Chapter 15: Funny Stuff

“Life is a gift and our task is to learn to accept it.

– Lazarus

I remember as a child in school dreaming about how great it would be to invent or discover something truly wonderful. My next thought was more disheartening: So many great things had already been invented, and who was I to ever invent anything?

One of the aspects of pranayama healing that really excites me is that almost anyone who chooses to experiment and play with life energy can discover and invent new uses or techniques. This experimentation can hardly be more than playful fun, but valuable things can still be discovered and learned.

I have divided this chapter into three sections: “Fun with Inanimate Objects.” “Fun with food” and “Fun with people”. I like to think of creativity and exploration as fun, but I take my fun seriously. Accidental discoveries often lead to many of the most important breakthroughs. Sol encourages you to play and have fun with these suggestions. and make your discoveries, and when you have learned something new. Write to us and tell us what you found. We expect to publish a newsletter from time to time to share stories, discoveries, insights and of course news. So if you’re ready, let’s play.

Have fun with inanimate objects, belts and gloves

Take an ordinary leather belt and gently hold it over a friend’s temples like a headband. Place the thumb, index finger, and ring finger of each hand (tripod position) lightly on the belt, directly over your friend’s temples, and let energy flow into the belt for about two minutes. After you have done this, now direct the energy directly into your friend’s temples without placing the belt around his forehead. I have tried this little test many times and found that people who can feel the energy when touched are not able to feel it when energy flows through the belt.

A fascinating and extremely interesting property of leather is that it only seems to absorb life energy and not release it again. In my experience, no matter how much energy you put into an ordinary leather belt, you will not be able to “fill it with energy”. No matter how long you spend introducing the energy into the leather, the leather never reaches the point where the energy begins to penetrate or radiate out the other side.

This small and seemingly unimportant piece of information can prove extremely valuable when conducting double-blind tests. When untrained practitioners simply wear thin leather gloves, the healing properties of the surrounding life force are effectively blocked. So the benefit of the “glove sessions” would be to test the placebo effect.

We also tested rubber gloves in the same way as leather belts and found that only a fraction of the energy passes through the gloves. Although it is difficult to give exact figures, the consensus is that about a third of the energy can penetrate the glove. While I’m on the topic, I should also mention that thick nylon and polyester, as well as leather, can block energy. I’m not sure if this has any health implications for the wearer of heavy nylon, polyester, or leather, but I think it’s worth mentioning.

Since leather was once alive, it may absorb the energy as a very ineffective form of healing. This may sound a bit far-fetched, but reading about my experiences with a guitar might make you think again.

Have fun with your expensive guitar or Stradivarius

I have a 35 year old nylon string guitar that has an excellent, clear and bright sound. One day I had the clever idea of channeling energy into the wood of my guitar. As you may have noticed, I like trying new things. Maybe this sounds a little crazy, but I’ve been accused of worse.

When I ran the energy for about six or eight minutes, I couldn’t feel any energy connection; that is, it appeared that the wood did not respond to the energy. This is what I previously referred to as a “blocked pattern.” Then, little by little. I could feel an energy field slowly expanding between my hands and the wood. After about fifty minutes I had powered the entire top and back of my guitar. I was so excited to play my guitar and see how great it would sound. I turned the guitar over and played a chord. Instead of hearing that bright and clear sound, it sounded like a distinct hit, as if the guitar was filled with water. No matter what I played, it sounded like I was playing a $20 guitar with 10-year-old strings.

My first reaction was that I was quite excited and thrilled to think that I could have so much influence on the resonance of the wood. My next reaction was to deny that this couldn’t possibly be true. I cleaned the guitar, bought new strings and decided it was just my imagination. After the new strings had been in place for three days, I carefully turned them with my electric tuner and concluded that they would certainly sound

Good, because I must have made the whole thing up. The new strings only sounded about 5 percent better than the old strings. My third reaction was sadness. “Oh my God, I killed my guitar.” When I was shelling out the price for a new guitar and realized I didn’t like that option, I used an old luthier’s trick as a last resort. I leaned the guitar against a stereo speaker and played music over the guitar whenever I left the house. After a few months of balling the wood, the guitar started sounding pretty good again. I think the guitar is at least as good as it was before I started. It might even be a little better, but I’m not sure.

As with many discoveries, far more questions remain than answers. My best theory is that the energy somehow changed the position of the water molecules, affecting the resonance of the wood, making it sound like it was soaked. Perhaps similar to the leather gloves, the energy tried to breathe life back into the wood.

I have one last comment. Please note that the title of this section is “Having Fun with Your Expensive Guitar or Stradivarius.” The word “your” is there quite deliberately: I won’t try mine again!

Fun with water and food, recharging water

If you want to supply life energy to each of your hundred trillion cells, all you need to do is recharge and drink water. Filling with water or another liquid is quite easy. Using both hands, simply hold the glass or bottle with just your palms or fingertips so that your left and right hands are not touching each other, and then allow energy to flow into the water for a few minutes or longer. This hand position forces the energy to move into the fluid between your hands.

A few physicists explained to me that water can change its hydrogen bonds and take on an infinite variety of structures. I believe that pranayama healing works at a subatomic level of matter, which may explain how this might be possible.

Water changes flavor when energy is added to it, and the extent of the change often depends on the water source and the magnitude of the charge. For a few years I informally requested one of two glasses of water when no one was looking and gave it to people and asked them to try each and tell me what they noticed. Without any coaching, people use the same words over and over again to describe the charged water. In the vast majority of cases, people called the water “silkier,” “softer,” “softer,” “better tasting,” “less metallic,” “less chlorine taste,” and occasionally some called the charged water “thicker.” or even “syrupy.”

A few years ago, I documented pranayama healing sessions with the University of California Santa Cruz men’s and women’s basketball teams, where an average ten-minute session reduced their pain levels by 50 percent. One evening two players complained loudly about how terrible the tap water tasted. They had filled their plastic bottles with water from the drinking fountain and every time they drank from their plastic bottles we made ugly faces and made derogatory comments. asked one of them if he could help me. Hold the bottle for about two or three minutes and let energy flow into it. When she was finished, she took the bottle back and took a sip. “It’s not good,” she said. She then took a sip from her friend’s bottle and made a really ugly face. Further derogatory comments will not be repeated here. Her friend drank from both bottles with the same reaction.

To conduct their little experiment, they called two other players off the field and, without explaining anything, they held out the two bottles and said, “Try these bottles of water and tell us what you think.” The two women tasted the bottles and reacted in the same way as the women who had watched me fill the bottles. They all said that the charged water didn’t taste good, but when they tasted the uncharged water, they all made ugly faces and added extremely derogatory comments.

Recharge on water with someone you love

Here’s a nice little option for charging the water. Grab a glass of water and load it up with a friend. Use the hand stacking technique described previously. Charging water together creates a wonderful synergistic effect that is greater than the sum of its parts. When you’re done, share the water you charged with others. This can be a nice little ritual, a blessing. or prayer.

Load up on wine

Loading up on wine can be a lot of fun. I have found that it is easier to demonstrate the effects of white wine than red wine. For a long time people told me that the aftertaste was significantly reduced by adding white wine, and most people I spoke to liked the difference. Out of curiosity, I went to a winery one day and asked the woman who it was

I would pour wine if she helped me understand what people look for when they taste wine. She poured different samples and let me notice the bouquet, complexity, aftertaste, etc. I asked her if she would try the wine I requested and tell me what she thought. At first she refused because she was sure nothing would change. Finally, I begged her to please calm me down and help me overcome my delusions about changing wine taste.

She carefully tasted each sample twice, comparing the charged sample with the uncharged sample. She tried both a second time to make sure what she found and then asked me a question. “Do you realize what you’ve done? Do you realize what you did?” “No, please tell me,” I asked. “You have destroyed the complexity of this wine and also almost destroyed the aftertaste.” “Is that good?” I asked sheepishly. “NO! It’s very, very bad!” To make sure she was serious, I teased her a little, raised my arms for effect and said, “If you’d like, I could load all the bottles in here at once.” She became immediately loudly and stubbornly, waving his arms and shouting: “No, don’t do that!”

Grapefruitsaft

Grapefruit juice is fun to energize because it tones down the pungent aftertaste. Most people like the pungent aftertaste and don’t like the supercharged juice that much, but it’s fun to see the difference.

Convert energy into food or drinks and vitamins

Supercharge your food, drinks and supplements. Just hold your hands over your food and let the energy flow. The field will charge for your meal. Load up on your vitamins too. When you bless your food, you can include this in the blessing.

Fun with people: chakra charging for two

This is a wonderful healing and balancing technique in which both people give and receive at the same time. Charging each other’s chakras can be a wonderful way to share love, relax, experience healing, or slip into wonderfully altered states of consciousness.

With a little practice, this technique can become a favorite with couples or friends who want to explore the possibilities. To do this successfully, both must know how to direct energy and perform chakra work as described in Chapters 5 and 6. The more powerfully each of you directs the energy and the longer you do it (as long as it is comfortable). , the more successful the result will be.

In the position pictured above, each person rotates their first chakra and directs the energy from their hands into the other person’s feet. When both feel they have built up a strong charge, they can move on to the second chakra. Continue in this manner with all seven chakras and then work with chakras eight through twelve.

Move from time to time if the position is not comfortable. Maintaining an uncomfortable position can lead to back pain. Because this general position is somewhat awkward, there is no exact placement of the legs and arms. Don’t forget to breathe!

Funny star

Strap in and get ready to take off. I have developed a group healing technique that I call Sun-Star, and people who use this technique have had wonderful and profound experiences. Many have said that the experience brought them into incredibly calm states of consciousness, spiritual experiences or out-of-body experiences. Some people have commented that the changes taking place in their body felt extremely uncomfortable for the first five or ten minutes before feeling wonderful. Each person in the circle must commit to doing this for at least 15 minutes.

Have an even number of people arrange themselves according to the pattern shown in the previous chapter. Each person sends energy through their hands into the feet of two other people. You can use group toning, vortexing, chakra spinning, enhanced resonance techniques and of course breath of fire. The more experienced and capable each member of the group is, the more amazing the results will be. The synergy of so many different vibrations is an incredible and delightful experience. Plus, the Sun Star is a lot of fun.

Keeping a partner

Something as simple as hugging another person, whether standing or lying down, can take on a new meaning and quality of experience when you allow the energy to flow throughout your body and out of your hands as you hug. The longer you hug, the more energy is exchanged

Remember, the trick is to keep breathing! Am I repeating myself? Yes, and I do it on purpose. Because it is so fundamental: the art is to keep breathing!

Sex – How to make a good thing even better

Practicing these techniques with a lover can add a whole new dimension of pleasure to this work. It’s a great way to socialize, relieve stress, and tune into one another so your vibrations are more compatible. When both people know how to channel the energy through their bodies and into each other, pranayama healing can prolong sensual pleasure and intensify intimate orgasmic experiences for a more dynamic and exciting sex life. Running energy is also great for foreplay. The key is to practice together. When you do this, you heal naturally and share energy

Group hug

Even the ordinary “group hug” can become very special if everyone uses pranayama healing to let the energy run through their hands during the hug. Remember to keep breathing. This works even better if you take off your shoes and gently place your forefoot over the toes of someone standing next to you so that they are all connected.

Work with what you know

Take any healing technique and combine it with pranayama healing. Acupuncturists have told me that providing energy to patients after the needles are inserted has changed their practice. Reflexologists were also impressed when they combined pranayama healing with reflexology points. Use what you know.

This chapter is about giving you the freedom to have fun and experiment with the energy. A friend told me that when her boss gave out roses to all the employees every month, the other employees in her office were jealous because her rose always lasted much longer than the others. Its secret is that it channels energy into the flower and the water. Go ahead and experiment, get playful and tell me what you find.

Chapter 16: The Future of Energy Healing

Energy is the actual substance behind the appearance of matter and forms.

– Dr. Randolph Stone

Introduce

If you view the life force as real, I see healers working in every hospital, emergency room, and ambulance. Groups of healers would work on patients several times a day. DR.

If Life Force is accepted, I expect all professional sports teams to travel with a team of experienced practitioners. There is no question that this work accelerates the healing of injuries.

I imagine that life healing work is widespread in both developed and third world countries.

Ultimately, I can imagine that this work will lead to breakthroughs that I cannot even imagine today.

If a phenomenon is not due to a psychological mechanism but is caused by an energy force, we are now discussing the creation of a new branch of science. I like to think of it as “life”

Force Science” as the name is universal and would encompass a variety of natural healing methods.

When life force is seen as real, we have a new lens through which to view the world. The way we grow food and what we eat is evaluated in terms of how it affects our life force. Education is measured by how creative and loving processes strengthen the child’s vitality. Medical practices can be measured by how well the treatments increase the patient’s vitality. The value of exercise, yoga, pranayama, tai chi and other various types of bodywork can take on new meaning. We can see how laughter, the honest expression of emotions and the effects of love, care, tenderness and touch increase life force. If we see the life force as real, we will live in a world that can change its priorities and be a healthier and more fulfilling place for all of us.

The trick is to keep breathing

Preface

The process is very similar to learning to ride a bike. Before you start, the idea of sitting upright on two skinny wheels probably seems pretty impossible. When you start to stay upright, it may seem like a miracle at first, but after a while it becomes completely natural and second nature. When you first observe the results of pranayama healing, the experience will often surprise you and be unforgettable. As with riding a bicycle, what initially seemed miraculous to us becomes natural over time.

Additionally, there is great joy and satisfaction in knowing that you can help others in their healing process. A little warning in advance: I believe that this joy is contagious.

I think that’s where consciousness starts to have an influence. Such a point where consciousness and matter intersect, that this connection exists at a quantum level (subatomic level) and that this extraordinary connection between mind and matter is accessible to us through our love and intention. By harnessing the innate power of our love, we can dynamically and positively activate the body’s healing process. From DNA to bones, every cell and system responds effortlessly to the healing vibration of your love. The following are some interesting things I would like you to know about Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing: Practitioners of all practical healing modalities who have studied Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing in Bali, Indonesia and throughout Southeast Asia told me that it significantly increased the power or effectiveness of their healing practice. Chiropractors consider it an advanced form of chiropractic. Physical therapists consider it a more effective form of physical therapy. Similar. Acupuncturists have told me that it is an advanced form of acupuncture. Reiki masters call it “Reiki empowerment” or “turbocharging Reiki.” Pranayama Healing: The energy of healing combines seamlessly with numerous other techniques to increase its effectiveness: massage, shiatsu, Jin Shin Do, acupressure, polarity, cranial-sacral, therapeutic touch, healing touch, and so on. Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal is a wonderful stand-alone therapy for people without prior training. This is perhaps the easiest healing technique to learn. Almost anyone can learn to do extraordinary healing work after two days of training. It is so simple that you can easily learn from this book. Children can usually learn this work almost immediately. Pranayama Healing: The energy for healing will empower people to relieve tremendous pain and suffering from friends and loved ones. It is truly one of the essential life skills that we should all know. On a purely selfish and personal level, I want to live in a world where healing is seen as real, where healing is widely practiced, and where the kind and generous good nature of humanity can be easily expressed. Because of these and numerous other heartfelt desires, I invite you to go on a wondrous journey of discovery with me – the discovery of pranayama healing: the energy for healing.

“It is not important that you know everything,

but only the important things.”

Miguel de Unamuno

Chapter 1 Discovery

A firmly anchored blessing

Café sessions

“My mother is in a lot of pain – can she please sit here?” asked a woman who appeared to be in her 60s. My friend and I stood up from the bench in the bookstore and invited the women to take our seats. The very old woman was hunched over and breathing very heavily as she sat down painfully and very slowly. I asked the daughter what her mother’s problem was. worried that she might need help. She told me that her mother was in a lot of pain. For about thirty seconds. I debated internally whether I should get involved in this matter or not, but the “healer” prevailed. I explained to the daughter that my job involves using a form of hands-on healing where I touch the painful area very lightly, and asked her mother if I would like to do that. She spoke to her mother in French, and the older woman said that was fine. In my typical fashion, I do it all over my office. I was often seen giving healing sessions at concerts, lectures, movies, golf courses, seminars, supermarkets, or wherever I happened to be. I call these “café sessions”. I asked the mother to point to the place where she was in pain. The daughter translated and a moment later I was kneeling with my hands on her mother’s aching lower back. She was breathing very heavily and her face was contorted in pain as I began to “run energy through my hands.” Within five minutes, the older woman’s face appeared peaceful. She turned to me and simply said, “Thank you, I’m feeling better now.” The two women stood up, smiled at me and left the bookstore without another word. I immediately sat back down on the bench and picked up the book, ready to pick up where we left off. To my surprise, my friend was visibly quite shaken by the experience. Although she and I had enjoyed a casual friendship for several years, she had somehow escaped my relentless encounter with people’s skepticism. “How can you just pick up the book after such an experience?” She demanded an explanation that healing was an everyday experience. Although these experiences were unexpected to me when I first practiced Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, over the years I had become accustomed to them and even learned to expect them!

Early confusions

Hero Gus

Gus is a yoga teacher who I met in 2015 during a Balinese healing yoga teacher training. And in fact he made up a number of stories that seemed completely unbelievable to me. He then asked one of the audience members to act as a volunteer. The friend who had invited me to class stepped forward. We took a few minutes as a group to examine my friend’s posture. He had never noticed before that his spine had a pronounced “S” curve: one shoulder was much higher than the other, one hip was higher, and so on. Gus just worked very matter-of-factly, touching one spot, then another. He clearly showed us how badly the occipital spine (at the base of the skull) was misaligned. He began to breathe deeply, lightly touching the base of her skull for just a few seconds. The ridge immediately appeared to be completely flat. He touched her hips, her shoulders and ran his hands down her back. Honestly, I couldn’t believe my eyes as I watched bones seem to fuse together. Within ten to fifteen minutes, her spine was almost straight and her hips and shoulders were properly aligned. To put it mildly, I was amazed! I immediately came to three important conclusions. The first conclusion was that Gus Wira possessed a rare and incredible gift. The second conclusion was that no one else would ever be able to learn this. The third conclusion was that I would never learn. At the end of the day I found that I could barely move the bone positions with a light touch. I was shocked. Luckily, I was wrong on all three counts. I soon became Gus’ friend and neighbor, and I often spend time at his house, watching him at work and trying to figure out how and why he was so much more powerful than the people he trained. For the next few years, I spent hours every day practicing directing the energy. Eventually, I became creative in my attempts to get the work done and was able to discover new ways to amplify energy and increase my strength. I got to the point where Gus liked my work.

Come on

I think the most excitement I felt in this healing work came about two years after I first learned the basic technique from Gus. I was in Denpasar demonstrating Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing to a group of about eight people. Ayu had volunteered to be the subject of my demonstration. She had severe osteoporosis and was stooped. She looked at the ground as she walked. I had her put on a button down shirt backwards so we could get a good look at her back. I was quite shocked when I saw her spine for the first time. Every vertebra was severely misaligned. One vertebra was deflected far to the left, the next one deeper was much further to the left and the one underneath was somehow massively pushed to the right. Some bones stuck out further than I ever thought possible. They looked like dinosaur bones. Other bones were badly dented. Looking at her back, it was easy to see why Ayu was hunched over when she walked. I began channeling energy into her spine. I worked on one vertebra at a time, spent a minute or two there, and then went to the next one and did the same thing. After about fifteen minutes, people in the group started commenting, “Does this look better, or is it just my imagination?” Another fifteen or twenty minutes later, I heard comments like, “I’m pretty sure it is now looks better.” It seemed that the bones were gradually finding a better aligned position. After the next fifteen minutes the comments were like, “Oh my God, it’s so much better!” After an hour and fifteen minutes we were all completely amazed, I could hardly believe my eyes. Every vertebra in Ayu’s spine was now in a straight line. The heavily pushed out vertebrae now seemed to be in a natural position, now they seemed to be pushed out inwards. Ayu stood up and suddenly she was much taller than me, whereas before we were face to face in her bent position. Ayu’s daughter came into the room and started crying when she saw her mother standing upright. Mother and daughter hugged each other and cried. The people in the room couldn’t stop talking about it and I was just as amazed as everyone else. The Swirls That Were Disgusting By the time I arrived at my friend’s house in Denpasar where I was staying, the day’s events had upset my beautiful and comfortable beliefs. I remember sitting on the floor with my cheek against the wall, thinking about what had just happened. Suddenly I heard a loud and very credible voice in my head saying, “THAT DIDN’T HAPPEN!” For a brief moment I believed it. Then I protested to myself, remembering how people had said that they thought their spine was starting to look better, the way the vertebrae moved until they were all aligned again. I remembered her standing up very straight and tall and crying gratefully with her daughter. “No,” I protested to myself, “it actually happened! That is real.”

The little Yorkshire Terrier

After letting the energy run for about a minute or two, I felt the shaking stop and the small muscles under my hands relax. Out of curiosity, I kept the power running. After a few more minutes, the dog did something unexpected: he stretched his front paws as far forward as possible and his back paws as far back as possible and lay completely relaxed. “Hey Lola, this is fun.” I thought. I continued to run energy into the dog, and then Lola suddenly rolled onto his back, front paws stretched forward, back paws back, and my hands on his stomach. This pet looked like it was having a pleasant day at the beach, stretched out and drinking in the sun. I had never seen a dog do something like that, and I had never heard of a dog doing something like that. At this point it was beginning to occur to me that some pretty remarkable things might happen during these sessions, and I wasn’t quite as distraught as I had been during my session with Ayu.

Gus’ gallbladder

Chapter 2

Resonance, life force and the principles of pranayama healing

resonance

There is a mystery and a miracle in the seemingly simple function of resonance. All people and particles dance to its power, from the galaxies to the subatomic. If a piano and a guitar were both in tune and a G was played on the piano, the G string on the guitar would also vibrate. Sound waves moving in the air transfer the acoustic energy from the piano to the guitar. Likewise, tuned oscillators, things that can oscillate at the same frequency, require very little work to transfer energy from one to another. In this example, the guitar’s string absorbs the piano’s energy waves because it is tuned to the same frequency. When similarly tuned oscillators are present, they form what is known as a resonant system. The strings of the guitar and piano vibrate together. If pendulum-type grandfather clocks were mounted on a wall and their pendulums oscillated out of phase with each other, their pendulums would lock in phase and strike together within a few days. In this case, the energy transferred through the common wall would be enough to bring the clocks into phase with each other. This is entrainment, a phenomenon that allows two similarly tuned systems to align their movement and energy so that they match in rhythm and phase. This phenomenon also occurs in the field of electronics. If you have similarly tuned resonant circuits that oscillate at similar frequencies, the slower circuit will increase to match the speed of the faster one. In both examples we can see how energy is transferred from one similarly tuned system to another. What can we learn from it? First, when two systems vibrate at different frequencies, there is a driving force called resonance that causes the two systems to transfer energy from one to the other. When two similarly tuned systems oscillate at different frequencies, another aspect of this energy transfer, called entrainment, causes them to align and oscillate at the same frequency. Entrainment is the process by which things adjust their movement and energy to match rhythm and phase. This also seems to work with biological systems. On warm nights in many parts of the world, fireflies gathering in a tree light up randomly. Soon everyone will be turning their lights on and off in a coordinated manner. I have often heard crickets or frogs all finding the same rhythm and coordinating their sounds. In these cases, nature finds it useful, or perhaps economical, to take individuals along rhythmically. Perhaps over time, through a more mysterious process, women who share a house or dorm room will find that their menstrual cycles also move rhythmically. Scientists have found that even disembodied animal hearts, when kept alive in a laboratory and placed close to each other, entrain – the individual hearts then begin to beat in unison. The process appears to be universal. Perhaps Itzhak Bentov was right in his fascinating 1977 book “Stalking the Wild Pendulum.” He explains, “We may think of disease as a disordered behavior of one or other of our body organs. When a strong harmonizing rhythm is applied to it, the interference pattern of waves that represents the organ can begin to beat in unison again.” He postulates that this theory may be the reason why energy healing works. I agree. When two things vibrate at different frequencies through resonance and entrainment, either the lower vibration rises, the higher vibration falls, or they meet in the middle. In “Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal,” practitioners learn to increase the vibration of their hands to a very high frequency through breathing and meditation techniques. When they bring their hands near another person in pain, the client’s body resonates like a similarly tuned circuit and is picked up by the practitioner’s hands. Love is the universal vibration that allows people to transmit healing energy from one to another. In his book “Loving Hands Are Healing Hands,” Bruce Berger writes: “Sympathetic resonance describes the tendency of two waveforms with the same degree of arc to resonate sympathetically together, energize each other, and communicate universally with one another.” Thus, waveforms of the same length and frequency become one another during of the entire creation carry and influence each other. This is key to understanding one of the dynamics that hold creation together and to understanding our theory of the body as the energy of sacred sound.” When working with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, the practitioner maintains the highest vibration possible, which is becomes the dominant frequency. The “healer” (also called the client or patient), the person whose body is healing, will simply adapt and align with the vibration of the practitioner. A spiritual teacher named Lazaris said, “The definition of a great healer is someone who was very sick and quickly recovered.” In my opinion, anyone who claims to be able to heal others is either ignorant, false, arrogant, or delusional . They simply provide the resonance energy that allows others to heal themselves. The practitioner simply has an enormously strong harmonizing energy and the clients adapt to this vibration. The innate body intelligence of the person receiving the energy will do whatever the body deems useful to bring about healing. The body heals itself with an unimaginable level of intelligence. Western civilization often takes for granted the body’s innate healing ability, but it is the true healer. When we look at the cells in our body, we see that we have hundreds of billions of cells that are constantly feeding themselves with oxygen and the food we eat, releasing carbon dioxide and other waste products. These cells are also busy reproducing and healing themselves, with thousands of microscopic changes taking place every minute of every day! It’s a good thing I don’t have to keep track of all this activity, because I’m already having a hard time keeping myself to remember where I left my keys. Without the breathing and meditation techniques learned in Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing, a practitioner can become immersed in the client’s vibration and become drained by the experience. This is not the case with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal as long as we use the techniques to maintain a naturally high resonance. Perhaps one day healers will be known as resonant doctors.

vitality

“No, I have no idea what water is,” said the fish.

“Why do you ask?”

Principles

Love is a universal vibration; Love communicates with all species, functions on all levels, and expresses our true nature. It is the basis of all healing and the essence of life force.

Energy follows thought. The practitioner uses intention and various meditations to create a high-energy field and uses this field to surround the area to be healed.

Resonance and participation cause the area to be healed to adapt its vibration to that of the practitioner. The practitioner simply raises the new resonance and holds it.

The energy follows the body’s natural intelligence to bring about the necessary healing. The practitioner pays attention to the “body intelligence” and “chases the pain.”

The practitioner also experiences healing through the work. Breathing increases your life force.

Each person’s gifts in life and healing are unique. Some people are particularly skilled at treating specific illnesses.

Healing can be done remotely and can be very effective. Pranayama healing can be easily and effectively combined with other healing methods.

Chapter 3

healing Hands

“I believe that the best medicine is the gentlest treatment that produces the maximum healing response.” – Andrew Weil, MD

Healing and chopsticks

To be a “healer.”

Some would have us believe that becoming a naturopath requires many years of hard work and discipline. They would have us believe that only the most brilliant, gifted and educated among us could ever hope to achieve such a title. If the truth is told, children, seniors, and everyone in between can learn to become health practitioners. I would even say that doctors and people with postgraduate degrees can learn this healing work. There were many celebrated “healers” whose talents were well documented and recognized as genuine. However, most of them had no explanation for what they were doing or how it happened. The importance of pranayama healing is that we now have a cognitive explanation of how to stimulate the healing process and a proven method for teaching others how to do this successfully. Since the true healer is the person receiving the energy, the practitioner merely acts as a catalyst that allows the healer to heal themselves. and to access and utilize a higher vibrational field of energy. During this process the truth about healing is as follows:

Healing is real. Becoming a highly effective health practitioner is one of the easiest skills to learn.

Healing is a great joy. Anyone with a strong desire can learn this.

From now on you can learn to be an exceptional naturopath!

It starts with love

Basic energy exercises

Exercise 1: Feel your finger

Hold a finger in the air and spend at least two minutes feeling as much sensation as possible in your finger. Tune into the sensation in your finger and focus on intensifying your awareness. 2. Feel the skin wrap around your finger. Try to feel the blood as it flows through your finger. Use your imagination and try to feel how your fingernail sits on your finger. Try to feel the sensation under your fingernail. The key is to use your focused attention to fully feel your finger. The basic assumption is that energy follows thought. Wherever you place your attention, energy follows you. By increasing the sensations in your finger by moving and holding the energy there, you also cause physiological changes. These sensations may seem like ordinary feelings in your body, but as you will see, you are feeling life energy. Most people will say that they feel a tingling sensation in their fingers. Some people describe the feeling as vibrating, buzzing, fizzy, or hot. Because everyone experiences things differently. People probably use different words. Some people describe the energy as heat, throbbing, thickness, heaviness or simply as a heightened awareness of the finger itself. Feeling life energy is no stranger to us. Rather, the life force is an energy that we have always felt but that we simply have not learned to recognize. If you are alive, and since you are reading this I assume you are, you feel it every minute of every day.

Exercise 2: Feel your body parts

Take off your shoes and then, while sitting or lying down, have your friend stroke them gently upwards, from your feet to your ankles, for a few seconds. The touch should cover as much surface area as possible on the feet and ankles in a gentle, stroking motion for only about two to five seconds. After this upward movement, your friend should let go and not touch you. The purpose of this exercise is to help you feel as much sensation as possible in your feet and ankles. Ideally, you should feel your feet with the same intensity that you previously felt in your finger. A friend’s touch is helpful in focusing your attention. Letting go is also an essential part of the exercise because it allows you to feel the sensations in your body without being touched. If not. If you can’t create feeling in your feet, ask your friend to stroke them again. If you still don’t feel anything, ask your friend to move on to the next step.

When you are ready and feel these sensations well, ask your friend to place her hands on the area just above the ankles for a few seconds and move them up toward your shins, then release them. Continue to the rest of the body, stroking the shins, knees, thighs, hips, lower pelvis, stomach, chest, neck and up to the head. Then go down from the head to the shoulders, arms and hands. This toe-to-head stroking pattern is useful for stimulating directed energy flow when allowing the energy to flow through your body and when conducting a healing session. We’ll do the back of the body later.

You are done when you feel the prana energy throughout your body.

Change locations with your friend and use the same techniques to give them the same experiences.

If you are doing this alone, touch your own feet and stroke upwards for about two to five seconds and then release. Feel as many sensations as possible and repeat the upward motion as many times as necessary. Because another person’s touch is less predictable than your own, you may need to pay a little more attention and concentration when working alone. Continue stroking up the body to the head, then down the shoulders and arms, ending with the hands.

What to do if you don’t feel any body sensation anywhere?

I have found that one to two percent of the people I teach are kinesthetically impaired. This means they have a hard time feeling any sensations in their body. I have found that these people can still learn this, but it requires more effort and concentration than someone who has access to full-body sensations. If you find that you cannot feel the sensations of others, try focusing your attention on the parts of the body that are being caressed. Punctual. Sensation will awaken. Admittedly it’s not easy, but with a little practice it can be done. I have found that most people will be able to create feelings. You can still do the healing work but may also require more concentration.

Exercise 3: Long Sweeps

We follow the same pattern of gentle, sweeping movements as in the last exercise. However, this time have your friend make longer movements, about 50 centimeters long. Again, the touch is light (your friend won’t heal here) and the touch lasts two to five seconds. Have your friend perform a sweeping touch from feet to knees. Use your attention and intention to focus your senses on that area, then invite your friend to either repeat the movement or continue.

The purpose of touching in longer movements is to move energy through your body more fluidly and consciously. We create a gentle wave of prana energy in our body. After your friend lets go, feel the sensations in your body as strongly as possible. The goal is to get these areas of your body to tingle, vibrate, buzz, or heat up like you did in the first exercise. If you don’t feel any sensation or would like to repeat the touch, ask your friend to touch you again. Be sure to wait until you are ready before moving on to the next position. When a friend completes the process, they can swap places after you and repeat the process.

If you are doing this alone, lightly stroke yourself from your feet to your knees for a few seconds, pausing to feel the sensations. Feel as many sensations as possible. Repeat the blow if you feel no sensation. Gradually work your way up to your head, then down over your shoulders and into your hands.

Restricted areas

If you are having difficulty feeling a certain area, you can ask your friend to touch that place again to make it easier for you to feel it. If you can’t get the feeling into the area after three tries, don’t worry about it and move on to the next area. At this point, that area of your body will “wake up” and be able to feel the energy. In most cases, people learn to wake up difficult areas within hours or perhaps weeks. In rare cases this can take a year or longer. Note that this will not have a significant impact on your power or effectiveness in performing great Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal.

Exercise 4: Full body movements on the front and back

A big punch forward

A big swing backwards

Energy Exercise 5: Full body exercise using your mind

Summary of basic energy exercises

Now that you’ve completed the initial prana energy exercises, let’s take a look at what happened here. You have learned to focus attention and sensations on every part of your body. If there are still places where you cannot direct sensation with your focused attention, keep practicing and they will open up for you. It is not necessary for every area to be open and “tingly” to do great healing work. Do your best and you will continue to improve. Once you have done these exercises, you will most likely have reached the point where you no longer need to touch anyone to awaken the process within you. You will be able to bring these sensations into your awareness yourself. You can practice pranic energy almost anytime, anywhere. For example: While standing in line at a bank or grocery store, while talking on the phone, at a boring business meeting, or while watching TV or a movie. Because the experience is so pleasant, I recommend that you practice this exercise often. As you continue to practice this exercise, you will find that you can control the energy significantly more. Repeat these exercises as needed and learn to bring the energy more intensely into each area of your body and channel it into your hands.

Basic breathing techniques

Pranayama Healing: The trick is to keep breathing

The 2-6 breath

This is a very powerful breathing technique to increase energy during your pranayama healing sessions. The name says it all: two bars for inhalation and six bars for exhalation.

The 1-4 breath

If you feel dizzy, hold back.

Fire breathing, followed by 2-6 or 1-4

This is the most powerful breathing exercise to increase energy and can be done up to once per minute. Excessive use of this breath can cause fainting. Avoid using this technique if you feel weak.

Circular breathing

Connect the energy with your breathing

While sitting or standing, mentally perform a full-body swing (see p. 36). The key is to feel as many sensations as possible throughout your entire body. After practicing the previous exercises, most people are now able to use the power of their intention well enough to create sensation in much or all of their body. Place your hands flat together or gently close them to form “loose fists.” Do two or three full-body movements and feel the energy gathering in your hands. Once you feel the sensations in your hands increasing, it’s time to coordinate them with breathing.

Start with a 2-6 breathing pattern. Take a deep breath to the count of two, exhale fully to the count of six, and place all your attention on your hands. Feel the energy building as you exhale. Do this for a few minutes while coordinating the exhalation with the sensation. When doing these exercises, always work to increase the sensation of exhaling. Don’t worry about the energy building up in your hands as you inhale. Focus on the six cycles of exhalation. If you do this correctly, you will feel an increase in sensation in your hands.

With your hands still gently cupped or cupped, begin the 1-4 breathing pattern. Notice how the sensations in your hands change as you do this. Work on feeling the sensations increase as you exhale. This simply requires that you hold your attention in your hands and have the intention to heighten the sensations. Developing the ability to heighten sensations and link them to the breath is one of the most important skills in pranayama healing. If you do this correctly, you should notice that the feeling in the hands increases as the pace of breathing changes. As long as you don’t get dizzy or fall over, the more air you move, the more vitality increases.

Start with the fire breathing technique. Again, your hands should be gently cupped or cupped as you breathe. When you’re done quickly inhaling and exhaling, take a deep breath and move into a 1-4 or 2-6 breathing pattern. Now notice how the sensations in your hands have changed. If you feel an increase in sensations as you exhale, you are doing a great job and are ready for the next step. The next step is to conduct a healing session.

Breathing exercise to connect the upper chakras

Putting everything together

Your first healing session

Find someone you know who is in pain. Ask your friend how much pain or discomfort he or she is feeling. Have your friends rate their discomfort on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 being the worst. It’s amazing how often people forget how bad the pain was after it’s gone.

Ask your friend where he is hurt. The most important thing is that you don’t make assumptions about where the pain is located. If you ask someone where they are injured and they say their left shoulder hurts, you still need to ask them what part of the shoulder hurts. Unless you are truly psychic, your assumptions on this matter are often wrong. The best way to find out exactly where your friend is hurting is to ask him and point it out to him or place your hands in the right place for you. This is what I now call the “Where does it hurt?” technique.

Make sure to place your hands either directly above or on either side of the areas where your friend is experiencing pain. By “sandwiching” the area of pain between your hands, you are actually creating a strong resonant field that allows the tissue to change vibration and heal itself. +. When working on a problem with a person’s back or neck, place one hand on each side of the vertebrae of the spine.

Experiment with breathing techniques, paying close attention to the sensations in your hands as you exhale. Make sure you breathe deeply throughout the work. If you feel a little dizzy, you should take a break.

Make sure your hands are relaxed as energy flows faster from loose and open hands. Always remember to use both hands during a session. This helps you create a better field into or through the tissue. As you work, pay close attention to how the sensations in your hands change.

Understand the sensations you feel in your hands

The five basic patterns of energy

There are five primary energy patterns that you are likely to feel in your hands during pranayama healing work:

The Blocked Pattern – At first you feel very little in your hands, and then the sensations gradually increase and reach a peak. Very blocked areas are often areas of chronic problems, diseased organs, or sometimes acute pain (but not often). If you’re working on an area that has a lot of blockage, you’ll probably feel very little in your hands. In most cases, however, you will notice that the energy builds slowly and surely the longer you hold your hands there. This may take some time. You can keep your hands in one position for ten, twenty, forty minutes or even an hour. Over time. The energy in your hands will gradually feel stronger and stronger until it appears to reach a peak in intensity. Sometimes the feeling of energy stays at this peak level for a long time and suddenly reaches a plateau of even greater intensity. More often, the energy begins to level off at some point and can then subside slightly.

The General Pattern – You feel a moderate sensation in your hands that builds to a peak and then decreases. This is the pattern you will probably encounter most often. Sometimes the feeling of energy you feel increases to a very high level and seems to plateau. At this point it’s often a good idea to use some fire breathing to see if you can take it to an even higher level. As you work to direct the energy and increase its intensity, you will eventually notice that it levels off or decreases. In this case, it may be time to move your hands elsewhere.

The Intense Pattern – You feel a very strong energy in your hands that subsides over time. This pattern is most often felt when working with acute symptoms or in a person whose body, for whatever reason, is very receptive to the energy. It looks like this: Being aware of the sensations in your hands and the patterns that energy work usually follows will help you determine how long you should hold your hands in a particular position. You can also just ask your friend how he is doing. If all the pain is gone or has subsided significantly, that’s usually a good sign that the job is done for now.

The Complete Pattern: When you run the energy, sometimes everything seems to be working well, and at some point during the session you may notice that you don’t feel anything in your hands. When you pull your hands away, your hands will feel a strong tingling sensation. This is an indication of the full pattern. The entire pattern occurs when the person has absorbed as much energy as their body wants to absorb. At this point, you no longer have any sensation in your hands when you touch the person. When you come back in ten or twenty minutes, your body may be able to respond to a higher vibration and “absorb” more energy.

The Step Pattern When you have pranic energy, you sometimes feel like the intensity has reached its peak. At this point if you do some fire breathing. You may notice that your hands are now vibrating at an even higher frequency. Just when you think the energy has reached its peak and will no longer rise, practicing the breath of fire again can cause the energy to rise again and again, like climbing stairs. At some point the energy really levels out, subsides, or the feeling leaves your hands, and you know you’re done.

Chapter 4

frequently asked Questions

“Life is not a problem to be solved, but a mystery to be experienced.”

Frank Herbert

Practice pranayama healing techniques

Do you get stronger through practice?

What if I don’t practice for a long time? Will I lose my ability?

Should you expend energy when you’re alone?

Is it important for the person receiving the pranayama healing session or the practitioner to believe that it will help it work?

Pranayama Healing and Personal Energy

Do you use up your energy when you do pranayama healing?

Do you sometimes feel exhausted when attending pranayama healing sessions?

No, you don’t get drained at all. As I have mentioned several times, breathing techniques are an essential part of the work. As long as you maintain breathing, you can maintain a very high resonance. The other person simply and automatically begins to match your vibration. You don’t give away your energy, you hold a field and let the other person come and adapt to that field so that you don’t become exhausted in pranayama healing. If anything, the opposite is true: the work appears to make the practitioner feel more healed and uplifted. Personally, doing healing work for hours makes me very hungry, and that is a symptom that can be easily corrected. Some practitioners have complained that late-night sessions left them feeling so energized that they had trouble sleeping. This seems to happen to a small percentage of people who use pranayama healing, so I would recommend that they do their sessions earlier in the day. Occasionally someone doing a session will feel tired afterwards, but this seems to be a response to having experienced healing during the work itself. Remember: When you give a session, you raise your vibration, which leads to healing within you. Sometimes you may need to sleep afterwards. However, this has nothing to do with energy being drained. I find that during pranayama healing sessions I often feel more alert after the session than when I started. Why this? If you let the energy run and do breathing exercises, you will also benefit from the energy. There were several times when I felt tired when I wanted to give a lecture with demonstrations. As I give the short demonstration sessions to the audience, I always find myself becoming more alert and energized. After completing 20 or 30 demonstration healing sessions as part of the lecture, I am quite energized and alert. The longer you let the energy run, the stronger you seem to become both physically and energetically.

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning?

Preparing for a pranayama healing session

What do I need to do to prepare for a session?

Most practitioners believe that simply holding a session cannot achieve these things either. Is it important that I be grounded before a meeting?

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning?

Using your hands in a pranayama healing session

How much pressure do you put on your hands when you run energy?

Why is it important to surround the areas you are working on with your hands? Why not just use one hand?

I’ve noticed that sometimes when you demonstrate pranayama healing you use your palms, but other times you use your thumbs or fingertips. Why are you doing this?

The first question to ask yourself is whether you feel a sensation anywhere in your body that you can feel without touching it. Can you think of any part of your body without touching yourself?

If you can feel your hands, feet, face, or any other part of your body by placing your attention there, then you have a starting point and can build from there.

The power of focused energy

How important is it to be focused during sessions?

The client’s experience of a pranayama healing session

How long does it take for people to know something is happening when they receive a session?

What do people usually feel when they receive a pranayama healing session?

Is it the temperature of your hand that people respond to when they say they experience hot or cold sensations?

Is it ever painful to receive the energy?

Does the energy heal conditions other than what you think you are working on?

That happens often. Because the energy goes where it wants, all sorts of surprising healings occur. The most common are people with headaches who find that their sinus pain has also disappeared. It also works the other way around. People who complain of sinus pain often report that their headaches are gone. Once during one of my classes, two students were treating a woman who had severe sinus pain. When the session ended, the woman said she still had sore sinuses. I explained that it wasn’t a perfect system and that it should be given time. The next day she called me and told me her sinuses were still hurting. I told her that this happens occasionally. She continued that her vision, which had always been 20/200 in her right eye, had suddenly changed and was now 20/25, but her sinuses still hurt! She was overjoyed. By the way, her vision did not stabilize at 20/25 but has fluctuated ever since. As she continues to pour energy into her eyes, the situation gradually improves.

If the energy goes automatically to the places where it is needed, why is it important to try to put your hands directly on the most problematic parts of the body?

Pranayama Healing and the Emotions

How does Pranayama Healing affect the emotions of the person I am working on?

Ending a pranayama healing session

Do the sensations in your hands change when the session ends?

How do you determine how many sessions a person needs? There are no hard and fast rules about how many sessions a person needs. If a person has been suffering from a chronic illness for a long time, help often takes longer than with an acute or more recent illness. A general rule of thumb is to continue working on a client for as long as they need help. I would let the client decide how often they need to come. In certain circumstances, he may want a session two or three times a week, or perhaps even every day for a few days. It all depends. It wouldn’t hurt to schedule a series of sessions if you have a chronic back condition. In the long term we have to see where I make progress.

After a session

What can your client do after a session to improve their healing?

Can Pranayama Healing Be Harmful? Can you ever harm someone by giving them too much energy?

Pranayama healing and other modalities

Do you have any suggestions for using Quantum-1ouch in conjunction with other practical healing techniques?

Can anyone learn to do pranayama healing?

Can people with disabilities, blind or deaf people learn pranayama healing work?

Can children learn pranayama healing?

How different are pranayama alternative practitioners from each other?

Pino, can you give me some pointers on how to conduct a pranayama healing session?

Always maintain your breathing techniques.

Always keep your breath connected to your sensations while you have energy. (This quickly becomes habitual and is the nature of practitioners.)

Stay focused to keep the energy as strong as possible.

Pay close attention to what you feel in your hands and use that information appropriately.

I’m still confused. How can I do pranayama healing work and not be a healer?

Chapter 5

Advanced techniques

Resonance factors

Let the power run

Use breathing techniques.

Connect your breath with the energy.

Your intention to heal is a reaction

Choose to feel love and gratitude.

Have an honest expectation

Emphasize a positive expectation that the body not only can heal, but also has the wisdom to do so, and that it can elevate and improve your resonance. The trick to setting expectations is to always be completely honest about where you stand and expect the best based on your experience and confidence. A good place to start is to say to yourself, “I don’t know if it’s possible to heal this or not, but I’m willing to see what happens and I know that the body has a plan of wholeness that he can.” “You don’t have to know how it’s possible, you just have to have access. I’m open to the fact that this is true. Remember that the body has wisdom and the ability to heal itself that far exceeds human understanding. Believing that miracles can happen opens up new possibilities. Because intention and attention are required to control energy, anticipation is a powerful and valuable factor in raising your vibration. Many of the greatest healers I know were aware of the fact and expectation that incredible healings happen quite often and approached their sessions with a joyful sense of positive anticipation.

Ask for help

Do your best

Let go of attachment to the outcome.

Trust

Advanced exercises for running energy

Creating a vortex of energy

Working with chakras and colors

Full spectrum chakra technique

I learned a variation of this technique from a meditation by a spiritual teacher named Lazar for working with the chakras and have adapted it for healing purposes.

First chakra

Take a few minutes to see how strongly you can transfer the feeling to your first chakra.

Second chakra

Third chakra

The third chakra is located in the solar plexus area, above and below your belly button, about the size of your outstretched hand. Feel a ball of bright yellow light in your stomach and feel it spinning in a comfortable direction. Spend a few minutes evoking as much sensation as possible and use the two to six solar breaths to bring more sensation to the area.

Fourth chakra

Fifth chakra

Sixth chakra

Seventh chakra

Full spectrum, one chakra at a time

Tonung

Breathe-Tone-Technik

Getting the client to raise their vibration

Stacking hands and group sessions

Chapter 6

Advanced techniques

The depth, wonder, power and brilliance of your love is not only more than you know; It’s more than you can ever imagine.

The “What You Love Most” Technique

(Also known as the “Julius Technique”)

Your love can be used to become a great healing force.

Allow yourself to remember and relive someone or something in your life that triggers in you an enormous feeling of love, gratitude, happiness, or joy. Simply open your feelings and think about the person, situation, animal, plant, or whatever it is that lights and inspires your passion.

Allow this emotion to fill your body with as many tactile sensations as possible. Pay attention to where in your body you feel the emotion. For example, when you feel love in your chest, feel it there with as much sensation as you can muster and let it spread throughout your body

Allow the tactile sensations of your love, joy, happiness, or gratitude to flow from your hands and combine them with teaching techniques. It’s that simple. Simply use your intention to move the tactile sensation of the emotion through your body and then out of your hands.

Instead of love, you can use any other extremely positive feeling. Other emotions that you can use positively are enthusiasm, satisfaction, wonder or inspiration.

The hang breath

I discovered slope breathing because I automatically did it myself after twenty years. It requires a level of skill that may be challenging for many beginners.

Harmonious toning

The funnel

Flowers

Working with chakras eight to twelve

Eighth chakra

Symbolically, the eighth chakra represents probable realities and the astral plane and can be contacted below the feet. Imagine a ball of blinding and brilliant white light about twenty to ten inches below your feet. Let the ball rotate in the direction you feel comfortable. What’s important is not only that you imagine it spinning, but that you can also feel a physical sensation when it spins.

Ninth chakra

Tenth, eleventh and twelfth chakras

Unless you know better, I recommend channeling energy from all chakras. You can spin them one at a time or all at once and then let the energy flow from your hands

Asking for help

Raise expectations

Heal the past

Combine multiple techniques

Here are some examples of how you can combine techniques while channeling the energy from your hands and continuing breath work:

Tone while rotating the energy, as in the vortex technique or funnel technique. The higher the tone, the faster the energy rotates.

Spin the chakras one at a time while using the “What You Love Most” technique.

Enter the tissue to be healed as described in Chapter 12 while toning and maintaining a high level of expectation.

One would think that you understand what I’m talking about. Go ahead and create the combinations you like. Have fun!

Chapter 6.1

Keys to always remember

It’s important to trust the process. The healing work may cause temporary pain or other distressing symptoms, all of which are part of the healing. The life force and healing process works with complexity and wisdom beyond our imagination or understanding. If problems occur, keep the power running

Keep your breathing steady.

Connect your breathing with the sensations in your hands.

No one can heal anyone else. The person in need of healing is the healer. The practitioner simply holds a resonance to make this possible.

The energy follows the body’s natural intelligence to bring about the necessary healing. The practitioner pays attention to the “body intelligence” and “chases the pain.”

More questions and answers

Do I have to constantly count to keep track of every breath I take?

No, the count is just a guideline to help you keep breathing. Once you have a feel for breathing, you can easily settle into a rhythm. It is very important to be aware of what you feel in your hands. With each breath you can see how the sensations in your hands change. This can be very useful information, and in and of itself it can be a helpful reminder to keep you breathing.

Have you ever been afraid of what will happen during a session?

There were a few occasions when people reacted strongly to the energy. Looking back, it was because her body was going through a very quick healing process.

On one occasion I demonstrated the usefulness of pranayama healing for treating repetitive strain injuries such as carpal tunnel syndrome. I was at a large company in Silicon Valley with a few thousand employees. The woman who invited me (call her Jane) was the company’s health director, and she had the safety director in the room to witness my work

Jane seemed to be acting like a nervous New Yorker who had just had six cups of coffee. Before I began the sessions with the four people with painful wrist problems, I decided (foolishly) that it would be helpful if I gave Jane a testimonial about the work. I noticed that the back of her occipital crest was extremely uneven. One of the people with wrist problems was an engineer, and when she pressed her thumbs against Jane’s occipital bone, she discovered that it was anything but flat.

As I stood behind Jane, I touched the back of her head with my thumbs and ran my fingers along the sides of her head. A few seconds later I noticed her leaning forward. The next thing I knew, Jane’s knees gave out. I quickly reached under her arms to catch her and help her to the floor.

So there was Jane, lying on the floor with her eyes wide open. The security director picked up her walkie-talkie and yelled, “Code Blue – Emergency in Conference Room #4. Paramedics should be there shortly,” she announced. During this time I continued to run energy into Jane’s head. After about a minute, Jane woke up and told us she felt great and very refreshed, but wondered what she was doing on the floor. The engineer checked the position of her occipital crest and was shocked to find that the bones appeared to be aligned.

The gist of the story is that when energy acts in unpredictable and even disturbing ways, I have found that more energy, not less, is the answer.

To investigate the story, Jane went to a doctor the next day to get checked out. The doctor asked her, “How hard did he press into the back of your head?” She explained that I barely touched the back of her head. The doctor then announced, “There was no way he could have done anything to you back then.”

I was hoping to be strong enough to “knock her down.” I just never thought I would blow her away. Now when I show the movement of the occipital bones, I like sitting people.

How do you decide which of the different techniques to use at any given time?

I have provided you with more techniques than you need. Just find the ones you like to use the most and go for them. I never intended for people to use all different approaches. The important thing is to find what works for you and then have fun. Once you understand the basic principles of the work, you can start finding original ways to direct energy. As long as you breathe and connect that with the energy, whatever you try will work. Some approaches will work better for you than others. This is a system designed to grow and evolve. Write to us and tell us what you have learned. We may post it on our website at www.pranahealingyoga.com

Chapter 7

Change your posture with energy

On the edge

Confronting the impossible

Change your beliefs, but just follow the instructions and honestly see what happens.

Once you’ve practiced the exercises in Chapter 3, you’re ready to move on. At this point you should be able to:

Feel the prana energy through your body and into your hands.

Do the breathing techniques.

Connect your breathing with your sensations.

Keep in mind

When running the energy with the intention of changing a person’s posture, there are a few important things to keep in mind:

This type of manipulation of the skeletal structure is so harmonious,

The bones seem to “melt” again. You rarely hear a clicking or grinding sound like with many chiropractic maneuvers.

You don’t have to decide where or whether the bones should move – the body figures it out on its own. The person’s body intelligence decides what should happen. In most cases, the person’s body chooses to move the bones back into place. For reasons I can only speculate about, the body seems to like having its structure aligned.

Bones move faster when you touch them lightly. Do not try to direct, push or use force as this is counterproductive. People are so conditioned to control situations through the use of violence. This is a case where force is not only unnecessary but also ineffective. Make sure your hands are very relaxed. Many students, especially people who have performed various types of massage or deep tissue work, have a strong tendency to hold tension rigidly in their hands. Let your hands become soft and relaxed. The flow of prana, which I also call the flow of energy, flows through it more easily when you are not tense.

Structural corrections occur more easily when a person is sitting or standing. For some reason, structural realignment occurs most smoothly when people are upright. This is not to say that you can never create change when a person is lying down, but it is easier when a person is sitting or standing. This is very convenient as you can find a place to stand and, in most cases, sit almost everywhere you go

When you allow energy to flow, many types of healing can occur, and only part of this process causes the bones to move. Because the change in posture caused by a light touch is so dramatic and unexpected, I like to demonstrate it to groups. Many who observe this will naturally assume that this work is about a structural realignment. The movement of bones is like the tip of an iceberg because there is so much more going on beneath the surface. Since we are not readily aware of the countless changes that take place at the cellular level, we say that the bones are moving because we can see it.

Sometimes the bones move quickly, sometimes slowly, and occasionally not at all. There are times when the body is very happy to have the structure as it is, and no matter how much energy you put into the system, it will remain structurally the same. It’s just common sense that you can’t fix what isn’t broken. When treating people with chronic back problems, structural changes can be observed within a few minutes, but it can also take ten, twenty or even thirty minutes for the changes to become visible. In most cases, some postural adjustments occur within two to five minutes, sometimes even within seconds.

If you have successfully completed the exercises in Chapter 3, then you are actually ready, even though you may not believe it!

There are two places in the body where the bones move most noticeably and quickly: the hips and the occiput. To see that you can change posture with a light touch, let’s start with the hips.

Measurement and change of hip position

Find someone whose one hip is higher than the other. Some people have long legs and this technique cannot correct that. The vast majority of people can be adjusted if they are not properly aligned.

Place your fingertips on the ileal ridge (top of the hip bone) and press down lightly and evenly on both sides. To see if one side is higher than the other, you need to have your eyes at eye level with the other spot you are measuring. I have to constantly remind students to get down on one knee so they can check if their hips are straight. In many cases the difference will be quite noticeable, in other cases the difference will be insignificant. To test this yourself, I suggest you find some people who are high on a site.

Once you have determined which side is higher and how much higher it is, take your palms and gently place them on the ridge of the ileum. Don’t push down, just start the energy flow. Make a full-body movement, feel full sensations gathering in your hands, and use one of the breathing techniques. For this demonstration, I would suggest that one to four breaths should work quite well. The trick is to continue breathing and directing the energy into the ileum for one to ten minutes. Sometimes the bones move almost immediately as soon as they are touched; sometimes it takes longer.

Be sure to ask the person you are working on if they can feel anything or experience exciting sensations. Many people can feel the energy almost the second they start running.

On the back of the ileum, follow exactly the instructions you used on the front. The ileum is a surprisingly complex structure because it can rotate sideways, up and down, and in all sorts of ways. Sometimes one side is high in the front and the other side is high in the back. It is always a good idea to balance both the front and back of the ileum.

Measuring and changing the position of the occipital crest

Chiropractors have told me that changing the bones of the skull is a great way to get the body to realign the entire spine.

If you slide your thumbs up either side of the neck and press in gently, you will eventually get to the base of the skull. The tissue there is not as soft as the neck because you are now pushing against the bone.

Try to place your thumbs so that they are the same distance from the center of the head, with one thumb on each side. There is usually a small edge on either side where your thumbs can fit comfortably.

Don’t let the person you’re measuring move their hair out of the way. Raising the hair tilts the head and makes it impossible for you to judge whether the occipital ridge is flat or not. Instead, place your thumbs over the hair and push it up.

Look closely at the positions of your thumbs to see if they are even with each other. Adjust your body so that your eyes are level with the back of your head. If you want to get good results, you need to have your eyes at thumb level. Admittedly, some of my students seem capable of this, and others never become proficient.

Have the customer take a seat. The power of this move can be quite remarkable. I saw a woman faint for a few minutes and several others almost faint. These rare individuals are more likely to faint while standing. These extreme reactions are the body’s way of finding a new balance. People with these reactions always felt much better after the session.

With a client in a sitting position, lightly touch the base of the occiput with your thumbs and place your fingertips on the sides of their head. Let the energy flow from your fingertips and use one of the breathing techniques. The skull bones usually move in the first five to twenty seconds that you do this. There is also an advantage to doing this step longer.

If you’ve been able to do the energy exercises in Chapter 3 and have worked with a few people, you should have seen by now that bones actually move. I suggest you enjoy this experience.

Chapter 8

Work for back and neck problems

Love can unite your breath with intention, as if you could focus light and ignite fire.

Work on both sides of the vertebrae

Compensation

Keilbein

Back of head

Keilbein

Back of head

1 cervical spine

2 cervical spine

3 cervical spine

4 cervical spine

5 cervical spine

6 cervical spine

1 Thorax

2 Thorax

3 Thorax

4 Thorax

5 Thorax

6 Thorax

7 Thorax

8 Thorax

9 Thorax

10 Thorax

11 Thorax

12 Thorax

1 lumbar spine

2 lumbar spine

3 lumbar spine

4 lumbar spine

5 lumbar spine

sacrum

coccyx

sacrum

General points to consider for neck and back pain

Ask the person in pain to point to the exact spot where they are in pain. Place your hands there and let the energy flow. Don’t make assumptions about where the pain is. The closer you are to the exact point, the faster the effect occurs.

Use a tripod hand position or palms when touching your client. The tripod is excellent if you are comfortable; Otherwise, use the palms, thumbs, or fingertips. Remember that you can direct the energy from any part of your body when you implement your intention.

Place your hands in the most comfortable position you can find. I recommend that you move if you don’t feel comfortable and find a position that makes you feel comfortable.

Do not use force or pressure when touching. Keep your hands relaxed and let the energy do the work.

Work on people’s necks and backs while sitting or standing. Standing generally works best for the lower back, while sitting works best for the neck. If the tissue is injured, it is probably best for the person to sit or lie down. Most importantly, make sure the person you are working with is comfortable.

The trick is to keep breathing and use one of your chosen energy techniques. Make sure you connect your breathing with the feeling of energy

Hold the points for as long as necessary. Pay attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. It may take as little as a few minutes or require repeated hour-long sessions to help your client. The easiest way to find out is to give energy and ask the person how they are doing.

Track the pain or feeling. Have a dialogue with the person you are working with and let them tell you if the pain has shifted or moved. Change the position of your hands to follow the pain or sensation

Increase the power of your work by having the person you are working on breathe deeply too.

For longer sessions and particularly difficult areas, you can place a person face up or face down on a massage table with their hands on their spine. You can also place the person face up on the massage table with your hands under their spine.

Working with neck pain

Using your fingertips on the sides of your head along the line of the temporal suture, apply energy to the occipital spine for one to two minutes.

Be sure to work on both sides of the cervical vertebrae, paying particular attention to the painful areas.

You may need to pay special attention to the atlas, axis and seventh cervical vertebrae.

Be sure to target the energy to areas of the client’s lower back where there is tension or pain, which may equate to neck pain.

Adjust your hips. Front and back. as shown in the previous chapter.

Working with lower back pain

Adjust hips front and back as previously described

Direct energy to the areas of pain.

Direct energy into the neck, particularly areas of tension or pain. Follow the guidelines for working on the neck listed in the previous section.

Continue the dialogue and chase the pain or sensation.

Working with sciatica

Follow the guidelines for working your lower back with these supplements:

Use your thumbs and pay special attention to the areas of the buttocks shown here. Work on both sides of the buttocks, paying more attention to the painful side.

Direct energy to any area of the leg or foot that is feeling pain. Go ahead and chase the pain or feeling wherever it takes you.

Treat any other area that feels pain during or after the session.

Middle back pain

If there are problems in the middle of the back, you need to often do relaxation exercises in the neck and lower back. You can do as follows:

Direct energy into the occiput and neck.

Direct energy into the lower back and balance the hips.

Treat the painful area.

These simple guidelines will work wonders for most back pain caused by misalignments and injuries. Of course, this is not the intended treatment for back pain due to kidney problems.

Chapter 9

Work throughout the body

Open your eyes, pause to wonder, and stand in awe as you realize the true nature of your gifts.

healing Hands

The basic hand sandwich (hold the mayonnaise) sandwiching means having one hand on one side and the other hand on the other side of the body part you are treating.

Grasp the part of the body that needs to be healed with your hands as close as possible to and on either side of the problem you are working on. If possible, go directly to the specific area. Of course, use common sense. That is, do not put your hands in a wound or touch a burn. A workaround may mean placing your hands above and below or on either side of the point you want to focus the energy on.

Use your fingertips or a tripod to direct energy into very small areas. The concentration of energy works very well in such cases. This also helps you bring your hands closer to the center of the area that needs healing.

Pursue the pain. Have a dialogue with the person you are working on and track their sensations or pain on their body.

Make sure your body feels comfortable while working.

The trick is to continue breathing throughout the session.

Running energy directly on or near the surface

Since I’m not with you when you practice, I’ll have to settle for nagging you from a distance. The trick is to keep breathing!

Special conditions

Headache

occiput

Bone

Atlas

axis

Cervical spine

Cervical vertebrae

Thorax
Thorax

Rest your head around the area of pain.

Balance the occipital spine.

Introduce energy into the seams.

You may also need to direct energy into the atlas and axis.

Eye problems

Sinus-Problems

Sinus problems often respond very quickly to the direct introduction of energy. Use fingertips or palms

Temporal-Mandibulargelenk (TMJ)

throat

Place your hands gently on or around the person’s neck. There is no need to worry about doing anything wrong.

Carpal tunnel syndrome and repetitive strain injuries

Be sure to do the following:

Direct energy directly into the wrists. Make sure the person’s hand is in a comfortable upright position, as shown here.

Direct energy to the area of the seventh cervical vertebra and the first thoracic vertebra.

If you have pain in your lower back, make sure you energize there too.

Shoulder problems

Direct energy directly to the area that hurts. Be sure to ask the person you are working on to make sure your hands are in the correct position.

Also try channeling energy from the armpit into the shoulder, as shown.

If these movements were unsuccessful, try working the seams, occipital back, neck, lower back and hips, then go back to the shoulder.

windpipe

Lunge

esophagus

Heart

spleen

Adrenal glands (above the kidneys).

liver

Kidneys

Qvarie

Small intestine

Blase

genitals

colon

Rectum

organs

Simply introducing energy into the heart can improve blood pressure, cardiac arrhythmias and heart palpitations.

pineal gland

Pituitary gland

thyroid

Hypothalamus

Thymusdrüse

adrenal glands (above the kidneys)

Lymph nodes

spleen

Pancreas

ovaries (in women)

Lymphatic vessels

testicles (in men)

immune system

You can use the energy to rebuild or heal the immune system:

Direct energy into the endocrine glands, which include the pineal gland, pituitary gland, thyroid, thymus, adrenal glands, ovaries and testes.

Conduct energy into the

Lymphatic system, located primarily around the neck, armpits, chest, breasts, abdomen, and inner thighs.

Direct energy to important organs – heart, lungs, liver and kidneys.

Direct energy to where the client is in pain.

With these few simple guidelines, you can do incredible healing work with your family, friends, and those lucky enough to be around you.

Chapter 10

self-healing

The heart of healing is the heart.

Apply energy to yourself

Guidelines for self-healing sessions

Practice channeling energy into yourself regularly and often. Self-healing may require many sessions. So if you practice full body movements and running energy, it can be a good idea to give yourself strength. You can practice while watching TV or movies, or even reading a book. This can be a one-handed session unless you find a unique way to hold the book.

Identify any part of your body that you can comfortably reach and place your hands directly on the areas you cannot pinch. For example, it would be difficult to clamp your own heart between your hands, so place both hands over your heart.

If you are working on an inaccessible area, such as the middle of the back, you can use distance healing techniques as described in Chapter 12.

To make sessions as powerful as possible, pump the breath by exaggerating breathing techniques. If you lie down, you can do the breath of fire for much longer without feeling dizzy. This way you can change your vibration more profoundly and be more effective. People with certain heart conditions may not be able to do this safely. If you are unsure, ask your doctor.

This can be a good time to try combinations of techniques. You can use more than one technique at the same time. For example, you could use toning and the enhanced resonance technique described in Chapter 12 while working on yourself.

Be patient. Many people are happy to spend forty or sixty minutes working on a friend, but barely find five or ten minutes to work on themselves.

Chapter 11

Healing animals

“Monkeys are my favorite people.”

Unknown

Just like with my human patients, I never know what the energy will do. I just trust that something extraordinary will happen.

Guidelines for working with animals

Be sure to directly energize or direct any area that you feel needs healing. A diagnosis from a veterinarian can help you pinpoint the problem.

Be sure to maintain your breathing techniques throughout the work because the trick is to keep breathing!

Since the animal cannot speak, pay close attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. This will help you know how long you should keep your hands in one place.

Realize that you won’t do it “wrong.” Energy finds its way where it needs to go and does what needs to be done.

Deliver a series of sessions if necessary.

When you brush your pet’s hair, try to give him energy at the same time. This works with any type of petting motion, be it scratching behind the ears or rubbing the belly.

Try to energize them before or during bathing. For a special treat, you can also add energy to the bath water (see Chapter 15). This works especially well if baths aren’t on your pet’s wish list.

They can also put energy into their food and water, as well as your own food (see Chapter 15). Animals primarily eat canned food, which increases the energetic signature of their food.

I am sure you will be quite surprised and delighted with the results of your work.

Chapter 12: Distance Healing

Infinitely faster than the speed of light, our compassion and prayers move at the speed of love.

Be connected

Numerous books have been written about the strange and almost magical world of quantum physics. In Gary Zukav’s beautiful book The Dancing W Li Masters he writes:

I have often thought about our connection in an intellectual or spiritual sense, but the real meaning of physical connection to one another was brought home to me in a powerful and personal way when I met Dr. C. Norman Shealy, MD, Ph., attended. D. at his clinic in Springfield, Missouri. After demonstrating how pranayama healing affects posture and showing him how effective it is in treating some of his most difficult chronic pain patients, Dr. Shealy to investigate how pranayama healing could remotely affect brainwave patterns. This was something I had honestly never tried before. I wasn’t at all confident about the outcome.

Distance healing

The data above represents a baseline of brain wave activity after the subject had rested for thirty minutes.

Five minutes after the distance healing began. Note the significant increase in delta activity.

After thirty minutes of distance healing, all brain wave activity has become profoundly silent.

Here are just a few examples to give you a taste of how distance healing can work:

Distance Healing Guidelines

Connect with your spirituality. This is useful for those who are prone to this. Asking for help can only improve the work.

Use breathing and let the energy flow. As with all pranayama healing, the trick is to keep breathing, so keep breathing and let the energy flow powerfully from your hands

Combine different techniques. Distance healing can be a great opportunity to experiment and combine different techniques during the session.

Take your time. Distance healing sessions can last thirty, forty-five. or sixty minutes. This can require a lot of commitment from the practitioner.

Don’t be tied to the outcome. As with other pranayama healing works. It is important to keep in mind that you are simply holding a resonance and that you are responsible for the healing.

The amplified resonance technology

Place your hands on the client as you normally would and begin letting the energy flow.

As you direct the energy from your hands, use your mind to “penetrate” the tissue to be treated. With each breath, keep your mind in the tissue you are working on and stay there while simultaneously channeling the energy from your hands.

Chapter 13: Emotional Healing

Beneath the murky waters of unwanted and denied emotions lie the vast and hidden treasures of who we truly are.

Emotions and the healing process

If you shine light on a shadow, it disappears.

It is well beyond the scope of this book to deal with the main problems of emotional causality. Here are some approaches you can use in your pranayama healing sessions.

Guidelines for working with emotions that arise during a session

Grounding: Maintain the sensations in your body as I described in Chapter 3. This will help you stay grounded and be able to help better. (Grounding is described in Chapter 4)

Direct energy into the occipital spine. This can help break old thoughts and emotional patterns and can sometimes be helpful with addictions.

Use distance healing. Distance healing can be useful when treating psychotherapy patients is not therapeutic, contraindicated or physically impossible.

Chapter 14: Diet and Lifestyle Healing

If you have a hole in the bottom of your bucket, it doesn’t really matter how much water you put in it, otherwise it will all spill out.

Fix Me Doc

Lifestyle habits you might consider

Find stretching and cardiovascular exercises that you enjoy and do them regularly. Moderate exercise is most beneficial.

Practice relaxation for at least ten to fifteen minutes a day. Meditation can be helpful.

Focus your thoughts and feelings on what you love, your dreams, and your gratitude.

Expressing stored emotions honestly and releasing them in a self-actualizing way.

Do what you love, even if just for a few minutes a day, and engage in life.

Give up smoking, excessive alcohol consumption and dangerous drugs.

Nutritional suggestions

Avoid food additives, preservatives and processed foods such as white flour and white rice.

Many people cannot tolerate wheat, cheese or milk; There may also be other foods that cause allergic reactions. If you have doubts, try this simple test. Take your pulse on an empty stomach and then eat a suspicious food. Check your pulse again after fifteen, thirty, and sixty minutes. If your heart rate has increased by ten percent or more, you are probably allergic to this food and may need to avoid it

Eat grains and starchy and leafy vegetables. About 25% of your diet should consist of meat, fish, eggs, nuts, seeds and milk.

Take nutritional supplements. These can include:

Vitamin A, 10,000 units per day

B complex

Vitamin C, 1000 mg with bioflavonoids once or twice daily

MCHA Calcium 1000-1500 mg per day as needed

Magnesium glycinate or taurate 500-750 mg per day

Zink 15-25 mg pro Tag

Copper 1.5-2.5 mg per day MSM Sulfur 50LI0UgaDay

Vitamin E. 400 to 1200 units per day

Selenium, 200 megabytes per day

Calcium deficiency syndromes

Chapter 15: Funny Stuff

“Life is a gift and our task is to learn to accept it.

– Lazarus

Have fun with inanimate objects, belts and gloves

Have fun with your expensive guitar or Stradivarius

My first reaction was that I was quite excited and excited to think that I could have so much influence on the resonance of the wood. My next reaction was to deny that this couldn’t possibly be true. I cleaned the guitar, bought new strings and decided it was just my imagination. After the new strings had been in place for three days, I carefully turned them with my electric tuner and concluded that they would certainly sound

Fun with water and food, recharging water

If you want to supply life energy to each of your hundred trillion cells, all you need to do is recharge and drink water. Filling with water or another liquid is quite easy. Using both hands, simply hold the glass or bottle with just your palms or fingertips so that your left and right hands are not touching each other, and then allow energy to flow into the water for a few minutes or more. This hand position forces the energy to move into the fluid between your hands.

Recharge on water with someone you love

Load up on wine

Grapefruitsaft

Convert energy into food or drinks and vitamins

Fun with people: chakra charging for two

Funny star

Keeping a partner

Remember, the trick is to keep breathing! Am I repeating myself? Yes, and I do it on purpose. Because it is so fundamental: the art is to keep breathing!

Sex – How to make a good thing even better

Group hug

Work with what you know

Chapter 16: The Future of Energy Healing

Energy is the actual substance behind the appearance of matter and forms.

– Dr. Randolph Stone

Introduce

If you view the life force as real, I see healers working in every hospital, emergency room, and ambulance. Groups of healers would work on patients several times a day. DR.

If Life Force is accepted, I expect all professional sports teams to travel with a team of experienced practitioners. There is no question that this work accelerates the healing of injuries.

I imagine that life healing work is widespread in both developed and third world countries.

Ultimately, I can imagine that this work will lead to breakthroughs that I cannot even imagine today.

If a phenomenon is not due to a psychological mechanism but is caused by an energy force, we are now discussing the creation of a new branch of science. I like to think of it as “life”

Force Science” as the name is universal and would encompass a variety of natural healing methods.

I see a day when healing becomes a universal capability and the level of pain and suffering on the planet is reduced to a small fraction of what we see today. I have seen families grow closer through their practice of healing one another. I foresee a day when the family of humanity can draw closer together through the innate and universal power of mutual love through the use of this healing energy. Healing technology that has to be experienced to be believed. By using only very light touch, you can greatly speed up the healing response in yourself or others. The results are so quick and impressive that, for example, you can see bones spontaneously realign with just a light touch. Because the body decides where to place these bones, you don’t have to worry about doing anything wrong. Beyond structural realignment, pain and inflammation are rapidly reduced while organs, systems and glands are brought into balance.

The process is very similar to learning to ride a bike. Before you start, the idea of sitting upright on two skinny wheels probably seems pretty impossible. When you start to stay upright, it may seem like a miracle at first, but after a while it becomes completely natural and second nature. When you first observe the results of pranayama healing, the experience will often surprise you and be unforgettable. As with riding a bicycle, what initially seemed miraculous to us becomes natural over time.

Additionally, there is great joy and satisfaction in knowing that you can help others in their healing process. A little warning in advance: I believe that this joy is contagious.

I think that’s where consciousness starts to have an influence. Such a point where consciousness and matter intersect, that this connection exists at a quantum level (subatomic level) and that this extraordinary connection between mind and matter is accessible to us through our love and intention. By harnessing the innate power of our love, we can dynamically and positively activate the body’s healing process. From DNA to bones, every cell and system responds effortlessly to the healing vibration of your love. The following are some interesting things I would like you to know about Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing: Practitioners of all practical healing modalities who have studied Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing in Bali, Indonesia and throughout Southeast Asia told me that it significantly increased the power or effectiveness of their healing practice. Chiropractors consider it an advanced form of chiropractic. Physical therapists consider it a more effective form of physical therapy. Similar. Acupuncturists have told me that it is an advanced form of acupuncture. Reiki masters call it “Reiki empowerment” or “turbocharging Reiki.” Pranayama Healing: The energy of healing combines seamlessly with numerous other techniques to increase its effectiveness: massage, shiatsu, Jin Shin Do, acupressure, polarity, cranial-sacral, therapeutic touch, healing touch, and so on. Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal is a wonderful stand-alone therapy for people without prior training. This is perhaps the easiest healing technique to learn. Almost anyone can learn to do extraordinary healing work after two days of training. It is so simple that you can easily learn from this book. Children can usually learn this work almost immediately. Pranayama Healing: The energy for healing will empower people to relieve tremendous pain and suffering from friends and loved ones. It is truly one of the essential life skills that we should all know. On a purely selfish and personal level, I want to live in a world where healing is seen as real, where healing is widely practiced, and where the kind and generous good nature of humanity can be easily expressed. Because of these and numerous other heartfelt desires, I invite you to go on a wondrous journey of discovery with me – the discovery of pranayama healing: the energy for healing.

“It is not important that you know everything,

but only the important things.”

Miguel de Unamuno

Chapter 1 Discovery

A firmly anchored blessing

Café sessions

“My mother is in a lot of pain – can she please sit here?” asked a woman who appeared to be in her 60s. My friend and I stood up from the bench in the bookstore and invited the women to take our seats. The very old woman was hunched over and breathing very heavily as she sat down painfully and very slowly. I asked the daughter what her mother’s problem was. worried that she might need help. She told me that her mother was in a lot of pain. For about thirty seconds. I debated internally whether I should get involved in this matter or not, but the “healer” prevailed. I explained to the daughter that my job involves using a form of hands-on healing where I touch the painful area very lightly, and asked her mother if I would like to do that. She spoke to her mother in French, and the older woman said that was fine. In my typical fashion, I do it all over my office. I was often seen giving healing sessions at concerts, lectures, movies, golf courses, seminars, supermarkets, or wherever I happened to be. I call these “café sessions.” I asked the mother to point to the place where she was in pain. The daughter translated and a moment later I was kneeling with my hands on her mother’s aching lower back. She was breathing very heavily and her face was contorted in pain as I began to “run energy through my hands.” Within five minutes, the older woman’s face appeared peaceful. She turned to me and simply said, “Thank you, I’m feeling better now.” The two women stood up, smiled at me and left the bookstore without another word. I immediately sat back down on the bench and picked up the book, ready to pick up where we left off. To my surprise, my friend was visibly quite shaken by the experience. Although she and I had enjoyed a casual friendship for several years, she had somehow escaped my relentless encounter with people’s skepticism. “How can you just pick up the book after such an experience?” She demanded an explanation that healing was an everyday experience. Although these experiences were unexpected to me when I first practiced Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, over the years I had become accustomed to them and even learned to expect them!

Early confusions

Over the many years, events like the one mentioned above have become relatively commonplace for me, but I sometimes forget that for too many other people, such events can be quite confusing to their systems. To be honest, I had quite a bit of excitement myself when I first learned to do this kind of work.

Hero Gus

Gus is a yoga teacher who I met in 2015 during a Balinese healing yoga teacher training. And in fact he made up a number of stories that seemed completely unbelievable to me. He then asked one of the audience members to act as a volunteer. The friend who had invited me to class stepped forward. We took a few minutes as a group to examine my friend’s posture. He had never noticed before that his spine had a pronounced “S” curve: one shoulder was much higher than the other, one hip was higher, and so on. Gus just worked very matter-of-factly, touching one spot, then another. He clearly showed us how badly the occipital spine (at the base of the skull) was misaligned. He began to breathe deeply, lightly touching the base of her skull for just a few seconds. The ridge immediately appeared to be completely flat. He touched her hips, her shoulders and ran his hands down her back. Honestly, I couldn’t believe my eyes as I watched bones seem to fuse together. Within ten to fifteen minutes, her spine was almost straight and her hips and shoulders were properly aligned. To put it mildly, I was amazed! I immediately came to three important conclusions. The first conclusion was that Gus Wira possessed a rare and incredible gift. The second conclusion was that no one else would ever be able to learn this. The third conclusion was that I would never learn. At the end of the day I found that I could barely move the bone positions with a light touch. I was shocked. Luckily, I was wrong on all three counts. I soon became Gus’ friend and neighbor, and I often spend time at his house, watching him at work and trying to figure out how and why he was so much more powerful than the people he trained. For the next few years, I spent hours every day practicing directing the energy. Eventually, I became creative in my attempts to get the work done and was able to discover new ways to amplify energy and increase my strength. I got to the point where Gus liked my work.

Come on

I think the most excitement I felt in this healing work came about two years after I first learned the basic technique from Gus. I was in Denpasar demonstrating Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing to a group of about eight people. Ayu had volunteered to be the subject of my demonstration. She had severe osteoporosis and was stooped. She looked at the ground as she walked. I had her put on a button down shirt backwards so we could get a good look at her back. I was quite shocked when I saw her spine for the first time. Every vertebra was severely misaligned. One vertebra was deflected far to the left, the next one deeper was much further to the left and the one underneath was somehow massively pushed to the right. Some bones stuck out further than I ever thought possible. They looked like dinosaur bones. Other bones were badly dented. Looking at her back, it was easy to see why Ayu was hunched over when she walked. I began channeling energy into her spine. I worked on one vertebra at a time, spent a minute or two there, and then went to the next one and did the same thing. After about fifteen minutes, people in the group started commenting, “Does this look better, or is it just my imagination?” Another fifteen or twenty minutes later, I heard comments like, “I’m pretty sure it is now looks better.” It seemed that the bones were gradually finding a better aligned position. After the next fifteen minutes the comments were like, “Oh my God, it’s so much better!” After an hour and fifteen minutes we were all completely amazed, I could hardly believe my eyes. Every vertebra in Ayu’s spine was now in a straight line. The heavily pushed out vertebrae now seemed to be in a natural position, now they seemed to be pushed out inwards. Ayu stood up and suddenly she was much taller than me, whereas before we were face to face in her bent position. Ayu’s daughter came into the room and started crying when she saw her mother standing upright. Mother and daughter hugged each other and cried. The people in the room couldn’t stop talking about it and I was just as amazed as everyone else. The Swirls That Were Disgusting By the time I arrived at my friend’s house in Denpasar where I was staying, the day’s events had upset my beautiful and comfortable beliefs. I remember sitting on the floor with my cheek against the wall, thinking about what had just happened. Suddenly I heard a loud and very credible voice in my head saying, “THAT DIDN’T HAPPEN!” For a brief moment I believed it. Then I protested to myself, remembering how people had said that they thought their spine was starting to look better, the way the vertebrae moved until they were all aligned again. I remembered her standing up very straight and tall and crying gratefully with her daughter. “No,” I protested to myself, “it actually happened! That is real.”

The little Yorkshire Terrier

After letting the energy run for about a minute or two, I felt the shaking stop and the small muscles under my hands relax. Out of curiosity, I kept the power running. After a few more minutes, the dog did something unexpected: he stretched his front paws as far forward as possible and his back paws as far back as possible and lay completely relaxed. “Hey Lola, this is fun.” I thought. I continued to run energy into the dog, and then Lola suddenly rolled onto his back, front paws stretched forward, back paws back, and my hands on his stomach. This pet looked like it was having a pleasant day at the beach, stretched out and drinking in the sun. I had never seen a dog do something like that, and I had never heard of a dog doing something like that. At this point it was beginning to occur to me that some pretty remarkable things might happen during these sessions, and I wasn’t quite as distraught as I had been during my session with Ayu.

Gus’ gallbladder

Chapter 2

Resonance, life force and the principles of pranayama healing

resonance

There is a mystery and a miracle in the seemingly simple function of resonance. All people and particles dance to its power, from the galaxies to the subatomic. If a piano and a guitar were both in tune and a G was played on the piano, the G string on the guitar would also vibrate. Sound waves moving in the air transfer the acoustic energy from the piano to the guitar. Likewise, tuned oscillators, things that can oscillate at the same frequency, require very little work to transfer energy from one to another. In this example, the guitar’s string absorbs the piano’s energy waves because it is tuned to the same frequency. When similarly tuned oscillators are present, they form what is known as a resonant system. The strings of the guitar and piano vibrate together. If pendulum-type grandfather clocks were mounted on a wall and their pendulums oscillated out of phase with each other, their pendulums would lock in phase and strike together within a few days. In this case, the energy transferred through the common wall would be enough to bring the clocks into phase with each other. This is entrainment, a phenomenon that allows two similarly tuned systems to align their movement and energy so that they match in rhythm and phase. This phenomenon also occurs in the field of electronics. If you have similarly tuned resonant circuits that oscillate at similar frequencies, the slower circuit will increase to match the speed of the faster one. In both examples we can see how energy is transferred from one similarly tuned system to another. What can we learn from it? First, when two systems vibrate at different frequencies, there is a driving force called resonance that causes the two systems to transfer energy from one to the other. When two similarly tuned systems oscillate at different frequencies, another aspect of this energy transfer, called entrainment, causes them to align and oscillate at the same frequency. Entrainment is the process by which things adjust their movement and energy to match rhythm and phase. This also seems to work with biological systems. On warm nights in many parts of the world, fireflies gathering in a tree light up randomly. Soon everyone will be turning their lights on and off in a coordinated manner. I have often heard crickets or frogs all finding the same rhythm and coordinating their sounds. In these cases, nature finds it useful, or perhaps economical, to take individuals along rhythmically. Perhaps over time, through a more mysterious process, women who share a house or dorm room will find that their menstrual cycles also move rhythmically. Scientists have found that even disembodied animal hearts, when kept alive in a laboratory and placed close to each other, entrain – the individual hearts then begin to beat in unison. The process appears to be universal. Perhaps Itzhak Bentov was right in his fascinating 1977 book “Stalking the Wild Pendulum.” He explains, “We may think of illness as a disordered behavior of one or other of our body organs. When a strong harmonizing rhythm is applied to it, the interference pattern of waves that represents the organ can begin to beat in unison again.” He postulates that this theory may be the reason why energy healing works. I agree. When two things vibrate at different frequencies through resonance and entrainment, either the lower vibration rises, the higher vibration falls, or they meet in the middle. In “Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal,” practitioners learn to increase the vibration of their hands to a very high frequency through breathing and meditation techniques. When they bring their hands near another person in pain, the client’s body resonates like a similarly tuned circuit and is picked up by the practitioner’s hands. Love is the universal vibration that allows people to transmit healing energy from one to another. In his book “Loving Hands Are Healing Hands,” Bruce Berger writes: “Sympathetic resonance describes the tendency of two waveforms with the same degree of arc to resonate sympathetically together, energize each other, and communicate universally with one another.” Thus, waveforms of the same length and frequency become one another during of the entire creation carry and influence each other. This is key to understanding one of the dynamics that hold creation together and to understanding our theory of the body as the energy of sacred sound.” When working with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal, the practitioner maintains the highest vibration possible, which is becomes the dominant frequency. The “healer” (also called the client or patient), the person whose body is healing, will simply adapt and align with the vibration of the practitioner. A spiritual teacher named Lazaris said, “The definition of a great healer is someone who was very sick and quickly recovered.” In my opinion, anyone who claims to be able to heal others is either ignorant, false, arrogant, or delusional . They simply provide the resonance energy that allows others to heal themselves. The practitioner simply has an enormously strong harmonizing energy and the clients adapt to this vibration. The innate body intelligence of the person receiving the energy will do whatever the body deems useful to bring about healing. The body heals itself with an unimaginable level of intelligence. Western civilization often takes for granted the body’s innate healing ability, but it is the true healer. When we look at the cells in our body, we see that we have hundreds of billions of cells that are constantly feeding themselves with oxygen and the food we eat, releasing carbon dioxide and other waste products. These cells are also busy reproducing and healing themselves, with thousands of microscopic changes taking place every minute of every day! It’s a good thing I don’t have to keep track of all this activity, because I’m already having a hard time keeping myself to remember where I left my keys. Without the breathing and meditation techniques learned in Pranayama Healing: The Energy for Healing, a practitioner can become immersed in the client’s vibration and become drained by the experience. This is not the case with Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal as long as we use the techniques to maintain a naturally high resonance. Perhaps one day healers will be known as resonant doctors.

vitality

“No, I have no idea what water is,” said the fish.

“Why do you ask?”

Principles

Love is a universal vibration; Love communicates with all species, functions on all levels, and expresses our true nature. It is the basis of all healing and the essence of life force.

Energy follows thought. The practitioner uses intention and various meditations to create a high-energy field and uses this field to surround the area to be healed.

Resonance and participation cause the area to be healed to adapt its vibration to that of the practitioner. The practitioner simply raises the new resonance and holds it.

The energy follows the body’s natural intelligence to bring about the necessary healing. The practitioner pays attention to the “body intelligence” and “chases the pain.”

The practitioner also experiences healing through the work. Breathing increases your life force.

Each person’s gifts in life and healing are unique. Some people are particularly skilled at treating specific illnesses.

Healing can be done remotely and can be very effective. Pranayama healing can be easily and effectively combined with other healing methods.

Chapter 3

healing Hands

“I believe that the best medicine is the gentlest treatment that produces the maximum healing response.” – Andrew Weil, MD

Healing and chopsticks

Be a “healer.”

Some would have us believe that becoming a naturopath requires many years of hard work and discipline. They would have us believe that only the most brilliant, gifted and educated among us could ever hope to achieve such a title. If the truth is told, children, seniors, and everyone in between can learn to become health practitioners. I would even say that doctors and people with postgraduate degrees can learn this healing work. There were many celebrated “healers” whose talents were well documented and recognized as genuine. However, most of them had no explanation for what they were doing or how it happened. The importance of pranayama healing is that we now have a cognitive explanation of how to stimulate the healing process and a proven method for teaching others how to do this successfully. Since the true healer is the person receiving the energy, the practitioner merely acts as a catalyst that allows the healer to heal themselves. and to access and utilize a higher vibrational field of energy. During this process the truth about healing is as follows:

Healing is real. Becoming a highly effective health practitioner is one of the easiest skills to learn.

Healing is a great joy. Anyone with a strong desire can learn this.

From now on you can learn to be an exceptional naturopath!

It starts with love

Basic energy exercises

Exercise 1: Feel your finger

Hold a finger in the air and spend at least two minutes feeling as much sensation as possible in your finger. Tune into the sensation in your finger and focus on intensifying your awareness. 2. Feel the skin wrap around your finger. Try to feel the blood as it flows through your finger. Use your imagination and try to feel how your fingernail sits on your finger. Try to feel the sensation under your fingernail. The key is to use your focused attention to fully feel your finger. The basic assumption is that energy follows thought. Wherever you place your attention, energy follows you. By increasing the sensations in your finger by moving and holding the energy there, you also cause physiological changes. These sensations may seem like ordinary feelings in your body, but as you will see, you are feeling life energy. Most people will say that they feel a tingling sensation in their fingers. Some people describe the feeling as vibrating, buzzing, fizzy, or hot. Because everyone experiences things differently. People probably use different words. Some people describe the energy as heat, throbbing, thickness, heaviness or simply as a heightened awareness of the finger itself. Feeling life energy is no stranger to us. Rather, the life force is an energy that we have always felt but that we simply have not learned to recognize. If you are alive, and since you are reading this I assume you are, you feel it every minute of every day.

If you don’t feel any of these sensations, imagine stroking your finger with a feather. Stroke this imaginary feather back and forth across your finger. Now pay close attention to the sensation you feel in your finger. Take about a minute to feel a feeling. This sensation may not seem like much, and you may use a word to describe it that I haven’t used, but whatever it is, I suggest that you use this sensation as a starting point for experiencing the energy . If you don’t feel any sensations in your finger, I recommend you work with the other exercises and see if you can create sensations in other parts of your body. During the exercise, some of you may experience a tingling sensation throughout your hand or other parts of your body. If this happens, it’s okay and it means you’re doing wonderfully well. You start spontaneously with the next exercise.

Exercise 2: Feel your body parts

Take off your shoes and then, while sitting or lying down, have your friend stroke them gently upwards, from your feet to your ankles, for a few seconds. The touch should cover as much surface area as possible on the feet and ankles in a gentle, stroking motion for only about two to five seconds. After this upward movement, your friend should let go and not touch you. The purpose of this exercise is to help you feel as much sensation as possible in your feet and ankles. Ideally, you should feel your feet with the same intensity that you previously felt in your finger. A friend’s touch is helpful in focusing your attention. Letting go is also an essential part of the exercise because it allows you to feel the sensations in your body without being touched. If not. If you can’t create feeling in your feet, ask your friend to stroke them again. If you still don’t feel anything, ask your friend to move on to the next step.

When you are ready and feel these sensations well, ask your friend to place her hands on the area just above the ankles for a few seconds and move them up toward your shins, then release them. Continue to the rest of the body, stroking the shins, knees, thighs, hips, lower pelvis, stomach, chest, neck and up to the head. Then go down from the head to the shoulders, arms and hands. This toe-to-head stroking pattern is useful for stimulating directed energy flow when allowing the energy to flow through your body and when conducting a healing session. We’ll do the back of the body later.

You are done when you feel the prana energy throughout your body.

Change locations with your friend and use the same techniques to give them the same experiences.

If you are doing this alone, touch your own feet and stroke upwards for about two to five seconds and then release. Feel as many sensations as possible and repeat the upward motion as many times as necessary. Because another person’s touch is less predictable than your own, you may need to pay a little more attention and concentration when working alone. Continue stroking up the body to the head, then down the shoulders and arms, ending with the hands.

What to do if you don’t feel any body sensation anywhere?

I have found that one to two percent of the people I teach are kinesthetically impaired. This means they have a hard time feeling any sensations in their body. I have found that these people can still learn this, but it requires more effort and concentration than someone who has access to full-body sensations. If you find that you cannot feel the sensations of others, try focusing your attention on the parts of the body that are being caressed. Punctual. Sensation will awaken. Admittedly it’s not easy, but with a little practice it can be done. I have found that most people will be able to create feelings. You can still do the healing work but may also require more concentration.

Exercise 3: Long Sweeps

We follow the same pattern of gentle, sweeping movements as in the last exercise. However, this time have your friend make longer movements, about 50 centimeters long. Again, the touch is light (your friend won’t heal here) and the touch lasts two to five seconds. Have your friend perform a sweeping touch from feet to knees. Use your attention and intention to focus your senses on that area, then invite your friend to either repeat the movement or continue.

The purpose of touching in longer movements is to move energy through your body more fluidly and consciously. We create a gentle wave of prana energy in our body. After your friend lets go, feel the sensations in your body as strongly as possible. The goal is to get these areas of your body to tingle, vibrate, buzz, or heat up like you did in the first exercise. If you don’t feel any sensation or would like to repeat the touch, ask your friend to touch you again. Be sure to wait until you are ready before moving on to the next position. When a friend completes the process, they can swap places after you and repeat the process.

If you are doing this alone, lightly stroke yourself from your feet to your knees for a few seconds, pausing to feel the sensations. Feel as many sensations as possible. Repeat the blow if you feel no sensation. Gradually work your way up to your head, then down over your shoulders and into your hands.

Restricted areas

If you are having difficulty feeling a certain area, you can ask your friend to touch that place again to make it easier for you to feel it. If you can’t get the feeling into the area after three tries, don’t worry about it and move on to the next area. At this point, that area of your body will “wake up” and be able to feel the energy. In most cases, people learn to wake up difficult areas within hours or perhaps weeks. In rare cases this can take a year or longer. Note that this will not have a significant impact on your power or effectiveness in performing great Pranayama Healing: The Energy to Heal.

Exercise 4: Full body movements on the front and back

A big punch forward

A big swing backwards

Energy Exercise 5: Full body exercise using your mind

Summary of basic energy exercises

Now that you’ve completed the initial prana energy exercises, let’s take a look at what happened here. You have learned to focus attention and sensations on every part of your body. If there are still places where you cannot direct sensation with your focused attention, keep practicing and they will open up for you. It is not necessary for every area to be open and “tingly” to do great healing work. Do your best and you will continue to improve. Once you have done these exercises, you will most likely have reached the point where you no longer need to touch anyone to awaken the process within you. You will be able to bring these sensations into your awareness yourself. You can practice pranic energy almost anytime, anywhere. For example: While standing in line at a bank or grocery store, while talking on the phone, at a boring business meeting, or while watching TV or a movie. Because the experience is so pleasant, I recommend that you practice this exercise often. As you continue to practice this exercise, you will find that you can control the energy significantly more. Repeat these exercises as needed and learn to bring the energy more intensely into each area of your body and channel it into your hands.

Basic breathing techniques

Pranayama Healing: The trick is to keep breathing

The 2-6 breath

This is a very powerful breathing technique to increase energy during your pranayama healing sessions. The name says it all: two bars for inhalation and six bars for exhalation.

The 1-4 breath

If you feel dizzy, hold back.

Fire breathing, followed by 2-6 or 1-4

This is the most powerful breathing exercise to increase energy and can be done up to once per minute. Excessive use of this breath can cause fainting. Avoid using this technique if you feel weak.

Circular breathing

Connect the energy with your breathing

While sitting or standing, mentally perform a full-body swing (see p. 36). The key is to feel as many sensations as possible throughout your entire body. After practicing the previous exercises, most people are now able to use the power of their intention well enough to create sensation in much or all of their body. Place your hands flat together or gently close them to form “loose fists.” Do two or three full-body movements and feel the energy gathering in your hands. Once you feel the sensations in your hands increasing, it’s time to coordinate them with breathing.

Start with a 2-6 breathing pattern. Take a deep breath to the count of two, exhale fully to the count of six, and place all your attention on your hands. Feel the energy building as you exhale. Do this for a few minutes while coordinating the exhalation with the sensation. When doing these exercises, always work to increase the sensation of exhaling. Don’t worry about the energy building up in your hands as you inhale. Focus on the six cycles of exhalation. If you do this correctly, you will feel an increase in sensation in your hands.

With your hands still gently cupped or cupped, begin the 1-4 breathing pattern. Notice how the sensations in your hands change as you do this. Work on feeling the sensations increase as you exhale. This simply requires that you hold your attention in your hands and have the intention to heighten the sensations. Developing the ability to heighten sensations and link them to the breath is one of the most important skills in pranayama healing. If you do this correctly, you should notice that the feeling in the hands increases as the pace of breathing changes. As long as you don’t get dizzy or fall over, the more air you move, the more vitality increases.

Start with the fire breathing technique. Again, your hands should be gently cupped or cupped as you breathe. When you’re done quickly inhaling and exhaling, take a deep breath and move into a 1-4 or 2-6 breathing pattern. Now notice how the sensations in your hands have changed. If you feel an increase in sensations as you exhale, you are doing a great job and are ready for the next step. The next step is to conduct a healing session.

Breathing exercise to connect the upper chakras

Putting everything together

Your first healing session

Find someone you know who is in pain. Ask your friend how much pain or discomfort he or she is feeling. Have your friends rate their discomfort on a scale of 1 to 10, with 10 being the worst. It’s amazing how often people forget how bad the pain was after it’s gone.

Ask your friend where he is hurt. The most important thing is that you don’t make assumptions about where the pain is located. If you ask someone where they are injured and they say their left shoulder hurts, you still need to ask them what part of the shoulder hurts. Unless you are truly psychic, your assumptions on this matter are often wrong. The best way to find out exactly where your friend is hurting is to ask him and point it out to him or place your hands in the right place for you. This is what I now call the “Where does it hurt?” technique.

Make sure to place your hands either directly above or on either side of the areas where your friend is experiencing pain. By “sandwiching” the area of pain between your hands, you are actually creating a strong resonant field that allows the tissue to change vibration and heal itself. +. When working on a problem with a person’s back or neck, place one hand on each side of the vertebrae of the spine.

Experiment with breathing techniques, paying close attention to the sensations in your hands as you exhale. Make sure you breathe deeply throughout the work. If you feel a little dizzy, you should take a break.

Make sure your hands are relaxed as energy flows faster from loose and open hands. Always remember to use both hands during a session. This helps you create a better field into or through the tissue. As you work, pay close attention to how the sensations in your hands change.

Understand the sensations you feel in your hands

The five basic patterns of energy

There are five primary energy patterns that you are likely to feel in your hands during pranayama healing work:

The Blocked Pattern – At first you feel very little in your hands, and then the sensations gradually increase and reach a peak. Very blocked areas are often areas of chronic problems, diseased organs, or sometimes acute pain (but not often). If you’re working on an area that has a lot of blockage, you’ll probably feel very little in your hands. In most cases, however, you will notice that the energy builds slowly and surely the longer you hold your hands there. This may take some time. You can keep your hands in one position for ten, twenty, forty minutes or even an hour. Over time. The energy in your hands will gradually feel stronger and stronger until it appears to reach a peak in intensity. Sometimes the feeling of energy stays at this peak level for a long time and suddenly reaches a plateau of even greater intensity. More often, the energy begins to level off at some point and can then subside slightly.

The General Pattern – You feel a moderate sensation in your hands that builds to a peak and then decreases. This is the pattern you will probably encounter most often. Sometimes the feeling of energy you feel increases to a very high level and seems to plateau. At this point it’s often a good idea to use some fire breathing to see if you can take it to an even higher level. As you work to direct the energy and increase its intensity, you will eventually notice that it levels off or decreases. In this case, it may be time to move your hands elsewhere.

The Intense Pattern – You feel a very strong energy in your hands that subsides over time. This pattern is most often felt when working with acute symptoms or in a person whose body, for whatever reason, is very receptive to the energy. It looks like this: Being aware of the sensations in your hands and the patterns that energy work usually follows will help you determine how long you should hold your hands in a particular position. You can also just ask your friend how he is doing. If all the pain is gone or has subsided significantly, that’s usually a good sign that the job is done for now.

The Complete Pattern: When you run the energy, sometimes everything seems to be working well, and at some point during the session you may notice that you don’t feel anything in your hands. When you pull your hands away, your hands will feel a strong tingling sensation. This is an indication of the full pattern. The entire pattern occurs when the person has absorbed as much energy as their body wants to absorb. At this point, you no longer have any sensation in your hands when you touch the person. When you come back in ten or twenty minutes, your body may be able to respond to a higher vibration and “absorb” more energy.

The Step Pattern When you have pranic energy, you sometimes feel like the intensity has reached its peak. At this point if you do some fire breathing. You may notice that your hands are now vibrating at an even higher frequency. Just when you think the energy has reached its peak and will no longer rise, practicing the breath of fire again can cause the energy to rise again and again, like climbing stairs. At some point the energy really levels out, subsides, or the feeling leaves your hands, and you know you’re done.

Chapter 4

frequently asked Questions

“Life is not a problem to be solved, but a mystery to be experienced.”

Frank Herbert

Practice pranayama healing techniques

Do you get stronger through practice?

What if I don’t practice for a long time? Will I lose my ability?

Should you expend energy when you’re alone?

Is it important for the person receiving the pranayama healing session or the practitioner to believe that it will help it work?

Pranayama Healing and Personal Energy

Do you use up your energy when you do pranayama healing?

Do you sometimes feel exhausted when attending pranayama healing sessions?

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning?

Preparing for a pranayama healing session

What do I need to do to prepare for a session?

Most practitioners believe that simply holding a session cannot achieve these things either. Is it important that I be grounded before a meeting?

When doing energy training, do you find at the end of the day that energy is no longer as important as it was at the beginning?

Using your hands in a pranayama healing session

How much pressure do you put on your hands when you run energy?

Why is it important to surround the areas you are working on with your hands? Why not just use one hand?

I’ve noticed that sometimes when you demonstrate pranayama healing you use your palms, but other times you use your thumbs or fingertips. Why are you doing this?

The first question to ask yourself is whether you feel a sensation anywhere in your body that you can feel without touching it. Can you think of any part of your body without touching yourself?

If you can feel your hands, feet, face, or any other part of your body by placing your attention there, then you have a starting point and can build from there.

The power of focused energy

How important is it to be focused during sessions?

The client’s experience of a pranayama healing session

How long does it take for people to know something is happening when they receive a session?

What do people usually feel when they receive a pranayama healing session?

Is it the temperature of your hand that people respond to when they say they experience hot or cold sensations?

Is it ever painful to receive the energy?

Does the energy heal conditions other than what you think you are working on?

That happens often. Because the energy goes where it wants, all sorts of surprising healings occur. The most common are people with headaches who find that their sinus pain has also disappeared. It also works the other way around. People who complain of sinus pain often report that their headaches are gone. Once during one of my classes, two students were treating a woman who had severe sinus pain. When the session ended, the woman said she still had sore sinuses. I explained that it wasn’t a perfect system and that it should be given time. The next day she called me and told me her sinuses were still hurting. I told her that this happens occasionally. She continued that her vision, which had always been 20/200 in her right eye, had suddenly changed and was now 20/25, but her sinuses still hurt! She was overjoyed. By the way, her vision did not stabilize at 20/25 but has fluctuated ever since. As she continues to pour energy into her eyes, the situation gradually improves.

If the energy goes automatically to the places where it is needed, why is it important to try to put your hands directly on the most problematic parts of the body?

Pranayama Healing and the Emotions

How does Pranayama Healing affect the emotions of the person I am working on?

Ending a pranayama healing session

Do the sensations in your hands change when the session ends?

How do you determine how many sessions a person needs? There are no hard and fast rules about how many sessions a person needs. If a person has been suffering from a chronic illness for a long time, help often takes longer than with an acute or more recent illness. A general rule of thumb is to continue working on a client for as long as they need help. I would let the client decide how often they need to come. In certain circumstances, he may want a session two or three times a week, or perhaps even every day for a few days. It all depends. It wouldn’t hurt to schedule a series of sessions if you have a chronic back condition. In the long term we have to see where I make progress.

After a session

What can your client do after a session to improve their healing?

Can Pranayama Healing Be Harmful? Can you ever harm someone by giving them too much energy?

Pranayama healing and other modalities

Do you have any suggestions for using Quantum-1ouch in conjunction with other practical healing techniques?

Can anyone learn to do pranayama healing?

Can people with disabilities, blind or deaf people learn pranayama healing work?

Can children learn pranayama healing?

How different are pranayama alternative practitioners from each other?

Pino, can you give me some pointers on how to conduct a pranayama healing session?

Always maintain your breathing techniques.

Always keep your breath connected to your sensations while you have energy. (This quickly becomes habitual and is the nature of practitioners.)

Stay focused to keep the energy as strong as possible.

Pay close attention to what you feel in your hands and use that information appropriately.

I’m still confused. How can I do pranayama healing work and not be a healer?

Chapter 5

Advanced techniques

Resonance factors

Let the power run

Use breathing techniques.

Connect your breath with the energy.

Your intention to heal is a reaction

Choose to feel love and gratitude.

Have an honest expectation

Emphasize a positive expectation that the body not only can heal, but also has the wisdom to do so, and that it can elevate and improve your resonance. The trick to setting expectations is to always be completely honest about where you stand and expect the best based on your experience and confidence. A good place to start is to say to yourself, “I don’t know if it’s possible to heal this or not, but I’m willing to see what happens and I know that the body has a plan of wholeness that he can.” “You don’t have to know how it’s possible, you just have to have access. I’m open to the fact that this is true. Remember that the body has wisdom and the ability to heal itself that far exceeds human understanding. Believing that miracles can happen opens up new possibilities. Because intention and attention are required to control energy, anticipation is a powerful and valuable factor in raising your vibration. Many of the greatest healers I know were aware of the fact and expectation that incredible healings happen quite often and approached their sessions with a joyful sense of positive anticipation.

Ask for help

Do your best

Let go of attachment to the outcome.

Trust

Advanced exercises for running energy

Creating a vortex of energy

Working with chakras and colors

Full spectrum chakra technique

I learned a variation of this technique from a meditation by a spiritual teacher named Lazar for working with the chakras and have adapted it for healing purposes.

First chakra

Take a few minutes to see how strongly you can transfer the feeling to your first chakra.

Second chakra

Third chakra

The third chakra is located in the solar plexus area, above and below your belly button, about the size of your outstretched hand. Feel a ball of bright yellow light in your stomach and feel it spinning in a comfortable direction. Spend a few minutes evoking as much sensation as possible and use the two to six solar breaths to bring more sensation to the area.

Fourth chakra

Fifth chakra

Sixth chakra

Seventh chakra

Full spectrum, one chakra at a time

Tonung

Breathe-Tone-Technik

Getting the client to raise their vibration

Stacking hands and group sessions

Chapter 6

Advanced techniques

The depth, wonder, power and brilliance of your love is not only more than you know; It’s more than you can ever imagine.

The “What You Love Most” Technique

(Also known as the “Julius Technique”)

Your love can be used to become a great healing force.

Allow yourself to remember and relive someone or something in your life that triggers in you an enormous feeling of love, gratitude, happiness, or joy. Simply open your feelings and think about the person, situation, animal, plant, or whatever it is that lights and inspires your passion.

Allow this emotion to fill your body with as many tactile sensations as possible. Pay attention to where in your body you feel the emotion. For example, when you feel love in your chest, feel it there with as much sensation as you can muster and let it spread throughout your body

Allow the tactile sensations of your love, joy, happiness, or gratitude to flow from your hands and combine them with teaching techniques. It’s that simple. Simply use your intention to move the tactile sensation of the emotion through your body and then out of your hands.

Instead of love, you can use any other extremely positive feeling. Other emotions that you can use positively are enthusiasm, satisfaction, wonder or inspiration.

The hang breath

I discovered slope breathing because I automatically did it myself after twenty years. It requires a level of skill that may be challenging for many beginners.

Harmonious toning

The funnel

Flowers

Working with chakras eight to twelve

Eighth chakra

Symbolically, the eighth chakra represents probable realities and the astral plane and can be contacted below the feet. Imagine a ball of blinding and brilliant white light about twenty to ten inches below your feet. Let the ball rotate in the direction you feel comfortable. What’s important is not only that you imagine it spinning, but that you can also feel a physical sensation when it spins.

Ninth chakra

Tenth, eleventh and twelfth chakras

Unless you know better, I recommend channeling energy from all chakras. You can spin them one at a time or all at once and then let the energy flow from your hands

Asking for help

Raise expectations

Heal the past

Combine multiple techniques

Here are some examples of how you can combine techniques while channeling the energy from your hands and continuing breath work:

Tone while rotating the energy, as in the vortex technique or funnel technique. The higher the tone, the faster the energy rotates.

Spin the chakras one at a time while using the “What You Love Most” technique.

Enter the tissue to be healed as described in Chapter 12 while toning and maintaining a high level of anticipation.

One would think that you understand what I’m talking about. Go ahead and create the combinations you like. Have fun!

Chapter 7

Change your posture with energy

On the edge

Confronting the impossible

Change your beliefs, but just follow the instructions and honestly see what happens.

Once you’ve practiced the exercises in Chapter 3, you’re ready to move on. At this point you should be able to:

Feel the prana energy through your body and into your hands.

Do the breathing techniques.

Connect your breathing with your sensations.

Keep in mind

When running the energy with the intention of changing a person’s posture, there are a few important things to keep in mind:

This type of manipulation of the skeletal structure is so harmonious,

The bones seem to “melt” again. You rarely hear a clicking or grinding sound like with many chiropractic maneuvers.

You don’t have to decide where or whether the bones should move – the body figures it out on its own. The person’s body intelligence decides what should happen. In most cases, the person’s body chooses to move the bones back into place. For reasons I can only speculate about, the body seems to like having its structure aligned.

Bones move faster when you touch them lightly. Do not try to direct, push or use force as this is counterproductive. People are so conditioned to control situations through the use of violence. This is a case where force is not only unnecessary but also ineffective. Make sure your hands are very relaxed. Many students, especially people who have performed various types of massage or deep tissue work, have a strong tendency to hold tension rigidly in their hands. Let your hands become soft and relaxed. The flow of prana, which I also call the flow of energy, flows through it more easily when you are not tense.

Structural corrections occur more easily when a person is sitting or standing. For some reason, structural realignment occurs most smoothly when people are upright. This is not to say that you can never create change when a person is lying down, but it is easier when a person is sitting or standing. This is very convenient as you can find a place to stand and, in most cases, sit almost everywhere you go

When you allow energy to flow, many types of healing can occur, and only part of this process causes the bones to move. Because the change in posture caused by a light touch is so dramatic and unexpected, I like to demonstrate it to groups. Many who observe this will naturally assume that this work is about a structural realignment. The movement of bones is like the tip of an iceberg because there is so much more going on beneath the surface. Since we are not readily aware of the countless changes that take place at the cellular level, we say that the bones are moving because we can see it.

Sometimes the bones move quickly, sometimes slowly, and occasionally not at all. There are times when the body is very happy to have the structure as it is, and no matter how much energy you put into the system, it will remain structurally the same. It’s just common sense that you can’t fix what isn’t broken. When treating people with chronic back problems, structural changes can be observed within a few minutes, but it can also take ten, twenty or even thirty minutes for the changes to become visible. In most cases, some postural adjustments occur within two to five minutes, sometimes even within seconds.

If you have successfully completed the exercises in Chapter 3, then you are actually ready, even though you may not believe it!

There are two places in the body where the bones move most noticeably and quickly: the hips and the occiput. To see that you can change posture with a light touch, let’s start with the hips.

Measurement and change of hip position

Find someone whose one hip is higher than the other. Some people have long legs and this technique cannot correct that. The vast majority of people can be adjusted if they are not properly aligned.

Place your fingertips on the ileal ridge (top of the hip bone) and press down lightly and evenly on both sides. To see if one side is higher than the other, you need to have your eyes at eye level with the other spot you are measuring. I have to constantly remind students to get down on one knee so they can check if their hips are straight. In many cases the difference will be quite noticeable, in other cases the difference will be insignificant. To test this yourself, I suggest you find some people who are high on a site.

Once you have determined which side is higher and how much higher it is, take your palms and gently place them on the ridge of the ileum. Don’t push down, just start the energy flow. Make a full-body movement, feel full sensations gathering in your hands, and use one of the breathing techniques. For this demonstration, I would suggest that one to four breaths should work quite well. The trick is to continue breathing and directing the energy into the ileum for one to ten minutes. Sometimes the bones move almost immediately as soon as they are touched; sometimes it takes longer.

Be sure to ask the person you are working on if they can feel anything or experience exciting sensations. Many people can feel the energy almost the second they start running.

On the back of the ileum, follow exactly the instructions you used on the front. The ileum is a surprisingly complex structure because it can rotate sideways, up and down, and in all sorts of ways. Sometimes one side is high in the front and the other side is high in the back. It is always a good idea to balance both the front and back of the ileum.

Measuring and changing the position of the occipital crest

Chiropractors have told me that changing the bones of the skull is a great way to get the body to realign the entire spine.

If you slide your thumbs up either side of the neck and press in gently, you will eventually get to the base of the skull. The tissue there is not as soft as the neck because you are now pushing against the bone.

Try to place your thumbs so that they are the same distance from the center of the head, with one thumb on each side. There is usually a small edge on either side where your thumbs can fit comfortably.

Don’t let the person you’re measuring move their hair out of the way. Raising the hair tilts the head and makes it impossible for you to judge whether the occipital ridge is flat or not. Instead, place your thumbs over the hair and push it up.

Look closely at the positions of your thumbs to see if they are even with each other. Adjust your body so that your eyes are level with the back of your head. If you want to get good results, you need to have your eyes at thumb level. Admittedly, some of my students seem capable of this, and others never become proficient.

Have the customer take a seat. The power of this move can be quite remarkable. I saw a woman faint for a few minutes and several others almost faint. These rare individuals are more likely to faint while standing. These extreme reactions are the body’s way of finding a new balance. People with these reactions always felt much better after the session.

With a client in a sitting position, lightly touch the base of the occiput with your thumbs and place your fingertips on the sides of their head. Let the energy flow from your fingertips and use one of the breathing techniques. The skull bones usually move in the first five to twenty seconds that you do this. There is also an advantage to doing this step longer.

If you’ve been able to do the energy exercises in Chapter 3 and have worked with a few people, you should have seen by now that bones actually move. I suggest you enjoy this experience.

Chapter 8

Work for back and neck problems

Love can unite your breath with intention, as if you could focus light and ignite fire.

Work on both sides of the vertebrae

Compensation

Keilbein

Back of head

Keilbein

Back of head

1 cervical spine

2 cervical spine

3 cervical spine

4 cervical spine

5 cervical spine

6 cervical spine

1 Thorax

2 Thorax

3 Thorax

4 Thorax

5 Thorax

6 Thorax

7 Thorax

8 Thorax

9 Thorax

10 Thorax

11 Thorax

12 Thorax

1 lumbar spine

2 lumbar spine

3 lumbar spine

4 lumbar spine

5 lumbar spine

sacrum

coccyx

sacrum

General points to consider for neck and back pain

Ask the person in pain to point to the exact spot where they are in pain. Place your hands there and let the energy flow. Don’t make assumptions about where the pain is. The closer you are to the exact point, the faster the effect occurs.

Use a tripod hand position or palms when touching your client. The tripod is excellent if you are comfortable; Otherwise, use the palms, thumbs, or fingertips. Remember that you can direct the energy from any part of your body when you implement your intention.

Place your hands in the most comfortable position you can find. I recommend that you move if you don’t feel comfortable and find a position that makes you feel comfortable.

Do not use force or pressure when touching. Keep your hands relaxed and let the energy do the work.

Work on people’s necks and backs while sitting or standing. Standing generally works best for the lower back, while sitting works best for the neck. If the tissue is injured, it is probably best for the person to sit or lie down. Most importantly, make sure the person you are working with is comfortable.

The trick is to keep breathing and use one of your chosen energy techniques. Make sure you connect your breathing with the feeling of energy

Hold the points for as long as necessary. Pay attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. It may take as little as a few minutes or require repeated hour-long sessions to help your client. The easiest way to find out is to give energy and ask the person how they are doing.

Track the pain or feeling. Have a dialogue with the person you are working with and let them tell you if the pain has shifted or moved. Change the position of your hands to follow the pain or sensation

Increase the power of your work by having the person you are working on breathe deeply too.

For longer sessions and particularly difficult areas, you can place a person face up or face down on a massage table with their hands on their spine. You can also place the person face up on the massage table with your hands under their spine.

Working with neck pain

Using your fingertips on the sides of your head along the line of the temporal suture, apply energy to the occipital spine for one to two minutes.

Be sure to work on both sides of the cervical vertebrae, paying particular attention to the painful areas.

You may need to pay special attention to the atlas, axis and seventh cervical vertebrae.

Be sure to target the energy to areas of the client’s lower back where there is tension or pain, which may equate to neck pain.

Adjust your hips. Front and back. as shown in the previous chapter.

Working with lower back pain

Adjust hips front and back as previously described

Direct energy to the areas of pain.

Direct energy into the neck, particularly areas of tension or pain. Follow the guidelines for working on the neck listed in the previous section.

Continue the dialogue and chase the pain or sensation.

Working with sciatica

Follow the guidelines for working your lower back with these supplements:

Use your thumbs and pay special attention to the areas of the buttocks shown here. Work on both sides of the buttocks, paying more attention to the painful side.

Direct energy to any area of the leg or foot that is feeling pain. Go ahead and chase the pain or feeling wherever it takes you.

Treat any other area that feels pain during or after the session.

Middle back pain

If there are problems in the middle of the back, you need to often do relaxation exercises in the neck and lower back. You can do as follows:

Direct energy into the occiput and neck.

Direct energy into the lower back and balance the hips.

Treat the painful area.

These simple guidelines will work wonders for most back pain caused by misalignments and injuries. Of course, this is not the intended treatment for back pain due to kidney problems.

Chapter 9

Work throughout the body

Open your eyes, pause to wonder, and stand in awe as you realize the true nature of your gifts.

healing Hands

The basic hand sandwich (hold the mayonnaise) sandwiching means having one hand on one side and the other hand on the other side of the body part you are treating.

Grasp the part of the body that needs to be healed with your hands as close as possible to and on either side of the problem you are working on. If possible, go directly to the specific area. Of course, use common sense. That is, do not put your hands in a wound or touch a burn. A workaround may mean placing your hands above and below or on either side of the point you want to focus the energy on.

Use your fingertips or a tripod to direct energy into very small areas. The concentration of energy works very well in such cases. This also helps you bring your hands closer to the center of the area that needs healing.

Pursue the pain. Have a dialogue with the person you are working on and track their sensations or pain on their body.

Make sure your body feels comfortable while working.

The trick is to continue breathing throughout the session.

Running energy directly on or near the surface

Since I’m not with you when you practice, I’ll have to settle for nagging you from a distance. The trick is to keep breathing!

Special conditions

Headache

occiput

Bone

Atlas

axis

Cervical spine

Cervical vertebrae

Thorax
Thorax

Rest your head around the area of pain.

Balance the occipital spine.

Introduce energy into the seams.

You may also need to direct energy into the atlas and axis.

Eye problems

Sinus-Problems

Sinus problems often respond very quickly to the direct introduction of energy. Use fingertips or palms

Temporal-Mandibulargelenk (TMJ)

throat

Place your hands gently on or around the person’s neck. There is no need to worry about doing anything wrong.

Carpal tunnel syndrome and repetitive strain injuries

Be sure to do the following:

Direct energy directly into the wrists. Make sure the person’s hand is in a comfortable upright position, as shown here.

Direct energy to the area of the seventh cervical vertebra and the first thoracic vertebra.

If you have pain in your lower back, make sure you energize there too.

Shoulder problems

Direct energy directly to the area that hurts. Be sure to ask the person you are working on to make sure your hands are in the correct position.

Also try channeling energy from the armpit into the shoulder, as shown.

If these movements were unsuccessful, try working the seams, occipital back, neck, lower back and hips, then go back to the shoulder.

windpipe

Lunge

esophagus

Heart

spleen

Adrenal glands (above the kidneys).

liver

Kidneys

Qvarie

Small intestine

Blase

genitals

colon

Rectum

organs

Simply introducing energy into the heart can improve blood pressure, cardiac arrhythmias and heart palpitations.

pineal gland

Pituitary gland

thyroid

Hypothalamus

Thymusdrüse

adrenal glands (above the kidneys)

Lymph nodes

spleen

Pancreas

ovaries (in women)

Lymphatic vessels

testicles (in men)

immune system

You can use the energy to rebuild or heal the immune system:

Direct energy into the endocrine glands, which include the pineal gland, pituitary gland, thyroid, thymus, adrenal glands, ovaries and testes.

Conduct energy into the

Lymphatic system, located primarily around the neck, armpits, chest, breasts, abdomen, and inner thighs.

Direct energy to important organs – heart, lungs, liver and kidneys.

Direct energy to where the client is in pain.

With these few simple guidelines, you can do incredible healing work with your family, friends, and those lucky enough to be around you.

Chapter 10

self-healing

The heart of healing is the heart.

Apply energy to yourself

Guidelines for self-healing sessions

Practice channeling energy into yourself regularly and often. Self-healing may require many sessions. So if you practice full body movements and running energy, it can be a good idea to give yourself strength. You can practice while watching TV or movies, or even reading a book. This can be a one-handed session unless you find a unique way to hold the book.

Identify any part of your body that you can comfortably reach and place your hands directly on the areas you cannot pinch. For example, it would be difficult to clamp your own heart between your hands, so place both hands over your heart.

If you are working on an inaccessible area, such as the middle of the back, you can use distance healing techniques as described in Chapter 12.

To make sessions as powerful as possible, pump the breath by exaggerating breathing techniques. If you lie down, you can do the breath of fire for much longer without feeling dizzy. This way you can change your vibration more profoundly and be more effective. People with certain heart conditions may not be able to do this safely. If you are unsure, ask your doctor.

This can be a good time to try combinations of techniques. You can use more than one technique at the same time. For example, you could use toning and the enhanced resonance technique described in Chapter 12 while working on yourself.

Be patient. Many people are happy to spend forty or sixty minutes working on a friend, but barely find five or ten minutes to work on themselves.

Chapter 11

Healing animals

“Monkeys are my favorite people.”

Unknown

Just like with my human patients, I never know what the energy will do. I just trust that something extraordinary will happen.

Guidelines for working with animals

Be sure to directly energize or direct any area that you feel needs healing. A diagnosis from a veterinarian can help you pinpoint the problem.

Be sure to maintain your breathing techniques throughout the work because the trick is to keep breathing!

Since the animal cannot speak, pay close attention to the sensations in your hands as described in Chapter 3. This will help you know how long you should keep your hands in one place.

Realize that you won’t do it “wrong.” Energy finds its way where it needs to go and does what needs to be done.

Deliver a series of sessions if necessary.

When you brush your pet’s hair, try to give him energy at the same time. This works with any type of petting motion, be it scratching behind the ears or rubbing the belly.

Try to energize them before or during bathing. For a special treat, you can also add energy to the bath water (see Chapter 15). This works especially well if baths aren’t on your pet’s wish list.

They can also put energy into their food and water, as well as your own food (see Chapter 15). Animals primarily eat canned food, which increases the energetic signature of their food.

I am sure you will be quite surprised and delighted with the results of your work.

Chapter 12: Distance Healing

Infinitely faster than the speed of light, our compassion and prayers move at the speed of love.

Be connected

Numerous books have been written about the strange and almost magical world of quantum physics. In Gary Zukav’s beautiful book The Dancing W Li Masters he writes:

Distance healing

The data above represents a baseline of brain wave activity after the subject had rested for thirty minutes.

Five minutes after the distance healing began. Note the significant increase in delta activity.

After thirty minutes of distance healing, all brain wave activity has become profoundly silent.

Here are just a few examples to give you a taste of how distance healing can work:

Distance Healing Guidelines

Connect with your spirituality. This is useful for those who are prone to this. Asking for help can only improve the work.

Use breathing and let the energy flow. As with all pranayama healing, the trick is to keep breathing, so keep breathing and let the energy flow powerfully from your hands

Combine different techniques. Distance healing can be a great opportunity to experiment and combine different techniques during the session.

Take your time. Distance healing sessions can last thirty, forty-five. or sixty minutes. This can require a lot of commitment from the practitioner.

Don’t be tied to the outcome. As with other pranayama healing works. It is important to keep in mind that you are simply holding a resonance and that you are responsible for the healing.

The amplified resonance technology

Place your hands on the client as you normally would and begin letting the energy flow.

As you direct the energy from your hands, use your mind to “penetrate” the tissue to be treated. With each breath, keep your mind in the tissue you are working on and stay there while simultaneously channeling the energy from your hands.

Chapter 13: Emotional Healing

Beneath the murky waters of unwanted and denied emotions lie the vast and hidden treasures of who we truly are.

Emotions and the healing process

If you shine light on a shadow, it disappears.

It is well beyond the scope of this book to deal with the main problems of emotional causality. Here are some approaches you can use in your pranayama healing sessions.

Guidelines for working with emotions that arise during a session

Grounding: Maintain the sensations in your body as I described in Chapter 3. This will help you stay grounded and be able to help better. (Grounding is described in Chapter 4)

Direct energy into the occipital spine. This can help break old thoughts and emotional patterns and can sometimes be helpful with addictions.

Use distance healing. Distance healing can be useful when treating psychotherapy patients is not therapeutic, contraindicated or physically impossible.

Chapter 14: Diet and Lifestyle Healing

If you have a hole in the bottom of your bucket, it doesn’t really matter how much water you put in it, otherwise it will all spill out.

Fix Me Doc

Lifestyle habits you might consider

Find stretching and cardiovascular exercises that you enjoy and do them regularly. Moderate exercise is most beneficial.

Practice relaxation for at least ten to fifteen minutes a day. Meditation can be helpful.

Focus your thoughts and feelings on what you love, your dreams, and your gratitude.

Expressing stored emotions honestly and releasing them in a self-actualizing way.

Do what you love, even if just for a few minutes a day, and engage in life.

Give up smoking, excessive alcohol consumption and dangerous drugs.

Nutritional suggestions

Avoid food additives, preservatives and processed foods such as white flour and white rice.

Many people cannot tolerate wheat, cheese or milk; There may also be other foods that cause allergic reactions. If you have doubts, try this simple test. Take your pulse on an empty stomach and then eat a suspicious food. Check your pulse again after fifteen, thirty, and sixty minutes. If your heart rate has increased by ten percent or more, you are probably allergic to this food and may need to avoid it

Eat grains and starchy and leafy vegetables. About 25% of your diet should consist of meat, fish, eggs, nuts, seeds and milk.

Take nutritional supplements. These can include:

Vitamin A, 10,000 units per day

B complex

Vitamin C, 1000 mg with bioflavonoids once or twice daily

MCHA Calcium 1000-1500 mg per day as needed

Magnesium glycinate or taurate 500-750 mg per day

Zink 15-25 mg pro Tag

Copper 1.5-2.5 mg per day MSM Sulfur 50LI0UgaDay

Vitamin E. 400 to 1200 units per day

Selenium, 200 megabytes per day

Calcium deficiency syndromes

Chapter 15: Funny Stuff

“Life is a gift and our task is to learn to accept it.

– Lazarus

Have fun with inanimate objects, belts and gloves

Have fun with your expensive guitar or Stradivarius

Fun with water and food, recharging water

If you want to supply life energy to each of your hundred trillion cells, all you need to do is recharge and drink water. Filling with water or another liquid is quite easy. Using both hands, simply hold the glass or bottle with just your palms or fingertips so that your left and right hands are not touching each other, and then allow energy to flow into the water for a few minutes or more. This hand position forces the energy to move into the fluid between your hands.

Recharge on water with someone you love

Load up on wine

Grapefruitsaft

Convert energy into food or drinks and vitamins

Fun with people: chakra charging for two

Funny star

Keeping a partner

Remember, the trick is to keep breathing! Am I repeating myself? Yes, and I do it on purpose. Because it is so fundamental: the art is to keep breathing!

Sex – How to make a good thing even better

Group hug

Work with what you know

Chapter 16: The Future of Energy Healing

Energy is the actual substance behind the appearance of matter and forms.

– Dr. Randolph Stone

Introduce

If you view the life force as real, I see healers working in every hospital, emergency room, and ambulance. Groups of healers would work on patients several times a day. DR.

If Life Force is accepted, I expect all professional sports teams to travel with a team of experienced practitioners. There is no question that this work accelerates the healing of injuries.

I imagine that life healing work is widespread in both developed and third world countries.

Ultimately, I can imagine that this work will lead to breakthroughs that I cannot even imagine today.

If a phenomenon is not due to a psychological mechanism but is caused by an energy force, we are now discussing the creation of a new branch of science. I like to think of it as “life”

Force Science” as the name is universal and would encompass a variety of natural healing methods.

Prana Healing – The Trick Is To Keep On Breathing